LCCI Level 1 How To Pass Book Keeping Recommeded Book

prelims
15/3/03
12:36 pm
Page iii
How to Pass
Book-keeping
FIRST LEVEL Teacher’s Guide
Keith F Bird
MSc BSc (Econ) ACIS
prelims
15/3/03
12:36 pm
Page iv
First published 1999 © LCCI CET 1999 British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication

Data Bird, Keith F How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level – 2nd ed. Teacher’s guide
1. Book-keeping – Study and teaching I.Title 657.2’0071 ISBN 1 86247 060 X All
rights reserved; no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise without the prior written
permission of the Publisher. This book may not be lent, resold, hired out, or
otherwise disposed of by way of trade in any form of binding or cover, other than
that in which it is published, without the prior consent of the Publisher. 10 9 8 7
6 5 4 3 2 1
Typeset by the London Chamber of Commerce and Industry Examinations Board Printed
and bound in Hong Kong by Peninsula Publishers
prelims
15/3/03
12:36 pm
Page v
Contents
About the author Acknowledgements Introduction Cross-references to How to Pass
Book-keeping, First Level (student’s book) Lesson 1 The accounting equation
Transactions through ‘double entry’ 2 Purchases, sales, and returns 3 Expenses:
profit or loss 4 Balancing accounts: the trial balance 5 Trading and Profit & Loss
Accounts 6 The balance sheet 7 Final accounts: more features 8 The division of the
ledger 9 Bank facilities Cash Book: 2 columns 10 Cash Book: 3 columns – cash
discount 11 Purchases and Sales Day Books 12 Returns Day Books 13 Accruals and
prepayments – expenses 14 Accruals and prepayments – income 15 Depreciation of
fixed assets 16 Bad debts and provision for doubtful debts 17 Bank reconciliation
statements 18 Petty Cash Book – imprest system 19 Capital and revenue expenditure
20 The journal 21 Errors in the accounts 1 22 Errors in the accounts 2 23 Final
accounts and adjustments further considered Stock valuation 24 Club and society
accounts 25 The presentation of answers Page vii vii viii x
1 11 19 23 27 32 36 44 49 60 70 78 88 99 105 120 132 141 151 158 168 174 178 188
198
v
prelims
15/3/03
12:36 pm
Page vi
Contents
Appendix 1: Exercises, some worked solutions, and support material Appendix 2:

Summarized answers to selected exercises Appendix 3: Glossary Notes
201 312 321 326
vi
prelims
15/3/03
12:36 pm
Page vii
About the author

Keith Bird has had over 35 years’ experience lecturing in business studies in
further and higher education and has taught professional courses at all levels. He
is the author of the student’s book How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level,
published by the London Chamber of Commerce and Industry Examinations Board
(LCCIEB). He has also written several study manuals that have been published for
professional courses. Keith Bird’s association with the LCCIEB extends over 25
years and, for much of that time, he has served as a Chief Examiner in First Level
Book-keeping and Second Level Book-keeping and Accounts. Acknowledgements In the
preparation of this book, my thanks are due to Derek Skidmore MSc, FCCA, ACMA, co-
author of How to Pass Book-keeping and Accounts, Second Level, for his review of
the draft of the book and for his helpful suggestions. My thanks are also due to
the staff of the LCCIEB Publishing Department for preparing this text for
publication.
vii
prelims
15/3/03
12:36 pm
Page viii
Introduction
The How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level:Teacher’s Guide is closely geared to the
LCCIEB First Level Book-keeping Extended Syllabus. It is intended for a teaching
course that extends over 60 hours.There are 24 lessons concerning book-keeping,
each of 2 1/4 hours’ duration. The remaining teaching time should be used for
Lesson 25, which covers the important topic of presenting examination answers,
together with revision and pre-examination preparation. The book is addressed to
the teacher. It indicates the importance of particular topics and subject points
and provides hints about how to present material. The Teacher’s Guide is intended
to complement the student’s book How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level. At the same
time, with a few exceptions, the explanations, examples, and exercises are ‘free
standing’, providing the teacher with a store of additional teaching resource. The
Teacher’s Guide should be used in combination with the student’s book and, for this
purpose, cross-references between the two books are provided on page x. Individual
cross-references are also given at certain points within the text. The approach
adopted in the Teacher’s Guide is that of keeping in mind the question ‘Why?’ At
each stage, the stress should be on developing the student’s understanding of the
need for, and effect of, the various book-keeping entries, as well as of the
subject as a whole. Only by this means can inappropriate examination answers be
prevented and a sound basis be provided for applying knowledge in the business
world and/or for further accounting studies. As the book progresses, the material
becomes more difficult. The early stages of the book assume that the student has
only a limited knowledge of business and accounts. Gradually, more elements,
features, and terms are introduced that sometimes require the modification of
methods for recording transactions already learnt. For example, at first,
transactions are recorded in the ledger only. With the introduction of day books,
the system of recording transactions changes. The time spent on the ‘ledger only’
entries is not, however, wasted because it enables the student to appreciate the
relationship between the ledger and the day books. Inevitably, some students will
come to the course with some knowledge or awareness of aspects of book-keeping and,
understandably, they might question why a particular matter is not taken account of
at a certain stage.This situation might apply in the case of the depreciation of
fixed assets, which is not dealt with until Lesson 15. The progressive nature of
the course is discussed at the beginning of Lesson 2. At that stage, the teacher
might find it helpful to explain to the class that different features are to be
included as the course develops. The text includes numerous examples, together with
short reinforcement exercises. Appendix 1 contains exercises for Lessons 1–24 and
support material. Certain of the exercises are immediately followed by worked
solutions; they are marked with an asterisk (*) both in the Appendix and in the
main part of the book. The exercises are suitable for photocopying as
required.Appendix 2 contains summarized answers, where appropriate, to questions
for which solutions are not provided. These summarized answers include the
viii
prelims
15/3/03
12:36 pm
Page ix
Introduction
results of certain calculations, key account entries, and other significant figures
such as gross profit, net profit, asset totals, and trial balance totals. Other
answers or parts of answers, too detailed for inclusion, such as account or journal
entries, may be established by reference to the text of the book as well as by
reference to the fully worked solutions in Appendix 1. It is advisable to make full
use of the Glossary.
ix
prelims
15/3/03
12:36 pm
Page x
Cross-references to How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level (student’s book)

Teacher’s Guide Page Lesson 1 1 The accounting equation Transactions through
‘double entry’ 10 2 Purchases, sales, and returns 17 3 Expenses: profit or loss 21
4 Balancing accounts: the trial balance 25 5 Trading and Profit & Loss Accounts 30
6 The balance sheet 33 7 Final accounts: more features 43 8 The division of the
ledger Vertical layout of the balance sheet 49 9 Bank facilities Cash Book: 2
columns 56 10 Cash Book: 3 columns – cash discount 65 11 Purchases and Sales Day
Books 73 12 Returns Day Books 83 13 Accruals and prepayments – expenses 94 14
Accruals and prepayments – income 99 15 Depreciation of fixed assets 113 16 Bad
debts and provision for doubtful debts 124 17 Bank reconciliation statements 132 18
Petty Cash Book – imprest system 142 19 Capital and revenue expenditure 148 20 The
journal 157 21 Errors in the accounts 1 (types of error) 163 22 Errors in the
accounts 2 (adjusting for errors; the effects of errors) 167 23 Final accounts and
adjustments further considered Stock valuation 177 24 Club and society accounts 187
25 The presentation of answers How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level Chapter Page 1
1 2 9 3 15 4 22 5 30 6 38 7 49 8 54 9 66 8 60 10 73 11 79 12 85 13 96 14 104 15 120
15 120 16 133 17 18 19 20 21 22 152 164 180 189 201 210
22 23 23 24 Appendices 1, 2, and 3
210 231 237 246 272–84
x
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 1
Lesson 1: The accounting equation Transactions through ‘double entry’

Topic summary
● ● ● ● ● ●
The need for accounting records The information that needs to be recorded The means
of obtaining resources, ie assets: ownership v. external sources of funds The
business as an entity The dual effect of a business transaction Double-entry
recording of transactions
Extended Syllabus references

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 Explanation and use of the terms debtor, creditor, asset,
liability, capital The accounting equation: assets = capital + liabilities and its
expression in the balance sheet The effect upon the accounting equation of basic
business transactions (including the single-side transaction, eg use of bank
balance to buy fixed assets) The effect upon the accounting equation of the dual-
type transaction, ie where the effect upon one side of the equation is matched by a
combination of 2 (or possibly more) effects on the other side Purpose of the use of
debit and credit for the recording of transactions The preparation of T-type
accounts Specifying a transaction/entry within an account, ie date together with,
normally, the name of the ‘other’ account/day book involved in that particular
transaction/ entry Completion of debit and credit entries recording individual
transactions
2.1 2.2 2.3
2.4
The underlying purpose of this lesson is to develop recognition of the need for,
and purpose of, recording business transactions and their effects. Understanding
the two-fold aspect of any transaction (benefit and detriment, and plus and minus)
is essential for a grasp of double-entry book-keeping. In the earlier stages of the
lesson – especially in meeting the aims of Steps 1 to 3 – much can be done by using
the question-and-answer method with the class, including a brief discussion of the
students’ responses. The varied backgrounds and experiences of class members should
be drawn on whenever possible. Always relate the discussion to a particular aim,
listing points on the whiteboard or overhead projector as appropriate.
1
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 2
The accounting equation
Step 1
Aim: to develop an appreciation of the need for business records of account
Following a brief introductory ‘chat’ with the class, ask the students to form
pairs and to discuss and write down answers to the question:‘Why does a business
need to keep records of account?’ At this stage, the students are likely to give
broadly based answers, such as:
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
to to to to to to to
run (more) effectively and efficiently; know what money is coming in and going out;
know what the business is earning and spending; control the business: to make
adjustments as necessary; make decisions about the future; provide information for
making decisions about the future; deal with the tax authorities.
Step 2
Aim: to recognize the key areas of information that need to be recorded From the
answers to the questions in Step 1, identify areas of information that will be
required; for example: Cash: availability and movements Amounts owed by the
business Amounts owed to the business The possessions - ‘assets’ Amount of money
invested in the business Purchases Sales Expenses Profit Capital
Step 3
Aim: to recognize the resources needed and, broadly, the means of obtaining them:
proprietor versus external sources While the students remain in pairs, 1 Ask them
to imagine that they are establishing a business, such as a shop or factory. Ask
them to write down the resources that they would need.
2
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 3
2 As the students suggest the resources, list these on the whiteboard in two
categories, those that are: (a) measurable in money terms, eg cash, premises,
machines, and motor vehicles; and (b) less measurable, eg skills, contacts, and
experience. Show that category (a) is recorded in the accounts as assets. Category
(b) is less easily recorded, but may be, for example, as skills as part of wage
payments. It will be dealt with at a later stage. Explain how the assets might be
obtained. Show that, in establishing a business, a proprietor might: (a) treat his
or her own motor vehicle to be for use within the business; (b) put his or her
money into the business, so that assets can be bought; (c) borrow money, ie obtain
a loan. Emphasize that (a) + (b) = capital, ie the proprietor’s stake; and that (c)
= liability.
Step 4
Aim: to understand the business as an entity and to appreciate the ‘accounting
equation’
1 Explain to the students that a business is an entity that is distinct from its
owner. As a result, the accounts are to be kept for the business and they are
separate from the owner’s accounts.You may illustrate the concept like this:
invests in Business accounts withdraws from Personal accounts
2 Explain, with reference to Step 3, that the money a proprietor invests to set up
and run a business is usually supplemented by borrowed money. The means of
financing a business may be expressed as ‘the accounting equation’:
eg Assets = capital + liability (eg a loan) Assets £15,000 = capital £12,000 +
liability £3,000
Alternatively, the equation may be expressed as:

eg Assets less liabilities = capital Assets £15,000 less £3,000 = £12,000
3
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 4
3 Ask the students to work through the following exercise, inserting the missing
figure in each of the columns.
Assets £ 2,430 Capital £ 1,920 3,060 2,500 4,120 Liabilities £ 1,040 780 0
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
6,530 5,830
Step 5
Aim: to understand the effect of business transactions; their double aspect
1 Show that the financial position of a business at any point in time – the
accounting equation – can be expressed in the form of a balance sheet, eg:
F Lim Balance sheet at 1 March Year 3 £ Office furniture Motor vehicle Cash at bank
800 5,300 1,900 8,000 Capital Loan from J Black £ 7,000 1,000 8,000
2 Explain the term ‘business transaction’. Show, using the following example, the
effect of transactions, stage by stage, upon a balance sheet. It is important not
to confuse the students with transaction moves that are too rapid. Ensure they
fully understand the effect of each transaction before you move onto the next. The
transactions (which are defined in brackets) of F Lim in Year 3 are as follows: (a)
On 2 March, a typewriter (classed as office equipment) is bought by drawing a
cheque on the bank for £150. (Purchase of an asset, with payment by cheque.) (b) On
4 March, goods are bought from T Smith on credit for £500. (Purchase of an asset on
credit.) (c) On 9 March, Lim sells some of the goods that had cost £200 for the
same amount, receiving a cheque in exchange. (Sale of asset, with immediate
payment.)
4
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 5
(d) On 12 March, Lim sells some goods that had cost £200 to K Woolf ‘on credit’ for
the same amount. (Sale of asset on credit.) (e) On 16 March, Lim sends a cheque for
£300 towards the amount owing to T Smith. (Payment of an amount owing.) (f) On 21
March, Lim receives a cheque for £200 from his debtor, K Woolf. (Receipt of money
from a debtor.) 3 Use the following example to show the effect of transaction (a)
on F Lim’s balance sheet:
F Lim Balance sheet at 2 March Year 3 £ £ Office furniture 800 Office equipment (+
150) 150 Motor vehicle 5,300 Cash at bank (- 150) 1,750 8,000 Capital Loan from J
Black 7,000 1,000
8,000
This example shows that only the assets have changed. 4 Use the following example
to show the effect of transaction (b) on the balance sheet:
F Lim Balance sheet at 4 March Year 3 £ Office furniture Office equipment Motor
vehicle Goods Cash at bank 800 150 5,300 500 1,750 8,500 Capital Loan from J Black
Creditor – T Smith £ 7,000 1,000 500
8,500
This balance sheet shows that both the assets and liabilities have increased. 5 Use
the following example to show the effect on the balance sheet after transaction
(c):
vehicle Goods (- 200) Cash at bank (+ 200) 800 150 5,300 300 1,950 8,500 Capital
Loan from J Black Creditor – T Smith £ 7,000 1,000 500
8,500
Here, there has been a switch between two assets.
5
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 6
6 Use the following to show the effect after transaction (d):

F Lim Balance sheet at 12 March Year 3 £ Office furniture 800 Office equipment 150
Motor vehicle 5,300 Goods (-200) 100 Debtor – K Woolf (+ 200) 200 Cash at bank
1,950 8,500 Capital Loan from J Black Creditor – T Smith £ 7,000 1,000 500
8,500
From this balance sheet, a change of assets can be seen. 7 Use the following to
show the effect after transaction (e):
vehicle Goods Debtor – K Woolf Cash at bank (- 300) 800 150 5,300 100 200 1,650
8,200 £ Capital 7,000 Loan from J Black 1,000 Creditor – T Smith (-300) 200
8,200
From this balance sheet, a reduction in assets matched by a reduction in

liabilities can be seen. 8 Use the following to show the effect after transaction
(f ):
vehicle Goods Cash at bank (+ 200) 800 150 5,300 100 1,850 8,200 Capital Loan from
J Black Creditor – T Smith £ 7,000 1000 200
8,200
Here, there is a change of assets: an increase in bank and the removal of the
debtor balance from the balance sheet.
6
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 7
9 A list of terms and their definitions follows. Explain the terms to the students.
credit sales debtor creditor on account goods sold with payment to be received by
an agreed future date a person or organization to whom goods have been sold on
credit and from whom money is due a person or organization from whom goods have
been bought on credit and to whom money is owed payment towards an amount owing;
part payment
It is vital that students understand the meaning of terms as they are used. For the
following lessons, reference should be made to the Glossary on pages 321–5. 10
Explain that a transaction may involve a combination of assets or liabilities. For
example, a motor vehicle is bought for £6,000.The purchase is paid for by: (a)
drawing on the bank account; and (b) a loan from Birclays Finance Limited.
Consequently:
Assets £ + 6,000 - 2,000 4,000 Motor vehicle Bank Liabilities Birclays Finance
Limited £ + 4,000 4,000
11 Emphasize the equation:

assets = capital + liabilities
12 Give the students each a copy of exercises T/1.1, T/1.2, and T/1.3 in the
Appendix (page 201) and ask them to work through them.
Step 6
Aim: to be able to record transactions through double entry
1 Explain the necessity of keeping separate accounts for information and control
needs. Updating the balance sheet each time a transaction occurs takes up too much
time; keeping separate accounts is a quicker and clearer method of updating
records.
7
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 8
2 Explain that the two-sided form of recording accounts (which has long been in
use) is to be followed:
Left-hand side = debit side (or Dr) Right-hand side = credit side (or Cr)
3 Set out the rules for double entry, which are as follows, on the overhead
projector or whiteboard:
Assets Liabilities Capital an increase a decrease an increase a decrease an
increase a decrease debit credit credit debit credit debit
Alternatively, you may show the following layout:

Asset account increases + Liability account decreases Capital account decreases
increases + increases + decreases -
4 Emphasize that the purpose of debit and credit is to allow for the two-fold
effect of each transaction. Always ensure that, for each transaction, students
understand the logic of the entries. By making sure that the logic is clear, the
account entries will have meaning, helping the students to avoid making mistakes. 5
Explain the form of entries for T-type accounts thoroughly. Illustrate the
following layout on the whiteboard or overhead projector:
Dr Date Cr Details £ Date Details £
The ‘details’ column should always show the name of the matching account (ie where
the double entry is completed) eg:
8
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 9
Bank Year 6 1 Jul Capital £ 10,000 Capital Year 6 1 Jul Bank £ 10,000
6 Work through the exercise below with the students. For each transaction: (a)
emphasize the transaction effect; (b) stress how the double entry is achieved.
Exercise (i) Gladys Lane sets up in business on 1 July Year 6 by placing £10,000
into a new business bank account. (ii) On 4 July Year 6, she buys office equipment,
paying £400 by cheque. (iii) On 7 July Year 6, she buys goods from Landau Limited
for £360 on credit. (iv) On 26 July Year 6, Gladys Lane pays the amount owing to
Landau Limited by cheque. Solution
Bank Year 6 1 Jul Capital £ 10,000 Year 6 4 Jul 26 Jul Capital Year 6 1 Jul Office
equipment Year 6 4 Jul Bank £ 400 Goods Year 6 7 Jul Landau Ltd £ 360 Landau
Limited Year 6 26 Jul Bank £ 360 Year 6 7 Jul Goods £ 360 Bank £ 10,000 Office
equipment Landau Ltd £ 400 360
9
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 10
7 Emphasize that entries in accounts should not be cramped together, but should be
clearly spaced without being too far apart. 8 Remind the students that, in making
the entries, they need to: (a) record the date correctly; and (b) correctly enter
the name of the related account in the ‘details’ column. 9 Stress that, in the
examination, marks may be lost if account entries are poor.An example of an
avoidable error is writing the word ‘Cheque’ instead of ‘Bank’ for the name of the
matching account, when ‘Cheque’ is not the name of the account. 10 Ask the students
to work through exercises T/1.4 and T/1.5 in the Appendix (page 202).
10
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 11
Lesson 2: Purchases, sales, and returns

Topic summary
● ● ● ●
The various meanings of the term ‘purchases’ Account entries for purchases and
sales transactions The return of goods: allowances Account entries for returns
inwards and outwards

5.1 5.2 The various possible accounting meanings of the term purchases The effects
on (double-entry) accounts of purchases of goods: 5.2.1 for cash 5.2.2 on credit
The effects on (double-entry) accounts of the sale of goods/services: 5.3.1 for
cash 5.3.2 on credit The process of the return of goods previously bought or sold
(or alternatively of an allowance being made in lieu of actual return of goods) Use
of the term Returns, both inwards and outwards; the alternative terms in use The
effects on (double-entry) accounts of the return of goods (or of an allowance being
made for the defective supply of goods/services)
5.3
5.4 5.5 5.6
The approach adopted in the students’ book, How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level,
is to explain the reasons for particular book-keeping methods and to build up
understanding of the subject progressively. This approach may mean using a
simplified method on a certain matter at one stage to avoid introducing too many
points at once. Later, that simplified method might need to be modified as more
features are covered. This approach applies because this session deals with the
entries concerning purchases and sales.
Step 1
Aim: to recognize the various meanings of the term ‘purchases’ 1 Explain that the
term ‘goods’ is used for goods bought as part of trade, for selling in due course.
The buying and selling of office furniture, motor vehicles, etc, for use in the
business, is not included under goods: they are shown separately.
11
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 12
Purchases, sales, and returns
2 Goods are now to be divided into:

● ●
purchases; and sales
with a separate account for each.This division gives more information and helps to
keep control of the business. 3 Describe the various meanings of the term
‘purchases’, that they are: (a) goods bought to sell, ie as part of trading; (b)
goods bought to use in the manufacture and/or retailing of other goods. Stress that
just the word ‘purchases’ or the words ‘bought goods’ are referring to a part of
trading. 4 You may also give the students the alternative terms below. (a)
Purchases ‘for cash’ which are bought with immediate payment.The payment may be in
cash or it may be by drawing on a bank account. (b) Purchases ‘on credit’ which are
bought with payment to be made at a later date.
Step 2
Aim: to be able to record in double-entry form the purchase and the sale of goods
for cash and on credit 1 Purchase of goods for cash Show the students the following
example to illustrate the account entries made for the purchase of goods for cash.
Example In the account entries given below, goods were bought on 15 March Year 3
for £295 and paid for by cheque, which can be understood as immediate payment.
Purchases Year 3 15 Mar Bank £ 295 Bank Year 3 15 Mar Purchases £ 295
12
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 13
This involves:
● ●
addition to purchases = debit deduction from bank = credit
2 Purchase of goods on credit Show the students the following example to illustrate
the account entries made for the purchase of goods on credit. Example In the
account entries that follow, goods were bought on credit, at 19 March Year 3, from
L Johnson for £614.
Purchases Year 3 19 Mar L Johnson £ 614 L Johnson Year 3 19 Mar Purchases £ 614
A liability has arisen, so a credit entry is made in the account for Johnson, who
is a ‘creditor’. 3 Work through the following exercise with the students. Exercise
Year 7 3 Mar 12 Mar 30 Mar Purchased goods by cheque £915 Purchased goods from T
Watling on credit £736 Paid by cheque the amount due to T Watling
Enter these transactions, as shown below, carefully reviewing each double entry
before moving on to the next one.
Purchases Year 7 3 Mar Bank 12 Mar T Watling £ 915 736 Bank Year 7 3 Mar Purchases
30 Mar T Watling £ 915 736
(continued)
13
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 14
T Watling Year 7 30 Mar Bank £ 736 Year 7 12 Mar Purchases £ 736
4 Sales Any sale of goods is entered in a separate Sales Account.The account

includes both cash sales and credit sales. Remember to point out that the account
only includes the sale of goods that the firm trades in. 5 Sales for cash Show the
students the following example to illustrate the account entries made for sales for
cash. Example At 21 March Year 3, goods were sold for £312 cash.
Sales Year 3 21 Mar Cash Cash Year 3 21 Mar Sales £ 312 £ 312
Emphasize that the entry in the Sales Account corresponds to what, so far, has been
entered in the Goods Account, ie a credit entry. Note The Cash Account is for
recording the receipt and payment of bank notes or coins. Transfers between the
Bank Account and the Cash Account are made periodically. 6 Sales on credit Show the
students the following example to illustrate the account entries made for sales on
credit. Example At 23 March Year 3, goods were sold to L Fell on credit for £260.
Sales Year 3 23 Mar L Fell Year 3 23 Mar Sales £ 260 £ 260
14
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 15
7 To reinforce the students’ understanding, show the following summary of the

entries below for a credit sale (preferably on the overhead projector): (a) When a
credit sale is made, the book-keeper should: ● debit the customer’s (debtor’s)
account; and ● credit the Sales Account. (b) When payment is received from the
debtor, the book-keeper should: ● debit the Bank Account or Cash Account (depending
on how the debtor pays, whether by cheque or cash); and ● credit the debtor’s
account. Note Point out that the Purchases Account and the Sales Account have now
replaced the Goods Account. 8 Ask the students to work through the exercise below.
Exercise
Year 7 6 Mar 15 Mar 31 Mar Sold goods for cash £327 Sold goods to J Bean on credit
£512 Received cheque from J Bean in payment of the amount due
The transactions should be entered by the students as shown below. Review the
transactions one by one (see below), ensuring that the concept of double entry is
fully understood.
Sales Year 7 6 Mar Cash 15 Mar J Bean Cash Year 7 6 Mar Sales £ 327 J Bean Year 7
15 Mar Sales £ 512 Bank Year 7 31 Mar J Bean £ 512 Year 7 31 Mar Bank £ 512 £ 327
512
15
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 16
Step 3
Aim: to understand the nature of ‘returns’ and to be able to make the required
book-keeping entries 1 Explain that purchased goods are sometimes returned to the
supplier. Ask why this might be so. 2 Explain that an allowance is made by the
supplier, ie that the amount of the return is set against the purchase amount. 3
Show that the returns are recorded in a separate account, called the Returns
Outwards Account, using this example: At 24 March Year 3, goods are returned to L
Johnson for which £70 is allowed.
Returns outwards Year 3 24 Mar L Johnson L Johnson Year 3 24 Mar Returns outwards £
70 Year 3 19 Mar Purchases £ 614 £ 70
4 Explain that the £70 credit in the Returns Outwards Account offsets the £614
previously shown on the debit of purchases. Ask the students to explain the two
entries in Johnson’s account. 5 Explain that the opposite can occur: ie goods that
have been sold may be returned by a customer, for which an allowance is given. For
example, on 27 March Year 3, L Fell returns the goods sold to him on 23 March. This
occurrence is the reverse of a sale, so it is termed ‘returns inwards’. Ask the
students to show the two entries for the returns inwards.Their accounts should look
like the one below.
Returns inwards Year 3 27 Mar L Fell £ 260 L Fell Year 3 23 Mar Sales £ 260 Year 3
27 Mar Returns inwards £ 260
16
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 17
6 Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercise T/2.1 in the
Appendix (page 203). Ask the students to work through the exercise. 7 Review
student answers, drawing attention to items (c) and (f ), in T/2.1, which involve
assets for use in the business. Neither of these will be recorded in the Purchases
Account. 8 Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercise T/2.2 in
the Appendix (page 203). Ask the students to work through the exercise.
Step 4
Aim: to strengthen understanding of lesson content Below are a series of questions
that you should ask the students, together with the answers. 1 Question (a) What is
the difference in wording between the two returns examples? Answers
● ●
The example 24 March specifically states that an allowance is made and the amount.
The example 27 March merely states that the goods previously sold are returned.
If a question is worded as it is above, the students should assume that the amount
of the original sale is fully allowed. 2 Question (b) What is the reason for
keeping separate returns accounts instead of making the entries in the Purchases or
Sales Accounts? Answer The reason is to have separate totals for returns, otherwise
the information would be ‘hidden’ in the Purchases or Sales Account. 3 Question (c)
What might be the various reasons for the return of goods? Answers The goods might
be returned because:
● ● ● ●
the wrong articles were sent; they were damaged in transit; they are not what was
shown in the catalogue; parts do not fit.
17
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 18
4 Question (d) When might an allowance be given although the goods are not
returned? Answers When the goods:
● ●
are difficult to repack or transport; or are costly to send back.
Stress that, provided an allowance is given, the book-keeping effect is the same as
if the goods are actually returned. 5 Check that the students know the alternative
names for the accounts, that they may be called:
● ●
returns outwards or purchases returns; returns inwards or sales returns.
6 Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercises T/2.3 and T/2.4
in the Appendix (pages 203 and 204). Ask the students to work through them.
18
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 19
Lesson 3: Expenses: profit or loss

Topic summary
● ● ● ●
The nature and types of ‘expense’ Combination-type transactions: account entries

Recording the withdrawal of profit by ‘drawings’ Profit as the difference between
opening and closing capital

18.1 Profit (or loss) as the difference between opening and closing capital
balances; allowing for any drawings or the introduction of additional capital 18.2
The meaning of the term drawings; the various forms of drawings 18.3 The book-
keeping entries for drawings 18.4 The possible effect of drawings upon the amount
of capital
This lesson is diverse in its content. All the topics are ones that can feature as
elements in examination questions. With careful explanation and the familiarity
that follows from practice, these subject areas need not be a cause of major
difficulty.
Step 1
Aim: to appreciate the nature and types of business expense and the book-keeping
entries required 1 Suggest to the class a small business situation and ask what
types of expense would be incurred, such as:
● ● ●
employee wages; rent of the premises; and advertising.
Point out that the aim of setting up a business is to make a profit, ie a surplus:
sales less expenses = profit
19
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 20
Expenses: profit or loss
2 When you explain about recording expenses in the accounts, develop the concept of
‘paying as you go’. Illustrate the concept by contrasting, for example, renting
premises and purchasing a building, which ties up money. 3 Liken expenses such as
rent to very temporary assets; for instance, a purchased asset is debited to the
asset account; similarly, an expense account is debited. 4 Explain that it is
necessary to have several expense accounts, eg insurance, wages, office cleaning,
office expenses, heating and lighting. One account for each category of expenditure
helps to provide more information and improve control. The following example
illustrates the basic account entries relating to an expense item: Example At 28
March Year 3, insurance on a motor vehicle, costing £110 for the next 6 months, is
paid by cheque.
Insurance Year 3 28 Mar Bank £ 110 Bank Year 3 28 Mar Insurance £ 110
This can be explained as: Cr = reduction of an asset (bank) Dr = acquisition of a

(temporary) asset, ie insurance ‘cover’ for a fixed period of time. 5 Copy and hand
out or show exercises T/3.1 and T/3.2 in the Appendix (page 204) on the overhead
projector. Ask the students to work through them.
Step 2
Aim: to be familiar with combination-type transactions and to be able to make
appropriate book-keeping entries 1 In Lesson 1, Step 5, reference was made to the
possibility of a transaction involving a combination of assets and/or a combination
of liabilities. In a combination-type transaction, the effect on one account side
will be matched by a combination of two (or possibly more) effects on the other
side. Use the following example to illustrate a combination-type transaction.
20
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 21
Example At 14 April Year 6, a motor vehicle was purchased for £6,800 from Lagonda
Garages. A payment of £2,000 was made by cheque and the balance on credit.
Assets £ + 6,800 - 2,000 + 4,800 Increased by amount of motor vehicle Bank balance
is reduced Liabilities Creditor – Lagonda Garages £ + 4,800
+ 4,800
The accounts will appear as follows:

Motor Vehicle Year 6 14 Apr £ Bank and Lagonda Garages 6,800 Bank Year 6 14 Apr
Lagonda Garages Year 6 14 Apr Motor vehicle £ 4,800 Motor vehicle £ 2,000
2 Copy and hand out or show exercise T/3.3 in the Appendix (page 205) on the
overhead projector. Ask the students to work through the exercise.
Step 3
Aim: to appreciate the meaning of proprietor drawings and the account entries
required 1 If the owner takes money out of the business for private use this
results in a reduction of capital. Explain that the owner may draw out money in
anticipation of the profits for the year, ie to pay for personal living expenses.
If the owner’s withdrawals are more than the business’s profits, then capital is
reduced. 2 Drawings are recorded in a separate account, further enabling the
accounts to provide as much information as possible. Use the example overleaf to
demonstrate this point.
21
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 22
Example At 6 April Year 3, Joe Seng, the owner, withdrew £170 in cash for his own
use.
Cash Year 3 6 Apr Drawings Year 3 6 Apr Cash £ 170 Drawings £ 170
3 Explain that, at the end of the year, the Drawings Account will be closed off to
the Capital Account. 4 Point out that several drawings might be made over the
course of the year and that the drawings could take forms other than cash. For
example, the owner may take some of the business’s goods for personal use.
Step 4
Aim: to recognize that profit or loss may be calculated through differences in
capital 1 The profit of a business for a given year might be obtained as follows:
profit for the year = number of transactions x profit on each transaction less
expenses for the year
or as
profit = capital at end of the year less capital at start of the year or increase
of capital over the year
Alternatively, give the students the following formula:

start-of-year capital
*or profit after deduction of drawings
plus
profit* (or loss)
end-of-year capital
Appendix (page 205). Ask the students to work through the exercise.
22
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 23
Lesson 4: Balancing accounts: the trial balance

Topic summary
● ● ●
The balancing of accounts Running balance account format The preparation of a trial
balance

3.1 The meaning of the term account balance 3.2 Balancing the T-type ledger
account, including: 3.2.1 bringing the balance down for the start of the next
accounting period 3.2.2 dealing with the nil balance 3.3 The significance of any
particular account balance, eg a credit balance on a creditor account, a debit
balance on an expense account 3.4 The significance of the term running balance
account 3.5 The preparation of accounts in running balance form 3.7 The procedure
for other end-of-period balancing, and ruling off, of accounts 11.1 The purpose of
the trial balance 11.2 The preparation of a trial balance from a list of account
balances
This lesson deals with the practical matter of the layout of accounts, including an
alternative format. It is worthwhile giving time to this topic: marks may be lost
in the examination if accounts are presented poorly. The lesson also discusses a
straightforward method of checking that all double entries have been completed
satisfactorily.This checking is done by the preparation of a trial balance.
Step 1
Aim: to be able to balance accounts and to recognize the significance of individual
balances 1 Show that the balance on an account is the amount by which one side is
greater than the other:
23
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 24
Balancing accounts: the trial balance
X expense account Dr Year 3 Entries totalling £ 680 Year 3 Entries totalling Cr £

600
Here, there is a debit (Dr) balance of £80. The full balancing of this account at
31 March Year 3 is as follows:
X expense account Year 3 Entries £ 680 Year 3 Entries 31 Mar Balance c/d 680 1 Apr
Balance b/d 80 £ 600 80 680
The balance is first carried down (c/d) and then brought down (b/d), which should
always be done and not merely entered on one side.To fail to bring down the balance
is to break the double-entry rule. 2 Ask the students to write out and then balance
the following creditor account:
K Jacques Year 5 7 May Returns outwards 28 May Bank £ 50 570 Year 5 3 May Purchases
21 May Purchases £ 620 415
3 Explain a ‘nil’ balance:

F Wiles Year 6 4 July Sales £ 370 370 Year 6 12 July Returns inwards 29 July Bank £
40 330 370
Or a variation on the nil balance:

T Stone Year 6 9 Aug £ 470 Year 6 26 Aug Bank £ 470
Point out that no totals are required in this instance; just two lines under the
figures. 4 Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercises T/4.1
and T/4.2 in the Appendix (page 206). Ask the students to work through them.
24
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 25
Step 2
Aim: to appreciate and to be able to apply the running-balance format 1 Emphasize
that, so far, the format used for the accounts has been two-sided, ie:
Left-hand side debits (Dr) Right-hand side credits (Cr)
Balances are calculated at the end of a fixed period – usually monthly for debtors
and creditors; annually in some other cases; and so on.This layout does not reveal
the balance easily or quickly. However, the running-balance format, which is a
three-column layout, shows the balance after each transaction is entered. It is
used by banks in the (monthly) statements they issue to customers. 2 An example of
an account in running-balance format is included in the Appendix (see T/4.3, page
207). Point out that this example is not a specimen of the statements issued by
banks. It is an example of the bank account as kept by the customer of the bank. 3
Explain the format, emphasizing that as each transaction is entered the balance on
the account is brought up to date. Stress that the notation, either ‘Dr’ or ‘Cr’,
must be shown beside the balance figure. 4 Ask the students to show T/4.3 as a two-
sided layout, ie the format previously used in this course.Then compare running-
balance format with the two-sided layout. 5 Ask the students to work through the
exercise below. Exercise Required Using the information in T/4.2 (page 206),
prepare debtor and creditor accounts in running-balance format.
Step 3
Aim: to be able to prepare a trial balance 1 Work through exercise T/4.4 in the
Appendix (page 207) with the students, following the instructions below. (a) Enter
the transactions in appropriate accounts.
25
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 26
(b) Check with the class that the total of the debit entries equals the total of
the credit entries.The total should be £27,220. (c) Next ask the students to enter
in pencil, in the margin, the balance on each account – either debit or credit. (d)
Now list these balances; the total of the debit balances should agree with the
total of the credit balances. A trial balance has been produced. 2 Explain that the
trial balance is used to check that double entry has been done correctly. If the
totals of the two sides of the trial balance are in agreement, then entries have
been made accurately. It does not, however, prove that. For example, transactions
could have been omitted entirely.This limitation will be considered further in
Lesson 21 (see entry 11.5 in the Extended Syllabus). 3 Hand out copies of, or show
on the overhead projector, exercises T/4.5 and T/4.6 in the Appendix (page 208).
Ask the students to work through them. 4 Show the class the following account,
which is an example of a candidate’s solution to an examination question:
F Leonard Year 5 10 Apr Returns outwards £ 30 Year 5 6 Apr 10 Apr Purchases Returns
outwards £ 418 30
In this case, a candidate has entered the transaction twice – a common mistake. One
entry cancels the other for returns outwards.The examiner can only conclude that
the candidate does not know how to deal with returns outwards. As a result, no
marks will be given for either entry for 10 April.
26
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 27
Lesson 5: Trading and Profit & Loss Accounts

Topic summary
● ●
Structure of income, cost, and profit The preparation of Trading and Profit & Loss
Accounts

3.6 The transfer of a balance at period end to Trading Account or Profit & Loss
Account, as appropriate 19.1 The Trading and Profit & Loss Accounts as part of the
double-entry system 19.2 The basic structure of income, costs, and profit in a
business 19.5 The calculation of costs of goods sold 19.7 The difference between
trading income and other income 19.8 The difference between gross profit and net
profit 19.12 The double entries for expense amounts between the Profit & Loss
Account and the individual expense accounts
This lesson reviews the structure of income, cost, and profit, and their
relationship to one another. It also deals with the concluding stage of a period’s
activities, which involves establishing either a profit or a loss. Establishing a
profit or loss and showing how they are reached are achieved through ‘final
accounts’, a broadly used book-keeping term that covers, in part, the Trading and
Profit & Loss Account.
Step 1
Aim: to be able to prepare a Trading and Profit & Loss Account 1 Explain the
different classes of profit, that they are:
● ●
gross profit – the excess of sales income over cost of goods sold; and net profit –
gross profit less other costs.
27
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 28
Trading and Profit & Loss Accounts
2 Draw the students attention to the structure of income, costs, and profit as it
is shown in Figure 5.1. ‘Other income’ is the income arising from sources other
than normal trading activities, eg interest earned on money lent or rent
receivable.The composition of total income is as follows:
total income = income from sales + other income (‘trading income’)
Cost of goods sold Income from sales = sales revenue Gross profit
Other income
Running expenses
Net profit Figure 5.1 The structure of income, costs, and profit
3 Ask the students to work through 2 small exercises on the structure of costs, see
T/5.1* in the Appendix (page 209).
Step 2
Aim: to be able to prepare a Trading and Profit & Loss Account 1 To show the
students how to prepare a Trading and Profit & Loss Account, give them each a copy
of the trial balance of T Avis at 31 December Year 5 to work through.The trial
balance is labelled T/5.2 in the Appendix (page 210). Work through the example of T
Avis with the students as set out below.
28
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 29
2 The first stage of working through the trial balance involves preparing a Trading
Account. Preparing a Trading Account requires a calculation of the cost of goods
sold, which is:
purchases less closing stock both stated at cost price
The closing stock has yet to be brought into the accounts. There is no opening
stock in this instance because Year 5 was the first year of trading for T Avis. 3
The significant accounts at this stage are the Purchases and Sales Accounts.These
would appear as follows:
Purchases Year 5 Sundries £ 5,160 Sales Year 5 Sundries £ 6,320
4 Stress the word ‘account’ in Trading and Profit & Loss Account: it is part of the
doubleentry system. For every entry made in the account, there must be a
corresponding entry elsewhere in the account system. 5 Prepare the following
Trading and Profit & Loss Account with the class, using the data in T/5.2 in the
Appendix (page 210):
T Avis Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 5
Purchases Gross profit c/d £ 5,160 3,260 8,420 Sales Stock at 31 December Year 5
Gross profit b/d £ 6,320 2,100 8,420 3,260
6 Show the double-entry effect in the Purchases and Sales Accounts:

Purchases Year 5 Sundries £ 5,160 Sales Year 5 31 Dec Trading £ 6,320 Year 5
Sundries £ 6,320 Year 5 31 Dec Trading £ 5,160
29
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 30
7 The entry for stock (at 31 December Year 5) requires careful explanation. So far,
only a credit entry has been made.To complete the double entry, a new account is
opened:
Stock Year 5 31 Dec Trading £ 2,100
8 It has been stated that purchases less closing stock equals the cost of goods
sold. To reflect this fact, it is usual to deduct stock on the debit side in the
Trading Account instead of entering the stock on the credit side. The effect on
gross profit is the same. Therefore, the Trading Account, together with the Profit
& Loss Account, becomes:
T Avis Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 5
Purchases less Stock, 31 December Year 5 Cost of goods sold Gross profit c/d Rent
payable Office expenses Lighting and heating Net profit £ 5,160 2,100 3,060 3,260
6,320 700 360 420 2,230 3,710 Sales £ 6,320
6,320 Gross profit b/d Rent receivable 3,260 450
3,710
9 While compiling the above Profit & Loss Account, the expense and income accounts
are closed off as follows:
Rent Payable Year 5 Sundries £ 700 Year 5 31 Dec Office Expenses Year 5 Sundries £
360 Year 5 31 Dec Profit and loss £ 360 Profit and loss £ 700
Lighting and Heating Year 5 Sundries £ 420 Year 5 31 Dec Rent Receivable Year 5 31
Dec Profit and loss £ 450 Year 5 Sundries £ 450 Profit and loss £ 420
30
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 31
The double entry for gross profit is the credit to the Profit & Loss Account. The
double entry for net profit is a credit to the Capital Account: ie profit increases
capital. 10 The Drawings Account is closed off to Capital Account.
Capital Year 5 31 Dec 31 Dec £ Drawings Balance c/d 800 5,430 6,230 Year 6 1 Jan
Drawings Year 5 Sundries £ 800 Year 5 31 Dec Capital £ 800 Balance b/d Year 5 1 Jan
Bank 31 Dec Profit and loss: net profit £ 4,000 2,230 6,230 5,430
Note Many examination answers show closing stock as a credit entry in the Trading
Account, instead of as a deduction on the left-hand side. As a consequence of this
error, students lose a mark because they fail to show the cost of goods sold. 11
Copy and hand out or show exercises T/5.3 and T/5.4 in the Appendix (pages 211 and
212) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through them. Both
exercises involve businesses in their first year of trading. Because the businesses
are new, there is no opening stock, a topic that is dealt with in Lesson 7. Explain
that the usual practice is to value closing stock at its cost price.This method is
considered further in Lesson 23.
31
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 32
Lesson 6: The balance sheet

Topic summary
● ●
The main elements of the balance sheet and its overall purpose The distinction
between fixed assets and current assets, and between longer-term liabilities and
amounts due within 1 year (current liabilities) The effective grouping of assets
and liabilities within the balance sheet

20.1 The function of the balance sheet and, in particular, the recognition that it
stands outside the double-entry system 20.2 The significance and use of the terms
fixed assets and current assets 20.3 The difference between longer-term liabilities
and amounts payable within 12 months (current liabilities); the naming of accounts
which might appear under each of these headings 20.4 The preparation of a balance
sheet in effective format 20.5 The appropriate grouping of items within the balance
sheet: 20.5.1 fixed assets 20.5.2 current assets 20.5.3 capital (or proprietor’s
interest) 20.5.4 longer-term liabilities 20.5.5 amounts payable within 12 months
(current liabilities)
Two aspects of study concerning the balance sheet require attention. First, the
students need to be able to appreciate the meaning of the contents of a balance
sheet. Second, they should be able to prepare one that is meaningful, ie easily
understood by the reader.
Step 1
Aim: to appreciate the main elements of the balance sheet and its overall purpose 1
Refer to the trial balance of T Avis at 31 December Year 5 (see page 210). If it
has not already been done, the accounts of those items that have already been
closed off (eg transferred to Profit & Loss Account) should be ticked. Those left
are Capital and Drawings, together with the Asset and Liability Accounts. These
accounts and the closing stock are shown in the following balance sheet.
32
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 33
The balance sheet
T Avis Balance sheet at 31 December Year 5 Assets Fixtures and fittings Motor
vehicle Stock of goods Debtors Cash at bank Cash in office £ 800 1,600 2,100 750
1,040 50 6,340 Capital Placed in bank account add Net profit less Drawings
Liability Creditors £ £ 4,000 2,230 800 1,430 5,430 910 6,340
2 Draw out the purpose of the balance sheet; that it is to show the financial
position of the business at the date the books are made up. 3 Compare the balance
sheet with the Trading and Profit & Loss Account, which is a record of performance
over a past fixed period (usually a year). 4 Explain that the two sides of the
balance sheet should agree in total if the double-entry rule has been followed
fully. Note The accounts that have been entered in the balance sheet have not been
closed off, ie the balances remain on the accounts. The balance sheet is only a
list of balances, it is a ‘statement’. It is not itself part of the double-entry
system.
Step 2
Aim: to be able to group effectively the items on a balance sheet 1 Explain why it
is necessary to group balance sheet items. Grouping the items:
●
● ●
gives meaning to the balance sheet, showing that it is comprised of significant

elements and is not just an array of items; shows long-term versus short-term
liabilities; shows different timescales among assets, some of which can be quickly
turned into cash (‘liquidity’); others represent money tied up, possibly for many
years.
2 In discussing this, refer to the balance sheet above. Using the question-and-
answer method, review the terms ‘fixed assets’ and ‘current assets’.Ask the
students for examples of each.
33
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 34
The balance sheet
3 Stress that the recognized sequence of listing assets begins with the most
permanent and ends with those most easily turned into cash. Demonstrate the
sequence as shown below.
Fixed Assets Land and buildings Fixtures and fittings Machinery Motor vehicles from
highly fixed to less fixed Current Assets Stock Debtors Bank Cash
increasing liquidity
Other assets will be introduced in due course. 4 Explain that, with fixed assets,
the more permanent the assets are likely to be, the more ‘fixed’ they are
considered to be, eg compare land and buildings with motor vehicles. The more
‘liquid’ an asset, the more easily it can be turned into cash: eg compare the bank
balance with stock. 5 Review the normal sequence for capital and liabilities on the
right-hand side of the balance sheet.The sequence appears as follows:
● ●
capital; longer-term liabilities: ie amounts payable in more than 1 year, such as a

2-year loan (2 years to repayment from the date of the balance sheet); amounts due
within 1 year (or ‘current liabilities’), eg creditors, bank overdraft, or short-
term bank loan.
6 Present the balance sheet of T Avis, grouping and arranging the items in the way
shown below.
T Avis Balance sheet at 31 December Year 5 Fixed Assets Fixtures and fittings Motor
vehicle Current Assets Stock Debtors Bank Cash £ £ 800 1,600 2,400 2,100 750 1,040
50 Capital Placed in bank account add Net profit less Drawings Amount due within 1
year (current liabilities) Creditors 3,940 6,340 £ 2,230 800 £ 4,000 1,430 5,430
910 6,340
34
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 35
The balance sheet
7 Stress the importance of a good balance-sheet layout. The items need to be

suitably grouped and also in a suitable sequence within each group. Marks are lost
when a balance sheet is presented poorly. 8 Hand out copies of, or show on the
overhead projector, exercises T/6.1*, T/6.2*, T/6.3*, and T/6.4* in the Appendix
(pages 212–15).Ask the students to work through them.
35
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 36
Lesson 7: Final accounts: more features

Topic summary
● ● ● ●
Period-end entries for returns inwards and outwards The different forms of carriage
and how they are recorded in final accounts Opening and closing stock figures in
the Stock Account and final accounts The review and application of the end-of-year
procedure

3.6 3.7 19.3 19.6 19.9 19.10 The transfer of a balance at period end to Trading
Account and Profit & Loss Account, as appropriate The procedure for other end-of-
period balancing, and ruling off, of accounts Showing returns inwards and returns
outwards suitably deducted to reveal net sales and net purchases respectively
Showing the make-up of ‘cost of goods sold’ The function of the Stock Account and
the double-entry relationship between the Trading Account and the Stock Account
End-of-period transfer of balances from the General Ledger to the Trading Account
(Purchases Account, Sales Account, Returns Outwards Account, Returns Inwards
Account) The difference between carriage inwards and carrriage outwards and
recording them in the Trading Account and Profit & Loss Account respectively
Showing income and expenses within the final accounts, with related items being
suitably brought together
19.11 19.13
This lesson is concerned with some very practical and detailed matters that appear,
from the answers elicited in examinations, to be given limited attention during the
course of study. Carriage, in particular, would seem to be neglected. The Stock
Account is also a major point of weakness. Candidates are usually able to record
opening and closing stocks in the Trading Account – although not always in the most
favourable position in the Trading Account. However, candidates may have difficulty
in correctly recording the Stock Account itself.
36
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 37
Final accounts: more features
Step 1
Aim: to be able to show period-end entries for returns inwards and outwards 1
Remind the students that the Goods Account is divided into Purchases, Sales,
Returns Outwards, and Returns Inwards Accounts. This type of division has not yet
been brought fully into the Trading Account. Example A trader in Year 3 has total
returns outwards and returns inwards of £450 and £610 respectively.The Returns
Accounts might appear as follows:
Returns Outwards Year 3 31 Dec Trading £ 450 Year 3 Sundries Returns Inwards Year 3
Sundries £ 610 Year 3 31 Dec Trading £ 610 £ 450
With the debit transfer (to the Trading Account) entry in the Returns Outwards
Account, the matching entry would be expected to appear to the credit of the
Trading Account. However, the entry does not appear as a credit, but as a deduction
– from purchases – on the debit side. Conversely, returns inwards appears as a
deduction – from sales – on the credit side of the Trading Account. The aim of
showing returns as deductions is to provide a neater and more informative picture
of what has happened. This might be seen in a Trading Account as follows:
J Blunt Trading Account for the year ended 31 December Year 3 Purchases less
Returns outwards less Stock at 31 Dec Year 3 Cost of goods sold Gross profit £
10,300 540 9,760 2,100 7,660 12,980 20,640 Sales less Returns inwards £ 21,400 760
20,640
20,640
Point out that £9,760 is the sum of the net purchases and that £20,640 is the sum
of the net sales. Inform the students that the layout shown for returns in J
Blunt’s Trading Account will always be followed from now onwards.
37
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 38
2 Ask the students to work through the exercise below. Exercise Required Prepare a
Trading Account for F Waldron for the year ended 31 December Year 5 from the
following details:
Purchases Sales Returns inwards Returns outwards Stock at 31 Dec Year 5 £ 17,300
37,850 1,320 870 3,200
Solution
F Waldron Trading Account for the year ended 31 December Year 5 Purchases less
Returns outwards less Stock at 31 Dec Year 5 Cost of goods sold Gross profit £
17,300 870 16,430 3,200 13,230 23,300 36,530 Sales less Returns outwards £ 37,850
1,320 36,530
36,530
Step 2
Aim: to appreciate the different forms of carriage as an expense and how they are
recorded in final accounts 1 Explain carefully the nature of carriage; that
carriage is an expense incurred in, or charge made for, the delivery of goods. 2
Make the distinction clear between carriage inwards and carriage outwards: (a)
Carriage inwards Carriage on goods coming into the firm, ie on purchases. Instead
of paying an inclusive price for purchases that covers carriage, a separate charge
is made. Therefore, carriage is added to the cost of purchases and is included in
the Trading Account.
38
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 39
(b) Carriage outwards Carriage on goods going out of the firm, ie on sales. It is
regarded as a cost of distributing goods to customers and is entered as a separate
item in the Profit & Loss Account. The layout of purchases including adjustments
(using different figures) is as follows:
£ 12,800 430 13,230 520 12,710 1,980 10,730
Purchases add Carriage inwards less Returns outwards less Closing stock Cost of
goods sold
The adjustments for purchases and sales may be summarized as follows: Net sales =
Sales less returns inwards Net purchases = Purchase plus carriage inwards less
returns outwards 3 Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercise
T/7.1 in the Appendix (page 216). Ask the students to work through the exercise.
Step 3
Aim: to be able to record opening and closing stock figures in the Stock Account
and final accounts
1 So far, these studies have been limited to the first year of trading, ie there
has been no opening-stock figure. From the second year, there will be 2 stock
figures: for example, the closing stock at 31 December Year 5 becomes the opening
stock at 1 January Year 6. 2 Use the situation of T Avis as an example again (see
T/7.2 in the Appendix, page 216). T Avis has prepared a trial balance at the end of
his second year of trading.Work through the Trading and Profit & Loss Account, and
the balance sheet, with the class.
39
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 40
T Avis Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 6 £
Stock at 1 Jan Year 6 Purchases add Carriage inwards less Returns outwards less
Stock at 31 Dec Year 6 Cost of goods sold Gross profit c/d Rent payable Office
expenses Lighting and heating Carriage outwards Net profit 9,260 430 9,690 340
9,350 11,450 2,450 9,000 3,570 12,570 1,100 590 610 380 1,340 4,020 Gross profit
b/d Rent receivable £ 2,100 Sales less Returns inwards £ 13,050 480 12,570
12,570 3,570 450
4,020
Balance sheet at 31 December Year 6 £ Fixed Assets Fixtures and fittings Motor
vehicle Current Assets Stock Debtors Bank Cash £ 900 1,600 2,500 2,450 1,170 1,230
70 Capital Balance at 1 Jan Year 6 add Net profit less drawings £ £ 5,430 1,340
1,100 240 5,670
Amount due within 1 year Creditors 4,920 7,420
1,750 7,420
3 Show the Stock Account for T Avis for his first and second years as follows:
Stock Year 5 31 Dec Year 6 1 Jan 31 Dec Year 7 1 Jan Trading Balance b/d Trading
Balance b/d £ 2,100 2,100 2,450 2,450 Year 5 31 Dec Balance c/d Year 6 31 Dec
Trading 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 2,100 2,100 2,450
40
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 41
4 Explain that the Stock Account is used only to carry the figure for the balance
of stock from one year to the next. No transactions are entered into this account.
It is a ‘holding’ account only. 5 Draw attention to the entry at 31 December Year 5
(encircled).This entry is frequently entered at 1 January Year 6. The correct way
to enter it is as 31 December Year 5 initially and then to carry it down, as shown
above. 6 Ask the students to work through the following exercise: Exercise
Stock at 31 Mar Year 6 Stock at 31 Mar Year 7 £31,680 £34,270
Required Show the Stock Account for the period 31 March Year 6 to 1 April Year 7.
Note The stock at 1 April Year 6 is the same as the stock at 31 March Year 6.
Solution
Stock Year 6 31 Mar Trading 1 Apr Balance b/d £ 31,680 31,680 34,270 34,270 Year 6
31 Mar Balance c/d Year 7 31 Mar Trading 31 Mar Balance c/d £ 31,680 31,680 34,270
Year 7 31 Mar Trading 1 Apr Balance b/d
7 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/7.3 and T/7.4 in the Appendix (page 217) on
the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through them.
Step 4
Aim: to review and to be able to apply the end-of-year procedure 1 Review the end-
of-year procedure by showing Figure 7.1 (overleaf) on the overhead projector. See
also T/7.5 in the Appendix (page 218). 2 Draw the students’ attention to points (a)
to (c) overleaf, which are highlighted by Figure 7.1.
41
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 42
(a) The accounts for which balances are recorded in the balance sheet have not been
‘closed off ’. They retain their balances, ready for the next trading period or
year. The balance sheet is merely a list of items and is not part of the double
entry. (b) Transferring a balance, eg for purchases or insurance, into the Trading
Account or Profit & Loss Account is part of double entry. Each amount is being
carried in the final accounts instead of in the ledger account. The various amounts
are channelled through the final accounts to establish a net profit (or net loss).
(c) The net profit, to complete the double entry, is credited to the Capital
Account (debit the Profit & Loss Account and credit the Capital Account) and so the
process re-emerges in the ledger accounts.
Purchases Sales Returns outwards Returns inwards Opening stock Closing stock
account balances transferred to
(b)
Trading Account
Gross profit to Profit & Loss Account (b) Expense accounts Other income accounts
account balances transferred to (b) Profit & Loss Account
Net profit to Capital Account (c) (a) Drawings Account Capital Account
Cash/bank accounts Debtor/creditor accounts Asset accounts (a)
Balanced, ie balances c/d on each account
(a)
Balance sheet Figure 7.1 The end-of-year procedure
42
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 43
3 The preparation of final accounts is an important element of the First Level

Book-keeping Syllabus. It is therefore important that students become practised at
systematically answering final accounts questions at an early stage. Encourage the
students to adopt the following method when answering such examination questions:
(i) to read through the question to get an overall understanding, especially noting
the ‘required’ part of the question; (ii) to go through the trial balance (or any
alternative list of balances) and to place next to each item a code representing
the final account in which it appears; (iii) to tick each item or figure as it is
recorded in the final account concerned. 4 Illustrate this method of answering
final accounts by applying it to the trial balance of T Avis at 31 December Year 6
(see below). Leave the codes out and ask the students to enter them alongside the
items in the trial balance.
T Avis Trial balance at 31 December Year 6 Dr £ 9,260 430 1,170 1,750 1,100 590 610
450 480 340 380 900 1,600 1,230 70 2,100 1,100 21,020 Key: BS balance sheet T
Trading Account P/L (exp) Profit & Loss Account (expenditure) P/L (inc) Profit &
Loss Account (income) 5,430 21,020 Cr £ 13,050 T T T BS BS P/L P/L P/L P/L T T P/L
BS BS BS BS T BS BS
Purchases Sales Carriage inwards Debtors Creditors Rent payable Office expenses
Lighting and heating Rent receivable Returns inwards Returns outwards Carriage
outwards Fixtures and fittings Motor vehicle Cash at bank Cash in office Stock at 1
January Year 6 Drawings Capital
(exp) (exp) (exp) (inc)
(exp)
Note Stock at 31 December Year 6 was valued at £2,450 T, BS. 5 Hand out copies of,
or show on the overhead projector, exercise T/7.6 in the Appendix (page 219). Ask
the students to work through the exercise.
43
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 44
Lesson 8: The division of the ledger

Topic summary
● ● ● ●
The reasons for dividing the ledger and recognizing the usual divisions The
different types of ledger account The possible subdivisions of the ledger Producing
a balance sheet with a vertical format

4.1 The function of the ledger 4.2 The various possible reasons for subdividing the
ledger 4.3 How the ledger might be subdivided, eg Sales Ledger, Purchases Ledger,
Cash Book, General Ledger 4.4 Alternative names for the different ledgers, eg
Debtors Ledger, Creditors Ledger, Nominal Ledger 4.5 The possible use of a Private
Ledger 4.6 The naming of (ie classification of ) the different types of ledger
account and explaining the accounts within it 4.7 The distinction between personal,
real, and nominal accounts 4.8 How the Sales Ledger might be subdivided 4.9 From a
list of accounts, or from transaction details, the naming of the ledger(s) in which
each would be recorded
The ledger is the set of accounts of business.These accounts may be kept in a book
or series of books (as in a manual system) or on computer disc. Dividing the ledger
and classifying accounts commonly give students difficulty. Careful explanation and
plenty of practice can help students to achieve success in this topic.
Step 1
Aim: to appreciate the reasons for dividing the ledger and to recognize the usual
divisions 1 Outline the possible or likely divisions of the ledger. Encourage the
students to identify the possible advantages of a division, and the reasons for the
division, by asking them
44
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 45
The division of the ledger
questions. For example, you could ask the students what advantages there could be
to having a separate ledger for customers (ie debtors).The possible divisions of
the ledger may be as shown below.
Accounts (a) customers’ personal accounts, ie Debtor Accounts (b) suppliers’
personal accounts, ie Creditor Accounts (c) the receiving and paying out of money
(d) the remaining accounts (unless a Private Ledger exists) (e) accounts requiring
confidentiality, eg Capital Account To be found in the following ledger Sales
Ledger (or Debtor Ledger) Purchases Ledger (or Bought Ledger or Creditor Ledger)
Cash Book (developed in Lesson 9) General Ledger (or Nominal Ledger) Private Ledger
Draw the students’ attention to the alternative names for the ledgers that are
given in brackets. Point out that not all firms have a Private Ledger.The purpose
of a Private Ledger is to maintain confidentiality, with access limited to only a
few members of staff. 2 Explain that the reasons for dividing the ledger are that:
• smaller units are managed more easily; • the division provides useful information
because parts of the ledger are specialized; • it helps to keep control of the
various accounts. 3 Ask the students to work through the exercise below. Exercise
Required State into which ledger each of the following items should be posted: (i)
(ii) (iii) (iv) D Light – Customer Account Fixtures and Fittings Account F Masters
– Supplier of Goods Account Wages Account.
Solution (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Sales Ledger (or Debtor Ledger) General Ledger (or
Nominal Ledger) Purchases Ledger (or Bought or Creditor Ledger) General Ledger (or
Nominal Ledger).
45
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 46
Step 2
Aim: to be able to distinguish between the different types of ledger account 1
Point out that distinguishing between types of account is commonly referred to as
the ‘classification of accounts’, which is the arrangement of accounts into
distinct classes.
ACCOUNTS Impersonal (of things rather than of people)
Personal
Debtors
Capital Creditors Drawings
Real Asset accounts (including cash and bank)
Nominal Income and expense accounts
Figure 8.1 The classification of accounts
2 Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercises T/8.1* and
T/8.2* in the Appendix (pages 220 and 221). Ask the students to work through them.
3 Draw the students’ attention to the difference between: (a) the Sales Ledger and
the Sales Account (b) the Nominal Ledger and the Nominal Account a name for the
various income and expense accounts the account in the General Ledger which records
the income receivable from the sale of goods, whether for cash or on credit an
alternative name for the General Ledger the ledger containing debtor accounts
46
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 47
Step 3
Aim: to recognize the various possible subdivisions of the ledger 1 Review the
possible sub-divisions of the ledger. Use the students’ experience to review this
topic by asking them questions. For example, you could ask the students why the
Sales Ledger might be divided according to sales territories/areas and what
advantages might result from this. Suggest that those who are in employment try to
find out how the ledger is divided or subdivided within the organizations they work
for. A large Sales Ledger might be subdivided for any of the reasons stated in
point 2 on page 45. The ways in which the Sales Ledger can be divided are: (a) (b)
(c) (d) (e) alphabetically – by the customers’ names; numerically – in which each
customer is allotted a number; geographically (or territorially) – by area or
region, eg by sales territories; on a product basis – by product categories; by
type of customer, eg trade customers, as distinct from private individuals, or
according to the level of credit allowed.
2 Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercise T/8.3* in the
Appendix (page 221). Ask the students to work through the exercise.
Step 4
Aim: to be able to produce a balance sheet with a vertical format 1 Stress that a
vertical format is not required for the First Level Book-keeping examination.
Explain, however, that a vertical layout offers more scope for presentation,
especially when more detail needs to be included concerning fixed assets. More
space is provided by this layout, which can greatly help candidates. 2 The balance
sheet of T Avis at 31 December Year 6 is presented overleaf in vertical format. See
also T/8.4 in the Appendix (page 222). 3 Point out that it is usual to deduct
‘Amounts due within 1 year’ (current liabilities) from current assets to obtain
‘net current assets’. Note Knowledge of ‘working capital’ (net current assets) is
not required by the First Level syllabus.Therefore, students who omit the words
‘net current assets’ will not be penalized. However, encourage the students to lay
out their work well.
47
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 48
T Avis Balance sheet at 31 December Year 6 £ Fixed Assets Fixtures and fittings
Motor vehicle Current Assets Stock Debtors Bank Cash less Amounts due within 1 year
Creditors Net current assets Financed by: Capital – balance at 1 Jan Year 6 add Net
profit less Drawings 5,430 1,340 1,100 240 5,670 £ 900 1,600 2,500 2,450 1,170
1,230 70 4,920 1,750 3,170 5,670
Appendix (page 223). Ask the students to work through the exercise. Remind the
students to apply the examination method outlined in Lesson 7 (page 43). 5 Explain
that after the total amount of fixed assets and net current assets has been
established, the ‘Amount due in more than 1 year’ is deducted.This way of
positioning entries is preferred by the LCCIEB to the alternative of placing
longer-term liabilities as an addition underneath capital.
48
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 49
Lesson 9: Bank facilities Cash Book: 2 columns

Topic summary
● ● ● ●
Basic matters concerning methods of payment and cash and bank records The use of a
2-column Cash Book The significance of a bank overdraft and its effect on the Bank
Account The book-keeping relationship between the Bank Current Account and the Bank
Deposit Account

7.1 7.2 The main types of bank account and their key features The key aspects of
the following methods of payment and receipt of money, and the differences between
them: 7.2.1 cash 7.2.2 cheque 7.2.3 credit transfer 7.2.4 standing order 7.2.5
direct debit Significance of the term bank overdraft: how an overdraft might arise
The differences between: 7.4.1 interest receivable (by the customer) on a bank
account 7.4.2 interest payable on a bank loan or overdraft 7.4.3 bank charges as
charged by a bank for operating an account Naming of and use of the following
abbreviations: 7.5.1 DD or D/D – direct debit 7.5.2 CT or C/T – credit transfer
7.5.3 STO or S/O – standing order 7.5.4 Div – dividend Significance of the
following terms: 7.6.1 bank paying-in book 7.6.2 banker’s order 7.6.3 cheque book
counterfoils/stubs 7.6.4 counter credits 7.6.5 drawer 7.6.6 drawee 7.6.7 remittance
(continued)
7.3 7.4
7.5
7.6
49
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 50
Bank facilities Cash Book: 2 columns
Extended Syllabus references (continued)

8.4 8.6 Transfers between the cash and bank accounts (contra entries) The
variations of entry arising on and from the sale of goods for cash, eg the
immediate banking of cash as against the delayed banking of cash 8.7 The book-
keeping entries required on the transfer of funds between the Bank Current Account
and the Bank Deposit Account 8.17 The periodic balancing of the Cash Book, bringing
the balance down for the start of the next period
A detailed knowledge of bank facilities is not required for the LCCIEB First Level
Book-keeping examination.There is, however, a need to know: • • • • the nature of 2
types of bank account: the Current Account and the Deposit Account; the main
methods of payment through a bank, eg cheque or credit transfer; the process of
cheque clearance (in outline); how the bank account affects the Cash Book.
Reconciliation between the bank statement and the Cash Book is dealt with in Lesson
17 (page 132). You can obtain literature from a bank, that describes the accounts
that are available, and methods of payment, together with specimen paying-in slips,
for example.
Step 1
Aim: to be able to apply knowledge of bank facilities to answering basic questions
on methods of payment and cash and bank records Many students will be aware of bank
facilities and may have first-hand experience of holding a bank account. This
knowledge can be drawn upon by asking the students questions at appropriate points
in the lesson. For example, you could ask them about the type of bank accounts they
have, and if any features vary from those of the 2 basic types of account.You could
also ask what factors might delay the clearance of a cheque. 1 Bank accounts Ensure
that students are aware of the 2 main types of bank account: the Current Account
and the Deposit Account. Review the key features of each: Deposit Account normally
for earning interest on the balance; withdrawals are infrequent
50
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 51
Current Account
a ‘working account’ for regular banking and withdrawal of money; generally interest
is earned on the balance only if the balance is kept above a certain minimum
2 Cheques The students should be told the following about cheques: • what their
purpose is; • who the parties to a cheque are. Illustrate this information about
cheques by displaying Figure 9.1 on the overhead projector.
instructs Bank
to pay to Drawer Payee or to drawer himself Figure 9.1 The interaction of the
parties to a cheque
Note The delay in clearance will increase if P Sempster (the payee) delays paying
the cheque into his account.
In the simplified form of cheque shown below:

● ●
T Royle is the drawer, ie the party making payment; Albion Bank,York east is the
drawee, ie the party upon whom the cheque is drawn and where T Royle has his bank
account; P Sempster is the payee, ie the party to whom the cheque is payable.
Albion Bank plc York East branch Pay
7 May Year 4
P Sempster Three hundred and and thirty pence
sixty pounds
£360-30 T Royle
51
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 52
Explaining what the different cheque numbers are will be useful in making cash-book
entries and, later on, in preparing bank-reconciliation statements (see the
student’s book How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level, pages 74–5). 3 Paying-in slip
Tell students that the paying-in slip is used for paying cash or cheques into a
bank account. It is often referred to in questions requiring the preparation of a
Cash Book. 4 Cheque clearance Explain what cheque clearance is. A cheque is cleared
when the drawee bank has indicated that it will pay the amount stated on the
cheque. Emphasize that there is a time delay before the 2 accounts involved
(drawer’s and drawee’s) are adjusted. For example, in the journey of a drawn cheque
illustrated in Figure 9.2, a cheque is drawn by T Royle (an account holder at
Albion Bank,York East branch) payable to P Semster (who holds an account at
Derbyshire Bank, Chester branch) – also in the Appendix: T/9.1 (page 225).
Year 4 7 May T Royle (drawer) cheque sent to P Sempster (payee) receives cheque T
Royle credits bank account
P Sempster debits bank account
8 May
pays cheque into account with Derbyshire Bank Chester branch
9 May
cheque sent to Derbyshire Bank clearance centre sent (with other cheques) to
10 May
10 May
Albion Bank clearance centre Albion Bank York East branch charged against account
of T Royle
11 May
Figure 9.2 The journey of a ‘drawn’ cheque
52
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 53
5 Other payment methods The 3 methods of which candidates need to be aware are: (a)
credit transfer used for: (i) single settlement, eg payment of one bill; or (ii)
multiple settlement, eg one instruction to the bank to make a number of payments to
different accounts (of persons or organizations). for regular payments: • of fixed
amounts; • at stated dates; • to certain persons or firms. ‘credit transfer in
reverse’: initiated by the creditor, although with the written agreement of the
debtor: • for either fixed or variable amounts; • when the time intervals between
payments vary.
(b) standing order
(c) direct debit
6 Counter credits This term literally means the recognition of credit at the bank
counter. It relates to payments into a bank account. Counter credits may cover a
number of cheques, etc amounting to the sum stated. 7 Explain the following terms:
• interest receivable (by the customer) on a bank account – normally only if the
balance is above a certain minimum; • interest payable on a bank loan or overdraft;
and • bank commission (charges), which are charged by a bank for operating an
account. Note Explain the terms: bank loan bank overdraft an amount made available
for an agreed period; interest is charged on the full amount of the loan regardless
of how much is drawn. an overdraft occurs when withdrawals exceed deposits; it may
be with or without prior agreement with the bank; interest is charged from day to
day on the varying balance.
8 Give each student a copy of the multiple-choice questions (T/9.2 in the Appendix,
page 226). Ask the students to work through them.
53
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 54
Step 2
Aim: to be able to prepare a 2-column Cash Book Answers to examination questions
requiring the preparation of a Cash Book are often weak.The weakness may, in part,
be due to candidates’ unfamiliarity with presenting their work in columnar form. 1
Explain that, in a 2-column Cash Book, related accounts, cash and bank, are merely
positioned beside each other. Practice in answering questions requiring columnar
form should solve any difficulty the students might have. 2 Show the students cash
and bank accounts, as they have been introduced so far on the overhead projector,
eg:
Cash Year 2 1 Sep Balance b/d 7 Sep Sales 26 Sep R Layburn £ 43 116 51 210 136 Bank
Year 2 1 Sep 8 Sep 12 Sep 25 Sep Balance b/d T Wells Office furniture J Telby £ 726
315 290 85 1,416 1 Oct Balance b/d 718 Year 2 4 Sep 16 Sep 20 Sep 28 Sep 30 Sep
Rent T Laite Insurance V Barnes Balance c/d £ 240 176 215 167 718 1,416 Year 2 5
Sep 11 Sep 19 Sep 30 Sep Cleaning K Mills Postage Balance c/d £ 18 37 19 136 210
1 Oct
Balance b/d
3 Show the 2 accounts combined. Make sure you enter the items in correct date
order. Carefully tick ( ) the original items as they are entered in the newly
presented Cash Book.
54
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 55
CASH BOOK Year 2 1 Sep 7 Sep 8 Sep 12 Sep 25 Sep 26 Sep Cash Bank £ £ 43 726 116
315 290 85 51 Year 2 4 Sep 5 Sep 11 Sep 16 Sep 19 Sep 20 Sep 28 Sep 30 Sep Cash
Bank £ £ 240 18 37 176 19 215 67 136 718 210 1,416
Balances b/d Sales T Wells Office furniture J Telby R Layburn
Rent Cleaning K Mills T Laite Postage Insurance V Barnes Balance c/d
210 1 Oct Balance b/d 136
1,416 718
Stress the importance of entering the items in date order. 4 Hand out copies of, or
show on the overhead projector, exercise T/9.3* in the Appendix (page 227). Ask the
students to work through the exercise. 5 Ask the students why it is necessary to
keep a separate record in the Cash Book.There are two answers: (a) A golden rule in
accounting is to separate, if possible, the handling of, or dealing with, money
from other aspects. This action lessens the chance of an employee taking advantage
of the system. (b) The volume of work in dealing with the receipt and payment of
money might also justify a separate record. 6 Ask the students why it is necessary
to keep cash and bank accounts together in columnar format.The answer is that they
are so closely related that transfer sometimes takes place between them. 7 Explain
that the transfer of cash into the bank would result in:
● ●
cash reduced – credit cash bank increased – debit bank.
8 Illustrate how the transfer of cash into the bank would appear in the Cash Book:
CASH BOOK Year 4 12 Feb Cash £ Cash C Bank £ 270 Year 4 12 Feb Cash £ 270 Bank £
Bank C
The ‘C’ means contra, which is used where a double entry is complete within the
Cash Book.
55
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 56
9 Cash might also be taken out of the bank. Show the Cash Book as it would appear
when money is withdrawn from the bank account to increase office cash:
CASH BOOK Year 4 15 Mar Bank C Cash £ 120 Bank £ Year 4 15 Mar Cash C Cash £ Bank £
120
Appendix (page 228). Ask the students to work through the exercise. 11 Check that
the students are making the entries correctly in the answer to exercise T/9.4. In
particular check that: (a) each transaction is dated; (b) transactions are entered
in strict date order; (c) the appropriate wording is entered in the middle
‘details’ column, which always contains the name of the corresponding account, ie
where the double entry is completed. 12 Ask the students if they can spot any bad
business practice being followed by W Towcester. The answer is that there is some
bad business practice. W Towcester is keeping too much cash in the office at one
time, which is a security risk. On 6 April, £470 cash was received for sales, none
of which was banked until 9 April. 13 Explain that for reasons of security, the
general practice is to bank cash, if possible, on the day of receipt. If cash is
banked on the day that it is received, the account entries should be recorded as if
a cheque had been banked immediately. For example, on 9 May Year 6,W Towcester
receives £590 in cash from sales and banks the cash the same day. The account entry
for this transaction would be as follows:
CASH BOOK Year 6 9 May Sales Cash £ Bank £ 590 Year Cash £ Bank £
14 Point out that some book-keepers record the entry for cash sales that are
banked, first as a debit in the cash column and then separately bank the amount. If
the entry has been recorded in this way, the initial entry must be followed by a
complete set of contra entries such as credit cash/debit bank. For examination
purposes, the method shown in W Towcester’s Cash Book above – direct entry in the
debit bank column – is strongly recommended. This method prevents complications and
confusion as to the double entry is less likely. A common fault in answers to
examination questions on this topic is failing to make the complete contra, which
loses marks.
56
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 57
15 Explain that there is an alternative way of recording cash sales that are
banked. This alternative is used when part of the cash received from sales is
banked (on the same day) and the remainder is retained as office cash. For example,
5 June Year 6, £985 is received from cash, £900 of which was banked on the same
day. This transaction would be recorded as follows:
Method A CASH BOOK Year 6 5 Jun Cash £ 85 Bank £ 900 Cash £ Bank £
Sales
If treated as 2 transactions, the entry would be recorded as follows:

Method B CASH BOOK Year 6 5 Jun 5 Jun Cash £ 985 Bank £ 900 Year 6 5 Jun Cash £ 900
Bank £
Sales Cash C
Bank C
Method A is to be preferred. It is simpler and less prone to error. 16 Hand out

copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercise T/9.5* in the Appendix (page
229). Ask the students to work through the exercise.
Step 3
Aim: to be aware of the significance of a bank overdraft and its effect on the bank
account 1 Explain that a bank overdraft might arise because: • the bank has agreed
that the account may be overdrawn, subject to a limit; • the customer
(intentionally or otherwise) has drawn more out of the account than it contains. 2
Tell the students that the effect of an overdraft is to create a ‘minus’ or
negative balance from the customer’s viewpoint.The balance changes from debit to
credit and from asset to liability (the amount owed to the bank). 3 Illustrate the
significance of a bank overdraft and its effect by referring in the Appendix, page
229 to the Cash Book of F Swaine (see T.9.5/A). If a cheque for £9,000 had been
drawn from F Swaine’s account on 30 November Year 5, the Cash Book would appear as
follows:
57
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 58
F Swaine CASH BOOK Year 5 1 Nov 3 Nov 8 Nov 17 Nov 20 Nov 23 Nov 30 Nov Cash Bank £
£ 12,000 11,500 860 130 315 210 700 1,455 Year 5 3 Nov 5 Nov 10 Nov 13 Nov 15 Nov
17 Nov 18 Nov 28 Nov 29 Nov 30 Nov 30 Nov Cash Bank £ £ Bank C 11,500 Motor vehicle
4,200 Wages 270 Purchases 1,040 Carriage 43 Cash C 130 Wages 290 Drawings 150 F
Glubb 460 S Royal 9,000 Balance c/d 87 12,340 14,830 1,455
Capital Cash C Sales Bank C T Dart Sales Balance c/d
12,340 14,830 1 Dec Balance b/d 87
1 Dec Balance b/d
4 Point out that:

●
The credit balance for bank will appear in the balance sheet of F Swaine as a
liability, ie under the heading of ‘Amounts due within 1 year’. Cash never has a
credit balance. Negative cash is an impossibility.
Particularly stress the second point; this will help prevent students from wrongly
showing a concluding credit balance for cash.
Step 4
Aim: to appreciate the book-keeping relationship between the bank Current Account
and the bank Deposit Account Remind the students that the bank Current Account is
very much a working account that is used for regular banking and withdrawal of
money. The Deposit Account, however, has money paid into it or withdrawn from it
infrequently.The Current Account is recorded in the Cash Book; the Deposit Account
is kept in the General Ledger because entries are infrequent. Thus, if there were a
transfer on 12 April Year 4 of £2,000 from the Current Account into the Deposit
Account, the entries would be recorded as follows:
58
pages1-59
15/3/03
11:14 am
Page 59
CASH BOOK Year 4 12 Apr General Ledger Bank Deposit Account Year 4 12 Apr £ Bank
(Current a/c) 2,000 Cash £ Bank Deposit a/c Bank £ 2,000
If there were a withdrawal from the bank Deposit Account into the bank Current
Account the entries would, of course, be the reverse of those shown above.
59
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 60
Lesson 10: Cash Book: 3 columns – cash discount

Topic summary
● ● ●
The significance of cash discount Account entries in respect of cash discount

Preparing the 3-column Cash Book, including entries for discounts, and posting
discount totals to the General Ledger

Use of the 3-column Cash Book (the bank columns recording the Bank Current Account
only) 8.3 The posting of individual transactions from the Cash Book to the ledger
8.5 The differences in book-keeping entries regarding the withdrawal of funds from
the bank, as between: 8.5.1 that for use in the business – a contra entry 8.5.2
that for private use – drawings 8.8 Cash discount as part of the terms of sale 8.9
The impact of cash discount upon the seller (discount allowed) and the buyer
(discount received) respectively 8.10 The double-entry effect of discount allowed
and discount received respectively 8.11 The purpose and use of discount columns in
the Cash Book 8.18 The periodic posting of discount-column totals from the Cash
Book to the Discount Allowed and Discount Received Accounts in the General Ledger
8.2
One of the topics that causes students difficulty is discounts. ‘Cash discount’ is
a rather misleading term: it is really an allowance given to encourage payment
within a certain period of time. Understanding what cash discount means is the key
to solving at least part of the students’ difficulty. A debtor is entitled to a
cash discount only when the payment condition is met.
60
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 61
Cash Book: 3 columns – cash discount
Step 1
Aim: to appreciate the significance of cash discount 1 Discuss the purpose of cash
discount. Explain that its purpose is to induce prompt or early payment by a
customer who has been sold goods on credit. By receiving payment early, the seller
is able to use the money to purchase and then sell more goods. Cash discount, as
part of the seller’s ‘terms of sale’, also serves to attract the would-be
purchaser.The terms of sale might state, for example, that:
● ●
a period of credit of one month is allowed; if payment is made within 10 days of

buying the goods, a cash discount of 2% will be allowed.
2 Explain that the term ‘cash discount’ is misleading; it is an allowance given to

encourage the purchaser to pay an account within a certain period of time. The
allowance is calculated as a percentage (%) of the price of the goods. For example,
if the price of the goods is £250 and the cash discount for payment within 10 days
is 2%, then:
Amount of cash discount: Net amount to be paid £ 250 x 2/100 = £5 245
3 Stress that the buyer of goods (on credit) is not automatically entitled to a
cash discount. It is conditional, although it may be part of the terms of sale, ie
the buyer has to meet certain conditions to receive the discount. For example, he
or she must: (a) pay by a certain date (10 days after the date of sale, in the
example above) (b) pay in a duly acceptable form (eg in cash or with a cheque drawn
on a reputable bank). It is the first of these two conditions with which students
will be concerned. If, in the example above, the purchaser pays the account 13 days
after the date of purchase, then he or she foregoes any entitlement to cash
discount and must pay the full list price, ie £250. 4 Copy and hand out, or display
on the overhead projector, the simple examples below. Ask the students to work
through them. Example (a) On 3 June Year 6, X sells goods on credit to Y for £480.
The terms of sale allow a period of credit of one month but, if payment is made
within 7 days of purchase, a cash discount of 2 1/2 % will be allowed. Y pays the
account on 8 June Year 6. Y is entitled to the cash discount because he or she has
paid the account within the conditional 7-day period.
61
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 62
Selling price less 21/2% cash discount Payment made
£ 480 12 468
Example (b) On 7 August Year 6, A sells goods on credit to B for £350. The terms of
sale allow a period of credit of one month but, if payment is made within 14 days
of purchase, a cash discount of 2 1/2% will be allowed. B pays the account on 5
September Year 6. B settles the account after a lapse of more than 14 days,
foregoing entitlement to the cash discount. He or she has to pay the full list
price of £350. However, B has taken advantage of most of the period of credit,
which expires on 7 September Year 6. In Example (a), for X, the seller/creditor,
the discount is described as ‘discount allowed’; for Y, the purchaser/debtor, the
discount is described as ‘discount received’. This situation can be illustrated
thus:
Sale of goods on credit Purchase of goods on credit debtor creditor discount
allowed discount received
Firms, as both buyers and sellers of goods, can be both ‘allowers’ and ‘receivers’
of cash discount. 5 Make it clear to the students that the term ‘cash’ covers
payments in actual cash, and through the banking system.
Step 2
Aim: to be able to make account entries in respect of cash discount 1 Discount
allowed Remind the students that discount allowed represents discount from the
seller’s viewpoint. Illustrate discount allowed with the example below. Example On
1 July Year 3, L Green owes A Brown, a trader, £100. The terms of sale allows a 2
1/2 % discount for payment within 14 days. L Green meets this condition and so pays
£100 less the £2.50 discount = £97.50
62
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 63
In account terms, the transaction would appear as follows:

Transaction effect (a) Cash Debtor: L Green (b) Discount allowed Debtor: L Green +
£97.50 - £97.50 + £2.50 - £2.50 Book-keeping action Debit Cash Account Credit L
Green Debit discount allowed Credit L Green
Point out that Discount Allowed is an expense account of A Brown and is kept in the
General Ledger. It also represents a ‘holding’ account, which holds the balance of
the discount allowed until it is transferred to the Profit & Loss Account at the
end of the period. Illustrate the account on the overhead projector or board as
follows:
CASH BOOK Year 3 9 Jul Cash £ 97.50 Bank £ Cash Bank
L Green
L Green Year 3 1 Jul Balance b/d £ 100 Year 3 9 Jul 9 Jul Discount Allowed Year 3 9
Jul L Green £ 2.50 Cash Discount allowed £ 97.50 2.50
Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector, the following exercise and
ask the students to work through it. Exercise On 2 May Year 5, B Hall, a trader,
sells goods worth £720 on credit to F Trill.The terms of sale allow a 2 1/2% cash
discount for payment within one month. F Trill pays his account by cheque on 30 May
Year 5. Required Record these transactions in the books of B Hall. Solution
CASH BOOK Year 5 30 May Cash £ F Trill Bank £ 702 Cash Bank £ £
63
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 64
F Trill Year 5 2 May Sales £ 720 Year 5 30 May Bank 30 May Discount allowed £ 702
18
Discount Allowed Year 5 30 May F Trill £ 18
2 Discount received Remind the students that discount received represents discount
from the buyer’s viewpoint, ie by receiving cash discount the buyer pays less to
settle the account. Illustrate discount received with the example below. Example A
Brown the trader (see page 62) is now a debtor who owes T Wells the sum of £500 at
1 July Year 3. The terms of sale allow 2% cash discount for payment within 14 days
and A Brown meets this condition.Thus, A Brown pays only
£500 less the £10 discount = £490
In account terms, the transaction would appear as follows:

Transaction effect (a) Bank Creditor: T Wells (b) Creditor: T Wells Discount
received - £490 - £490 - £10 + £10 Book-keeping action Credit bank account Debit T
Wells Debit T Wells Credit discount received
Point out that discount received is an income (or ‘revenue’) account of A Brown and
is kept in the General Ledger. It also serves as a ‘holding’ account, which holds
the balance of the discount received until it is transferred to the Profit & Loss
Account at the end of the period. Illustrate the account entries on the overhead
projector or board as follows:
64
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 65
CASH BOOK Cash £ Bank £ Year 3 10 Jul Cash £ T Wells Bank £ 490
T Wells Year 3 10 Jul 10 Jul Bank Discount received £ 490 10 Year 3 1 Jul Balance
b/d £ 500
Discount Received Year 3 10 Jul T Wells £ 10
Hand out copies of, or display on the overhead projector, the following exercise.
Ask the students to work through it. Exercise On 3 June Year 5, B Hall buys goods
worth £840 on credit from Laken Ltd.The terms of sale allow 3 3/4 % cash discount
for payment within one month. B Hall pays the account by cheque on 29 June Year 5.
Required Record this transaction in the books of B Hall. Solution The amount of
cash discount = £840 × 3 3/4 /100 = £31.50 Therefore the amount to be paid = £840 -
£31.50 = £808.50
CASH BOOK Cash Bank Year 5 29 Jun B Hall Laken Ltd Year 5 29 Jun Bank 29 Jun
Discount received £ 808.50 31.50 Year 5 29 Jun £ 840 Cash Bank £ £ 808.50
Discount Received Year 5 29 Jun Laken Ltd £ 31.50
65
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 66
Step 3
Aims: to be able to prepare a 3-column Cash Book, including entries for discounts;
and to be able to post discount totals to the General Ledger 1 Explain the
disadvantage of going to the General Ledger every time an entry is made for cash
discount. It makes less work to have discount columns in the Cash Book.The discount
entry can then be made when entering either the receipt or payment of money. 2 Show
the Cash Book entries for A Brown that would be recorded in place of those shown on
pages 63 and 65.
CASH BOOK Disc All’d Cash Bank £ £ £ 2.50 97.50 Disc Rec’d Cash Bank £ £ £ 10 490
Year 3 9 Jul
L Green
Year 3 10 Jul
T Wells
Point out that the entries in the personal (debtor/creditor) accounts are
unchanged. Because these entries remain unchanged, discount amounts can be
collected in the discount columns and the totals transferred periodically into the
General Ledger as shown below.
total of left-hand discount column to total of right-hand discount column to
Discount Allowed Account (debit side)
Discount Received Account (credit side)
3 Explain that when payment is made by cheque, it is common practice to include the
number of each cheque in the Cash Book. If cheque numbers are included in a
question, these numbers should be stated in the answer beside the name of the payee
in brackets. Cheque numbers appear only on the credit side of the Cash Book, ie in
respect of cheques drawn by the firm for which the entries in the Cash Book are
being recorded. It is sufficient for the students to show the last 3 numbers only,
eg a payment of £315 by cheque number 235212 to F Smith would appear as:
CASH BOOK Dr Cr Disc Cash Bank Year 4 £ £ £ 17 Feb F Smith (212) 315
66
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 67
4 Display exercise T/10.1 in the Appendix (page 230) on the overhead projector.
Work through it with the class. This exercise illustrates the use of the 3-column
Cash Book, as well as the immediate postings to ledger accounts and the end-of-the-
month transfer of column totals to the respective discount accounts. Solution to
T/10.1
CASH BOOK Disc All’d Cash Bank £ £ £ 93 1,040 7 343 11 429 80 Disc Rec’d Cash Bank
£ £ £ 56 7 273 190 80 291 117 978 173 1,812
Year 5 1 May 11 May 24 May 28 May
Bal’s b/d R Vine A Croft Bank C
Year 5 13 May Stationery 18 May T Dole (214) 21 28 30 31 May May May May
18 1 Jun Bal’s b/d
173 117
1,812 978 SALES LEDGER A Croft
Insurance (215) Cash (216) C W Kone (217) 9 Bal’s c/d 16
Year 5 1 May Balance b/d
£ 440 440
Year 5 24 May Bank 24 May Discount allowed
£ 429 11 440
R Vine Year 5 1 May Balance b/d £ 350 350 PURCHASES LEDGER T Dole Year 5 18 May
Bank 18 May Discount received £ 273 7 280 Year 5 1 May Balance b/d £ 280 280 W Kone
Year 5 30 May Bank 30 May Discount received £ 291 9 300 Year 5 1 May Balance b/d £
300 300 Year 5 11 May Bank 11 May Discount allowed £ 343 7 350
(continued)
67
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 68
GENERAL LEDGER Stationery Year 5 13 May Cash £ 56 Insurance Year 5 21 May Bank £
190 Discount Allowed Year 5 31 May Sundries £ 18 Discount Received Year 5 31 May
Sundries £ 16
5 Direct the students’ attention to the following points in the Cash Book and
ledgers shown above, that:
●
● ●
the total of each discount column is transferred – to the same side (Dr or Cr) in
the ledger; there is no balancing of discount columns; prompt postings are made of
other items, eg to personal accounts, stationery, or insurance; use of the word
‘sundries’ in each discount account.
Note Explain that the word ‘sundries’ has a general application and has been used
elsewhere in this text. In this subject, it means a number of entries amounting to
the sum stated. 6 Common errors made by candidates Draw the attention of students
to the following points as they work through the exercises listed on page 69. (a)
The reversal of entries: payments debited and income credited. (b) When recording
money received from cash sales that is banked the same day candidates may fail to
do the full contra (see Lesson 9, page 49). They make the entry in Dr cash but then
either debit or credit the bank column. (c) Showing a credit balance of cash.This
type of entry is the equivalent of a deficit of cash, which is impossible. If a Cr
cash balance emerges there is something wrong with the entries. (d) Sometimes
discount columns have been omitted from the Cash Book when the entries should be
included. (e) Cash discount added to the amount of a cheque.
68
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 69
(f ) The discount columns are balanced, ie a balance is found between the totals of
the 2 columns. (g) When the candidates post entries to the discount accounts (in
the General Ledger) they may make one of two errors; they: ● post individual items,
which is quite wrong and defeats the purpose of having the discount columns; ● post
the column totals to the wrong side of each discount account. 7 Give the students
each a copy of exercise T/10.2 in the Appendix (page 231) and ask them to work
through it. However, before they start work on the exercise, point out that
sometimes a payment or receipt of money to or from a debtor or creditor is
described as being ‘in settlement of the amount due’ or ‘in settlement of a
debt’.These terms indicate that a cash discount has been either received or
allowed. For example a cheque for £720 received in settlement of an amount of £750
means that a cash discount of £30 has been allowed, and this amount should be
recorded in the discount allowed column of the Cash Book. Hand out copies of
exercises T/10.3 and T/10.4 in the Appendix (pages 232–3) to the class and ask the
students to work through them. Both these exercises are from past LCCIEB First
Level Book-keeping papers. They require information from different sources to be
brought together. For example, for T/10.3, information from the bank paying-in
book, cheque-book counterfoils, and record of movements of cash is required.Tell
the students that they must keep the entries in strict date order. In T/10.3
certain information picked up from the bank statement is to be entered after an
initial balancing.
69
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 70
Lesson 11: Purchases and Sales Day Books

Topic summary
● ●
● ●
The invoice or copy invoice as the source document for credit purchases or sales
The preparation of a Sales Day Book for a given period and posting entries to
ledger accounts The function of the Sales Day Book The book-keeping significance of
trade discount and how it contrasts with cash discount The preparation of a
Purchases Day Book for a given period and posting entries to ledger accounts

Use of the term source document: in particular, the part played in book-keeping by
the invoice and the credit note 5.8 The significance of trade discount 5.9 The
calculation of trade discount, from list price to obtain net price 6.1 The function
of Purchases, Sales, Returns Outwards, and Returns Inwards Day Books 6.2 The
alternative names used for these various day books 6.3 The recording of individual
transactions in the day books 6.4 Making individual postings from the day books to
personal accounts 6.5 Making postings of period day-book totals to the Purchases,
Sales, and Returns Accounts in the General Ledger 8.12 The differences between
trade discount and cash discount and the different book-keeping effects 5.7
Day books is a topic that sometimes results in the loss of examination marks.The
problem arises largely from failure of students to understand the function of the
day books. So often, day books are prepared as if they are ledger accounts. Entries
in the day books require an authorized source such as an invoice or copy invoice.
Trade discount also has to be considered.
70
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 71
Purchases and Sales Day Books
Step 1
Aim: to recognize the invoice or copy invoice as the source document for credit
purchases or sales 1 Explain that when goods are sold on credit, the seller will
send an invoice to the buyer, setting out:
● ● ● ●
the parties to the transaction details of the goods sold their prices the ‘terms of
sale’.
2 Show a specimen invoice (Figure 11.1) on the overhead projector. INVOICE

Tempster & Fall 25 The Square Northbridge NT3 5WR
7 April Year 4
Invoice no 5622 To: R Maundy 17 The Luttens Wednesbury WD4 3ET
Quantity
Description
Unit price £ 7 12 20
Total £ 280.00 240.00 200.00 720.00
40 20 10
Moveable shelves Lockable containers Storage cabinets
less trade discount at 12 / %
12
90.00 630.00
Terms: 21/2% cash discount for payment within 30 days Figure 11.1 A specimen
invoice
71
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 72
If possible, obtain actual invoices for the students to see. 3 Explain that the
seller will pass a copy of the outgoing invoice to his or her book-keeper. The copy
invoice will then be the basis of entry into the accounts, ie it will be the
‘source document’.
Step 2
Aim: to be able to prepare a Sales Day Book for a given period and to post entries
to ledger accounts 1 On the board or overhead projector, show the Sales Day Book of
Tempster & Fall, below, and:
● ● ●
explain that the sources of the entries are copy invoices; show the postings to the
ledger one by one; show clearly how the double entry is achieved.
SALES DAY BOOK Invoice no Year 4 2 Apr 7 Apr 20 Apr 26 Apr A Trumble R Maundy W
Trent F Skane 5621 5622 5623 5624 To Sales Account Amount £ 433 630 290 375 1,728
Point out that invoice numbers might not be included in some examination questions,
and so the ‘invoice no’ column would be left out. 2 The double entry for Tempster &
Fall’s transactions is achieved as follows: (a) the individual amounts are posted
to the debtor accounts as soon as possible, ie they are debit entries; (b) the
total of the credit sales for April Year 4 is transferred at the end of the month
to the credit of the Sales Account in the General Ledger.
SALES LEDGER Dr Year 4 2 Apr A Trumble Sales £ 433
72
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 73
R Maundy Year 4 7 Apr Sales £ 630 W Trent Year 4 20 Apr Sales £ 290 F Skane Year 4
26 Apr Sales £ 375 GENERAL LEDGER Sales Year 4 30 Apr
Sundries
Cr £ 1,728
Check that the total of the 4 debit entries is equal to the amount of the credit
entry.
Step 3
Aim: to appreciate the functions of the Sales Day Book 1 Discuss the function of
the Sales Day Book. Explain that it is used for:
● ●
recording credit sales; carrying transaction detail instead of the Sales Account.
Emphasize that, usually, only credit sales are entered in the day book: cash sales
will continue to be entered directly into the Sales Account.1 2 Illustrate the
procedure for credit sales by displaying Figure 11.2 on the overhead projector.
Copy invoice (source document) SALES DAY BOOK daily posting monthly posting of
total to GENERAL LEDGER – Sales Account (CREDIT)
Customer accounts (DEBIT) Figure 11.2 Credit sales procedure
73
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 74
Stress that the entry in the day book is not part of double entry: it is a note
only – a form of memorandum. The amounts of credit sales are held in the day book
throughout each month. At the end of each month the total is transferred to the
Sales Account. Thus, during the month, the debit part of each credit sale has been
entered but not the credit part. The double entry is complete when the monthly
total is transferred. 3 Ask the students what the advantages are of having a Sales
Day Book. The answers should be that:
● ●
fewer items need to be passed through the double-entry system; accounting work can
be divided among staff, with one person looking after the day book and another the
ledger.
4 The day book seems to have limited detail recorded for each transaction. Ask the
students if it really helps the ledger that much.The answer is that it is true that
day book entries nowadays are much briefer than in the past. Much of the detail is
shown on the copy invoice, which can be referred to if necessary. The file of copy
invoices can be regarded as supporting the day book. Present-day practice still
means that the ledger is helped by not having to carry a lot of detail. 5 Explain
that in a computer-based account system, the information included in the manually
based Sales Day Book would be recorded to enable many functions to be performed.
Thus, the amount of monthly credit sales could be known quickly. Information may
also be readily available on the amounts outstanding on individual customer
accounts, on the regularity of payments by customers, etc. The print-out of
invoices for despatch to customers and other documents could also be part of an
integrated system. 6 Hand out copies of or display exercise T/11.1 in the Appendix
(page 234) on the overhead projector and ask the students to work through it.
Step 4
Aim: to appreciate the book-keeping significance of trade discount and how it
contrasts with cash discount 1 Explain the nature of trade discount and its effect
on selling price. Trade discount is normally an allowance to traders for buying in
bigger quantities. Any one trader might offer different levels of discount, eg 10%,
121/2 %, or 15%, according to the quantity or amount (in £) of an order. 2 If
possible, show examples of trade discount in catalogues or price lists issued by
traders. Refer to the trade discount shown on the invoice illustrated on page 71.
Show that the entry in the Sales Day Book for R Maundy is £630 (see page 72), ie
the net figure on
74
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 75
the invoice after the trade discount is deducted. From this example, the students
will see that trade discount is not recorded in the accounts. However, cash
discount is recorded in the accounts: the buyer still has to meet the condition of
paying the account by a certain date. 3 Hand out copies of or display the following
exercise on the overhead projector and ask the students to work through it.
Exercise On 5 January Year 7, K Johnson sells goods on credit to V Lympne, at a
list price of £750 and quantity (trade) discount of 20%. A cash discount of 21/2 %
is allowed if the account is settled within 30 days of the invoice date. V Lympne
pays the account by cheque on 31 January Year 7. Required In the books of K
Johnson, show the relevant entries in: (i) the Sales Day Book (ii) the ledger
account of V Lympne. Solution In the books of K Johnson:
SALES DAY BOOK Year 7 5 Jan SALES LEDGER V Lympne Year 7 5 Jan Sales £ 600 600 Year
7 31 Jan 31 Jan Bank Discount allowed £ 585 15 600 V Lympne £ 600
Note The trade discount does not appear in any account and need not appear in the
Sales Day Book, ie it is sufficient to show the net figure after the deduction of
the trade discount. 4 Explain that cash discount does not, as some students think,
appear in the Sales Day Book. It does, however, appear on the credit side of V
Lympne’s account – because Lympne has paid the account within the required 30 days.
5 Hand out copies of or display on the overhead projector exercise T/11.2 in the
Appendix (page 234) and ask the students to work through it.
75
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 76
Step 5
Aim: to be able to prepare a Purchases Day Book for a given period and to post
entries to ledger accounts 1 Explain that purchases on credit are treated on a
similar basis to credit sales. First, they are listed in a Purchases Day Book.
Illustrate the procedure for credit purchases by displaying Figure 11.3 on the
overhead projector.
Invoice PURCHASES DAY BOOK monthly posting of total to
daily posting
GENERAL LEDGER – Purchases Account (DEBIT) Figure 11.3 Procedure for credit
purchases
PURCHASES LEDGER – Supplier Accounts (CREDIT)
2 Show the following Purchases Day Book of R Maundy on the board or overhead
projector:
PURCHASES DAY BOOK Invoice no Year 4 7 Apr 14 Apr 20 Apr 23 Apr Tempster & Fall 980
S Clegg 981 T Roman 982 B Porter 983 To Purchases Account Amount £ 630 416 528 364
1,938
3 Show the students how to post the transactions recorded in the Purchases Day Book
to the ledger accounts:
PURCHASES LEDGER Tempster & Fall Year 4 7 Apr S Clegg Year 4 14 Apr Purchases £ 630
£ 416
Purchases
76
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 77
T Roman Year 4 20 Apr B Porter Year 4 23 Apr GENERAL LEDGER Purchases Year 4 30 Apr
Sundries £ 1,938 Purchases £ 364 Purchases £ 528
Point out that the sale to R Maundy, in the Sales Day Book of Tempster & Fall,
becomes a purchase in the Purchases Day Book of R Maundy.The amount is the same. 4
Inform the students that each entry in the Purchases Day Book is made from an
invoice received from the seller. Compare this procedure with that for the copy
invoice from which entries are made in the seller’s day book. 5 Display exercise
T/11.3 in the Appendix (page 235) on the overhead projector, or hand out copies of
it to the students. Ask the students to work through the exercise. Note Advise the
students that they need to be familiar with the alternative names for the 2 day
books dealt with in this lesson to complete the exercise. The alternative names are
given below:
Sales Day Book Purchases Day Book or or Sales Journal Purchases Journal
6 Common errors made by candidates concerning day books Draw the attention of the
students to the following points. (a) The day books are shown in account format,
which demonstrates a basic misunderstanding of the function of the day book. (b)
The transactions that have been recorded in the day books are repeated, line by
line, in the Purchases Account and/or Sales Account. Only period totals are
supposed to be posted to the Purchases and Sales Accounts. (c) The deduction of
cash discount in the day books. 7 Display exercise T/11.4 in the Appendix (page
236) on the overhead projector or hand out copies of it to the students. Ask them
to work through the exercise. This exercise should help to reinforce the students’
knowledge about the 3-column Cash Book.
77
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 78
Lesson 12: Returns Day Books

Topic summary
● ● ●
● ●
The credit note or copy credit note as the source document for returns entries The
function of the Returns Inwards and Returns Outwards Day Books The preparation of a
Returns Inwards Day Book for a given period and posting entries to the ledger
accounts The preparation of a Returns Outwards Day Book for a given period and
posting entries to the ledger accounts The use of the term ‘book of prime entry’
The reinforcement of learning and practice in regard to the use of day books

5.7 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 8.1 Use of the term source document: in particular, the
part played in book-keeping by the invoice and the credit note The function of
Purchases, Sales, Returns Outwards, and Returns Inwards Day Books The alternative
names used for these various day books The recording of individual transactions in
the day books Making individual postings from the day books to personal accounts
Making postings of period day-book totals to the Purchases, Sales, and Returns
Accounts in the General Ledger The reason for maintaining separate Returns Accounts
instead of entering to the credit or debit, respectively, of Purchases or Sales
Account The dual role of the Cash Book as a book of prime entry and an integral
part of the double-entry record
Returns, previously introduced in Lesson 2, page 11, should be treated with care by
candidates. Candidates’ examination answers often show confusion between inward and
outward returns, as well as about the relevant price to apply to the returned
goods.
78
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 79
Returns Day Books
Step 1
Aim: to recognize the credit note or copy credit note as the source document for
returns entries 1 Explain further the process of returns, both inwards and
outwards, and various possible reasons for the seller granting an allowance. The
reasons might include, for example:
● ● ● ●
the wrong goods were sent; the goods were damaged before arrival; the goods did not
match those described in catalogues, etc; some of the goods were faulty, for which
a part allowance may be made.
Stress that the seller grants, and the buyer receives, an allowance against the
relevant invoice, whether or not the goods are actually returned. 2 Explain that
when making the allowance, the seller will send a credit note to the buyer. A copy
of the credit note will be passed to the seller’s book-keeper and this serves as
the basis of the account entries. An example of a credit note is shown in Figure
12.1, which you can show on the overhead projector.
CREDIT NOTE Tempster & Fall 25 The Square Northbridge NT3 5WR
18 April Year 4
Credit note no 529 To: R Maundy 17 The Luttens Wednesbury WD4 3ET
Reference invoice no 5622 dated 7 April Year 4 Quantity Description Unit price £ 12
Total £ 120.00 15.00 105.00
10
Lockable containers
less trade discount at 121/2% Damaged in transit Figure 12.1 An example of a credit
note
79
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 80
Returns Day Books
Relate this credit note to the invoice shown on page 71 in Lesson 11: where trade
discount was deducted on the invoice, this must be deducted at the same rate on the
credit note.
Step 2
Aim: to appreciate the function of the Returns Inwards and Returns Outwards Day
Books 1 Show that, when the seller has agreed to make an allowance against the
return of goods, the procedure (in outline) is as illustrated in Figure 12.2.
Seller issues CREDIT NOTE Sent to COPY CREDIT NOTE
CUSTOMER RETURNS INWARDS DAY BOOK (of seller)
RETURNS OUTWARDS DAY BOOK (of customer) Figure 12.2 The procedure on the return of
goods
2 Explain that the functions of Returns Inwards and Returns Outwards Day Books are:
● ●
to record credit returns; to carry transaction detail instead of the ledger

accounts.
Effectively, the entries in the day books represent a reversal of purchase and
sales entries. 3 Point out that the Returns Day Books serve basically the same
purpose as the 2 day books considered in Lesson 11. They serve to reduce the detail
recorded in the ledger and allow staff to specialize in the work they do. In
addition, by having separate books for returns, more information is available than
if set-off entries (ones that have the effect of reducing the amount of a previous
entry) were made in either the Purchases Day Book or Sales Day Book. If the entries
were made in the other day books, there would be a danger of information on returns
being hidden. 4 Ask the students why a firm needs to have detailed records of
returns. The answer is that the record is important for dealing with individual
customers or suppliers. It is also important for a supplier knowing how to improve
the supply of goods or for a purchaser knowing which firms are the better
suppliers.
80
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 81
Returns Day Books
Step 3
Aim: to be able to prepare a Returns Inwards Day Book for a given period and to
post entries to the ledger accounts 1 Show the Returns Inwards Day Book of Tempster
& Fall, below, on the board or overhead projector.
RETURNS INWARDS DAY BOOK Year 4 11 Apr 18 Apr 26 Apr Amount £ A Trumble 528 87 R
Maundy 529 105 W Trent 530 42 To Returns Inwards Account 234 Credit note no
2 Record the following postings to ledger accounts, entry by entry:

SALES LEDGER A Trumble Year 4 2 Apr Sales £ 433 Year 4 11 Apr R Maundy Year 4 7 Apr
Sales £ 630 Year 4 18 Apr W Trent Year 4 20 Apr Sales £ 290 Year 4 26 Apr £ Returns
inwards 42 Returns inwards £ 105 £ Returns inwards 87
GENERAL LEDGER Returns Inwards Year 4 30 Apr Sundries £ 234
Note The 3 debit entries in the Sales Ledger Accounts were previously posted from
the Sales Day Book of Tempster & Fall, shown in Lesson 11, page 72. 3 Point out
that the double entry in the Tempster & Fall example is achieved by the debit of
£234 in the Returns Inwards Account being matched by the total of the 3 credit
entries in the customer accounts.
81
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 82
Returns Day Books
4 Figure 12.3 illustrates the part played by the Returns Inwards Day Book in the
account system. Show the figure on the overhead projector.
Seller issues CREDIT NOTE COPY CREDIT NOTE entered in RETURNS INWARDS DAY BOOK
Memorandum only daily postings end-of-month posting of total
Returns Inwards Account
GENERAL LEDGER SALES LEDGER
Customer (debtor) accounts
Figure 12.3 The returns inwards procedure
5 Explain that the double entry is made by means of: (a) prompt postings to the
customer accounts = credit; (b) end-of-month posting of the total to the Returns
Inwards Account = debit. 6 Hand out copies of, or show on the overhead projector,
exercise T/12.1 in the Appendix (page 237). Ask the students to work through the
exercise.
Step 4
Aim: to be able to prepare a Returns Outwards Day Book for a given period and to
post to the ledger accounts 1 Show the Returns Outwards Day Book of R Maundy
(below) on the board or overhead projector:
82
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 83
Returns Day Books
RETURNS OUTWARDS DAY BOOK Credit note no Year 4 9 Apr 18 Apr 24 Apr J Jolly 2178
Tempster & Fall 529 N Nathan 1165 To Returns Outwards Amount £ 127 105 38 Account
270
2 Record the following postings to ledger accounts, entry by entry:

PURCHASES LEDGER J Jolly Year 4 9 Apr Returns outwards £ 127 Tempster & Fall Year 4
18 Apr Returns outwards £ 105 Year 4 7 Apr N Nathan Year 4 24 Apr £ Returns
outwards 38 GENERAL LEDGER Returns Outwards Year 4 30 Apr Sundries £ 270 Purchases
£ 630
3 Point out that the 3 debit entries in the Purchases Ledger equal, in total, the
amount of the end-of-month credit entry in the Returns Outwards Account. Note The
credit entry in Tempster & Fall’s account was previously posted from the Purchases
Day Book of R Maundy, shown in Lesson 11 (page 76). The accounts of Jolly and
Nathan would, in practice, have credit entries for purchases previously made. 4
Figure 12.4 (overleaf) illustrates the part played by the Returns Outwards Day Book
in the account system. Show the figure on the overhead projector. 5 Explain that
the double entry is made by means of: (a) prompt postings to supplier accounts =
debit; (b) end-of-month posting of total to Returns Outwards Account = credit.
83
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 84
Returns Day Books
Appendix (page 237). Ask the students to work through it.
Buyer receives CREDIT NOTE entered in RETURNS OUTWARDS DAY BOOK daily postings
Memorandum only
end-of-month posting of total
Returns Outwards Account Supplier (creditor) accounts PURCHASES LEDGER
GENERAL LEDGER
Figure 12.4 The returns outwards procedure
Step 5
Aim: to be familiar with the use of the term ‘book of prime entry’ Explain that the
term ‘book of prime entry’ means the stage in the book-keeping system where a
transaction is recorded for the first time, before it is entered in the ledger.The
term includes the 4 day books already considered. The Cash Book can serve 2 roles.
Thus, for cash sales or cash purchases, it is a book of prime entry but, as part of
the ledger, it is also a component of the double-entry system.
84
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 85
Returns Day Books
Step 6
Aim: to reinforce learning and practice in regard to the use of day books 1 Display
exercise T/12.3 in the Appendix (page 238) on the overhead projector and work
through it with the class. The exercise involves preparation of all 4 day books,
together with the postings to the ledger accounts. Note When a question states
‘Returned goods to £26’, it can be assumed, unless stated otherwise, that the
seller has agreed to make an allowance. In the case of returned goods, when a trade
discount has previously been allowed at the purchases or sales stage, the amount of
the discount (or a due proportion, when only some of the goods are returned) must
be deducted at the ‘returns’ stage.This applies to the transactions on 8, 15, 19,
27, and 30 October Year 6 in exercise T/12.3. Solution to T/12.3
PURCHASES DAY BOOK Year 6 3 Oct 17 Oct 24 Oct R Varney T Langton R Varney To
Purchases Account SALES DAY BOOK Year 6 5 Oct 11 Oct 21 Oct K Petts J Beaver K
Petts To Sales Account RETURNS OUTWARDS DAY BOOK Year 6 8 Oct 27 Oct 30 Oct £ R
Varney T Langton R Varney To Returns Outwards Account RETURNS INWARDS DAY BOOK Year
6 15 Oct 19 Oct K Petts J Beaver To Returns Inwards Account £ 102 72 174 56 37 34
127 £ 357 448 544 1,349 £ 420 296 272 988
(continued)
85
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 86
Returns Day Books
PURCHASES LEDGER R Varney Year 6 8 Oct 30 Oct Returns outwards Returns outwards £
56 34 Year 6 3 Oct 24 Oct (Cr £602) Purchases Purchases £ 420 272
T Langton Year 6 27 Oct Returns outwards £ 37 Year 6 17 Oct (Cr £259) SALES LEDGER
K Petts Year 6 5 Oct 21 Oct Sales Sales £ 357 544 Year 6 15 Oct (Dr £799) J Beaver
Year 6 11 Oct Sales £ 448 Year 6 19 Oct (Dr £376) £ Returns inwards 72 Returns
inwards £ 102 Purchases £ 296
GENERAL LEDGER Purchases Year 6 31 Oct Sundries £ 988 Sales Year 6 31 Oct Returns
Outwards Year 6 31 Oct Returns Inwards Year 6 31 Oct Sundries £ 174 £ Sundries 127
Sundries £ 1,349
Check that the total creditor balances of £861 (£602 + £259) = purchases of £988
less returns outwards of £127, and that the total debtor balances of £1,175 (£799 +
£376) = sales of £1,349 less returns inwards of £174.
86
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 87
Returns Day Books
Appendix (page 239). Ask the students to work through it. This question is mainly a
test of knowledge about discounts; the entries are straightforward.The points below
might be helpful for the students. (a) The trade discount should be deducted in
each case from the list price and only the resulting net figure should be entered
in the day book. Cash discount is calculated on the net purchase or sales figure.1
It should be deducted from the net figure only if payment is made within the
required period.
Required payment date 17 Jan 26 Jan 27 Jan 5 Feb 2 Feb Payment date 30 Jan 18 Jan
22 Jan Cash discount No Yes Yes
B Stevens F Robins J New P Harper K Burton
(b) Traders allow cash discount to encourage prompt or early payment. 3 Hand out
copies of, or show on the overhead projector, exercise T/12.5 in the Appendix (page
240).Ask the students to work through it. In this question, a minimum level of
purchase is necessary to qualify for a trade discount. Common errors made by
candidates in dealing with returns Draw the following common errors to the
attention of the students: (a) confusion between returns inwards and returns
outwards; (b) failure to deduct trade discount when this had been allowed in the
original purchase or sale transaction; (c) day books shown in account form; (d)
transactions repeated, individually, in the General Ledger Account (ie in either
the Returns Outwards Account or the Returns Inwards Account). Note Advise the
students that they need to be aware of the alternative names for the 2 day books
dealt with in this lesson.The alternative names are:
Returns Inwards Day Book or Sales Returns Day Book Returns Outwards Day Book or
Purchases Returns Day Book
87
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 88
Lesson 13: Accruals and prepayments – expenses

Topic summary
●
The meaning of expense accruals and the necessary entries or adjustments in an

expense account for expense accrual The meaning of expense prepayment and the
necessary entries or adjustments in an expense account for expense prepayment
Adjustments for expense accruals and prepayments in final accounts

13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 The nature of an accrual End-of-period adjustments in
expense accounts for accruals The meaning of an expense prepayment End-of-period
adjustments in expense accounts for prepayments Adjustments for end-of-period
expense accruals and expense prepayments in the Profit & Loss Account and balance
sheet 20.7 The appropriate inclusion of prepayments and accruals under ‘current
assets’ and ‘amounts payable within 12 months’ respectively
Accruals and prepayments is a topic that book-keeping students often find

difficult. It is an important topic: first, because it may be the main subject of a
question; second, because it can also occur in other topics in an examination,
particularly in the adjustments of final accounts. Therefore explain accrual and
prepayments carefully, and make sure that the students have plenty of practice in
answering questions on this topic.
Step 1
Aim: to understand expense accruals and to be able to make the necessary entries or
adjustments in an expense account Expense accrual 1 Explain that the term ‘accrual’
refers to an amount that is owing. An expense accrual is an amount payable, in
respect of an account period, that remains unpaid at the end of
88
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 89
Accruals and prepayments – expenses
that period.The students’ aim is to relate the expenses to the periods (usually
years) in which the benefit is obtained from the expenditure, whether or not the
expense accounts have been paid.This may require making adjustments in the expense
accounts. 2 Illustrate accrual by showing the example below on the overhead
projector or board. Example Jacqui Tillot commenced in business at 1 January Year
3. She pays £500 rent ‘in arrears’ at the end of each quarter. At 31 December Year
3, the fourth quarter’s rent is still unpaid. Her Rent Account appears as follows:
Rent Year 3 31 Mar 30 Jun 30 Sep Bank Bank Bank £ 500 500 500
3 Ask the students what is wrong with this example. 4 The problem with the example
is that this Rent Account records the rent for only 3 quarters; the rent for the
fourth quarter will probably be paid early in Year 4. Left as it is, the account
gives a misleading picture for Year 3 because Jacqui has benefited from the use of
the premises for 4 quarters in that year. The true charge for the rent for Year 3
is:
4 quarters at £500 per quarter = £2,000
Jacqui Tillot’s Profit & Loss Account for Year 3 should show £2,000. The £500 in
respect of the fourth quarter should be treated as a liability. The account would
then appear as:
Rent Year 3 31 Mar 30 Jun 30 Sep 31 Dec £ Bank Bank Bank Balance c/d 500 500 500
500 2,000 Year 3 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 2,000
2,000 Year 4 1 Jan Balance b/d 500
5 Show the correct Rent Account (above) on the overhead projector or board. 6
Explain that the £2,000 credit entry is matched by a debit of that amount to the
Profit & Loss Account. The ‘correct’ charge for the year is thus made in the Profit
& Loss Account. The £500 balance carried down at 31 December Year 3 is matched by
the credit brought down at 1 January Year 4. This credit balance represents a
liability and appears as such in the balance sheet at 31 December Year 3.
89
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 90
7 Show the students that early in Year 4, Jacqui Tillot’s Rent Account might appear
as follows:
Rent Year 4 18 Jan Bank £ 500 Year 4 1 Jan Balance b/d £ 500
This illustrates that the overdue rent is paid on 18 January, which clears the
account. 8 It is essential that the students grasp the meaning of these account
entries. Review the key entries, which show that:
●
the transfer to the Profit & Loss Account is the due amount of rent for Year 3 –
not what has actually been paid. The transfer ensures that the ‘true’ charge is
made in the Profit & Loss Account; the credit balance (brought down) at 1 January
Year 4 represents the amount owing at that date, which would appear as a liability
in the balance sheet at 31 December Year 3; the debt is cleared early in Year 4.
9 Ask the students to work through the following exercise. Exercise Douglas Miller
commenced in business at 1 October Year 5. He paid monthly staff salaries in
arrears by cheque as follows:
Year 5 31 Oct 30 Nov £ 1,200 1,200
At 31 December Year 5, salaries for December amounting to £1,400 were unpaid.

Required Prepare the Salaries Account for the 3 months ending 31 December Year 5,
duly balanced at that date. Solution
Salaries Year 5 31 Oct Bank 30 Nov Bank 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 1,200 1,200 1,400
3,800 Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 3,800
3,800 Year 6 1 Jan Balance b/d 1,400
90
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 91
Step 2
Aim: to understand expense prepayment and to be able to make the necessary entries
in an expense account Expense prepayment 1 Explain that the term ‘expense
prepayment’ is a payment made in advance of the account period to which it refers.A
prepayment is the opposite of an accrual. However, the transfer to the Profit &
Loss Account in the expense account will still be credited. The difference is in
the balance, which is brought down as a debit balance, ie as an asset. 2 Illustrate
prepayment on the overhead projector or board with the following example. Example
James Jewell commenced in business at 1 January Year 7. He paid his rent quarterly
and in advance by cheque as follows:
Year 7 2 Jan 28 Mar 26 Jun 1 Oct 28 Dec £ 450 450 475 475 475
Required Show the Rent Account for Year 7, duly balanced at 31 December Year 7.
Solution
Rent Year 7 2 Jan 28 Mar 26 Jun 1 Oct 28 Dec £ Bank Bank Bank Bank Bank 450 450 475
475 475 2,325 Year 7 31 Dec Profit & loss 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 1,850 475
2,325
Year 8 1 Jan
Balance b/d
475
3 Review the example’s solution by drawing attention to the following points:

●
the transfer to the Profit & Loss Account includes 2 quarters’ rent at £450 (£900)
plus 2 quarters’ rent at £475 (£950), which results in a total transfer of £1,850;
the balance (£475) brought down at 1 January Year 8 will appear as an asset in the
balance sheet of James Jewell at 31 December Year 7.
91
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 92
4 Explain that, so far, the examples given have had no opening balance since they
illustrate the first year of trading. It is more usual to have an opening balance
as well as a closing balance. 5 Emphasize the rule about prepayment and accrual:
if a prepayment, the opening balance = Debit if an accrual, the opening balance =
Credit
Example From the following details, prepare John Sim’s Insurance Account for the
year ended 31 December Year 6. Balance the account at the year end, showing the
transfer to the Profit & Loss Account.
Year 6 1 Jan 23 Mar 29 Sep The balance on the account is £80, representing one
quarter’s insurance paid in advance The amount of £190 is paid by cheque, which
covers the insurance for the half-year ended 30 September Year 6 The amount of £210
is paid by cheque, which covers the insurance for the half-year ended 31 March Year
7
Solution
Insurance Year 6 1 Jan Balance b/d 23 Mar Bank 29 Sep Bank Year 7 1 Jan £ 80 190
210 480 105 Year 6 31 Dec Profit & loss 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 375 105 480
Balance b/d
Note The transfer to the Profit & Loss Account is made up of:
Jan–Mar Apr–Sep Oct–Dec £ 80 190 105 375
Explain that the remaining £105 has been paid in advance for the quarter ended 31
March Year 7 and is carried down as an asset (debit) balance.
92
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 93
6 Point out that expense accounts involving accrual, prepayment, or both (and
including an opening balance) are made up of 4 elements: (i) the amount either
accrued or prepaid at the beginning of the year; (ii) the amount paid during the
year; (iii) the amount to be transferred to the Profit & Loss Account, ie the
‘true’ cost for the year; (iv) the amount owing or prepaid at the end of the year.
These elements may be shown as a single example (see Figure 13.1).The example may
be described as a situation of initial accrual and closing prepayment. If 3 of the
elements are known, the fourth can be found by preparing an expense account based
on the relevant structure.The diagrams can be adapted to each situation. Each
situation will be determined by, first, the particular combination of opening and
closing balances, such as initial prepayment and closing accrual (see point 8
below); and, second, the respective amounts of the 4 elements as outlined in point
6 above.
Amount accrued b/d
Amount paid during year
Transfer to Profit & Loss Account
Amount prepaid c/d
Amount prepaid b/d Figure 13.1 A pictorial example of an expense account
7 Display the example on the overhead projector. The basic structure can be copied
on to a transparency and used as the master diagram, and sample figures can be
copied on to a number of other transparencies. Insert the figures progressively by
placing the transparencies on top of one another. 8 Ask the students to construct
simple diagrams (like the one above) that show the following situations, which
should all relate to expense: (a) (b) (c) (d) initial initial initial initial
accrual and closing accrual prepayment and closing prepayment prepayment and
closing accrual accrual and closing prepayment.
The students may find it helpful to practise constructing simple diagrams (in
double-entry account form) that position the various items.
93
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 94
Another form of prepayment 9 Explain that a prepayment could take the form of items
purchased for use in the business, which are separate from ordinary ‘purchases’
that are for resale. Purchases for use in the business might include stationery,
packing materials, or cleaning materials. Any stock of such items at the end of an
accounting period represents a form of prepayment. Draw the students’ attention to
the following points:
●
allowance must be made for stock at the end of an accounting period in the figure
charged to the Profit & Loss Account; the value placed on the stock must be carried
down as a balance on the expense account.
10 Illustrate the two points above with the following example. Example Stationery
bought in the year ended 31 December Year 3 cost £2,750. The stock of stationery
held at 31 December Year 3 is worth £250 Required Prepare the Stationery Account
for the year ended 31 December Year 3. Solution The amount used is £2,750 - £250 =
£2,500. This total is charged to the Profit & Loss Account and the amount remaining
(stock) is carried forward as an asset balance.
Stationery Year 3 Jan–Dec Sundries £ 2,750 2,750 Year 4 1 Jan Balance b/d 250 Year
3 31 Dec Profit and loss 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 2,500 250 2,750
Stress that any such balance should not be included with the stock-in-trade, but
should be shown separately as part of the item ‘prepaid expenses’. 11 Copy and hand
out or display the following exercise on the overhead projector. Ask the students
to work through it. Exercise Cleaning materials bought in the year ended 31
December Year 4 cost £870.The stock of cleaning materials at 31 December Year 4 is
worth £130. The cleaning materials bought in the year ended 31 December Year 5 cost
£920. The stock of cleaning materials at 31 December Year 5 is worth £150.
94
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 95
Required Show the Cleaning Materials Account for the 2 years ended 31 December Year
5. Note The stock at 31 December Year 4 (the closing stock) is also the stock at 1
January Year 5 (the opening stock). Solution
Cleaning Materials Year 4 Jan–Dec Sundries £ 870 870 Year 5 1 Jan Balance b/d Jan–
Dec Sundries Year 6 1 Jan 130 920 1,050 150 Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss 31 Dec
Balance c/d Year 4 31 Dec Profit & loss 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 740 130 870 900 150
1,050
Balance b/d
Note The charge to the Profit & Loss Account is calculated as:
Year 4 Year 5 Purchased stock at £870 less closing stock at £130 = £740 Opening
stock at £130 plus purchased stock at £920 = £1,050 less closing stock at £150 =
£900
12 Explain that the financial period or year of the firm does not always correspond
with that of the supplier of services. Adjustments to deal with this mismatch may
be necessary at the end of the accounting period. Example At 1 January Year 5, the
Insurance Account has a balance of £90 (Dr). The insurance premium was paid by
cheque £330 on 28 April Year 5 for the (insurance) year to 30 April Year 6.
Required Show the Insurance Account for the year ended 31 December Year 5, duly
balanced at that date. Note It can be concluded that the debit balance at 1 January
Year 5 relates to Insurance for the 4 months ended 30 April Year 5. The charge for
the remaining 8 months of the financial year is calculated as the due proportion of
the annual premium: £330 × 8/12 = £220. The remaining £110 is carried forward as a
prepayment. The charge to the Profit & Loss Account for insurance for Year 5 is:
£90 + £220 = £310.
95
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 96
Insurance Year 5 1 Jan 28 Apr Year 6 1 Jan £ Balance b/f Bank 90 330 420 110 Year 5
31 Dec Profit & loss 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 310 110 420
Balance b/d
13 Copy and hand out or display exercise T/13.1* in the Appendix (page 241) on the
overhead projector.Work through it with the class. Exercise T/13.1 concerns 3
expense accounts: 2 accounts (rent and insurance) have opening prepayment balances,
ie debits; the other (advertising) has an opening accrual balance, ie credit. You
should first calculate the amount of the charge for Year 4 for each expense. In
examination answers, if workings are shown clearly, marks can be awarded for what
is correct. It is clear that the monthly rent is £230 from January to September and
£250 from October to December.
Prepayment balance 1 Jan Yr 4 Payment 28 Feb 31 May 31 Aug 30 Sep = = = = = Period
of rent (Year 4) Jan Feb, Mar Apr, May, Jun Jul, Aug, Sep Oct
Thus the accrual of 2 months’ rent at 31 December Year 4 is 2 × £250 = £500. With
regard to insurance:
● ●
the initial prepayment of £65 covers the period 1 January to 31 August; the charge
for the period 1 September to 31 December Year 4 is the due part of the premium
paid on 31 August Year 4, ie £180 × 4/12 = £60; the other £120 is carried forward
as a prepayment for Year 5.
Therefore the total insurance charge for Year 4 is £65 + £60 = £125. The following
are major weaknesses shown by candidates in answers to exercise T/13.1 (an LCCIEB
past examination question):
●
failure to calculate correctly the charge to the Profit & Loss Account in the Rent
Account; charging an incorrect proportion to the Profit & Loss Account from the
insurance premium paid on 31 August Year 4; being confused about applying double-
entry rules, which is sometimes done inconsistently.
Draw the students’ attention to these weaknesses as appropriate.
96
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 97
Step 3
Aim: to be able to make necessary adjustments for accruals and prepayments in final
accounts 1 Remind the students that, at the financial year end, some expenses will
be paid in advance of the forthcoming year, while other expenses will be in
arrears, ie ‘accrued’. This often occurs because the firm’s financial year and the
payment year for the expense do not correspond. Adjustments may therefore be
necessary when preparing final accounts. 2 This topic can be developed with
reference to the final accounts of T Avis in Lesson 7 (page 40). 3 The following
adjustments are to be made in relation to the balances included in the trial
balance of T Avis at 31 December Year 6:
● ●
rent payable prepaid – £100 lighting and heating accrued – £60.
4 Trading and Profit & Loss Account The effect of the adjustments is limited to the
Profit & Loss Account, so only that need be shown on the overhead projector.
T Avis Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 6 Rent payable
(1,100 - 100) Office expenses Lighting and heating (610 + 60) Carriage outwards Net
profit £ 1,000 590 670 380 1,380 4,020 Gross profit Rent receivable £ 3,570 450
4,020
The effect has been to increase the net profit of the adjustments:
Net profit before adjustment add Rent payable prepaid less Lighting and heating
accrued Net profit after adjustment £ 1,340 100 1,440 60 1,380
97
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 98
5 Balance sheet To illustrate the remaining effects of the adjustments mentioned in

point 3 (page 97), show the following balance sheet on the board or overhead
projector:
T Avis Balance sheet at 31 December Year 6 Fixed Assets Fixtures and fittings Motor
vehicle Current Assets Stock Debtors Prepayment Cash at bank Cash in office £ £ £
900 1,600 2,500 2,450 1,170 100 1,230 70 5,020
less Amounts due within 1 year Creditors Accrual
1,750 60
1,810 3,210 5,710
Financed by: Capital – balance at 1 Jan Yr 6 add Net profit less Drawings
5,430 1,380 1,100 280 5,710
Note Period-end prepayments should be shown under current assets, and positioned
after ‘debtors’ but before ‘bank’. If there is more than one prepayment, these do
not have to be listed individually. It is advisable, however, to record the
separate amounts (in brackets) beside the total figures.Then candidates can be sure
of obtaining marks for the parts that are correct. 6 Point out that period-end
accruals should be shown under ‘amounts due within 1 year’. If there is more than
one accrual, the individual amounts should be shown. 7 Copy and hand out or display
exercises T/13.2, T/13.3, T/13.4 in the Appendix (pages 243–5). Ask the students to
work through them.
98
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 99
Lesson 14: Accruals and prepayments – income

Topic summary
● ●
The meaning of income accrual and the entries necessary in an Income Account The
meaning of income prepayment and the entries necessary in an Income Account The
preparation of an expense account that includes two areas of expense with
distinctive balances

13.7 13.8 13.9 13.10 13.11 The nature of income accrual End-of-period adjustments
in income accounts for income accrual The meaning of income prepayment End-of-
period adjustments in income accounts for income prepayment Adjustments for end-of-
period income accrual and income prepayment in the Profit & Loss Account and
balance sheet 13.12 The recording of 2 areas of expense within the one expense
account, with distinctive balances, eg the Rent & Rates Account 20.7 The
appropriate inclusion of prepayments and accruals under ‘current assets’ and
‘amounts payable within 12 months’ respectively
Many students experience difficulty with the concept of income accrual and
prepayment. Careful explanation of this topic is essential and students should be
encouraged to practise working through exercises.
Step 1
Aim: to understand income accrual and to be able to make the necessary entries in
an Income Account Income accrual 1 Explain that the topic of income accrual deals
with income such as rent receivable or commission rather than sales revenue.
Accrual means that income due for the financial year has not been received by the
end of the year. Outstanding sales revenue is allowed for by being shown as debit
balances on customer personal accounts.
99
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 100
Accruals and prepayments – income
2 Point out that as the income is earned in a given year, it should be included as
income for that year, even though payment has not yet been received. 3 Tell the
students that, in the Income Account, the accrual should be:
● ●
included in the transfer to the Profit & Loss Account; carried down as a debit
balance (representing an amount to be received early in the next period).
Explain to them also that, in the balance sheet, the accrual should be shown as a
current asset. 4 Illustrate income accrual by displaying the following example on
the overhead projector or board. Example Edward Smith is a trader and, in addition
to his normal business income from the sale of goods, he receives a commission on
services he carries out. During the year ended 31 December Year 6, he received
commission as follows:
Year 6 30 Mar 2 Jul 4 Oct Relating to the quarter ended 31 March Year 6 30 June
Year 6 30 September Year 6 £ 512 470 630
The amount due, but not yet received, for the quarter ended 31 December Year 6 was
£580. The account for Year 6 should appear as follows:
Commission Receivable Year 6 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 2,192 Year 6 30 Mar 2 Jul 4 Oct
31 Dec £ Bank Bank Bank Balance c/d 512 470 630 580 2,192
2,192 Year 7 1 Jan
Balance b/d
580
5 Explain that although accrued income should be included with the current assets
in the balance sheet, it is common practice in business to include it with debtors.
In an examination answer, however, it is safer to show accrued income as a distinct
item otherwise a mark may be lost. 6 Copy and hand out or show the following
exercise on the overhead projector or board. Ask the students to work through it.
100
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 101
Exercise Hilary Truelove receives rent from subletting business premises. During
the year ended 31 December Year 5, she received the following payments:
Year 5 3 Apr 29 Jun 11 Oct Payment received by cheque for quarter ending 31 March
Year 5 30 June Year 5 30 September Year 5 £ 650 650 675
The amount due for the quarter ended 31 December Year 5 was received on 14 January
Year 6. Required Show the Rent Receivable Account for the year ended 31 December
Year 5, complete with year-end balancing and with as many entries as possible for
Year 6. Solution
Rent Receivable Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 2,650 Year 5 3 Apr 29 Jun 11 Oct 31
Dec £ Bank Bank Bank Balance c/d 650 650 675 675 2,650
2,650 Year 6 1 Jan Year 6 14 Jan
Balance b/d
675
Bank
675
Step 2
Aim: to understand income prepayment and to be able to make the necessary entries
in an Income Account Income prepayment 1 Point out that in the case of income
prepayment the income has been received in advance of the next financial year. 2
Tell the students that, in the Income Account at the end of the financial year, the
advance payment should be:
● ●
deducted from the amount of income for the year; carried down as a credit balance.
101
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 102
Explain to them also that, in the balance sheet, the prepayment should be shown
under ‘amounts due within 1 year’. 3 Illustrate income prepayment by showing the
following example on the overhead projector or board. Example Rent is received on
sublet premises as follows:
Year 7 12 Jan 6 Apr 4 Jul 29 Sep 21 Dec Payment for quarter ending 31 March Year 7
30 June Year 7 30 September Year 7 31 December Year 7 31 March Year 8 £ 250 250 250
250 250
The The The The
unadjusted income for Year 7 is 5 × £250 = £1,250. adjusted or true income is 4 ×

£250 = £1,000. fifth payment really relates to Year 8 and should be carried forward
into that year. account for Year 7 should appear as follows:
Rent Receivable
Year 7 31 Dec Profit & loss 31 Dec Balance c/d
£ 1,000 250
Year 7 12 Jan 6 Apr 4 Jul 29 Sep 21 Dec Year 8 1 Jan
£ Bank Bank Bank Bank Bank 250 250 250 250 250 1,250 250
1,250 Balance b/d
4 Explain that the £250 received in advance should be shown in the balance sheet
under ‘amounts due within 1 year’ and described as ‘rent received in advance’. 5
Copy and hand out or show on the overhead projector exercises T/14.1 and T/14.2 in
the Appendix (pages 247–8). Ask the students to work through them.
Step 3
Aim: to be able to prepare an account that includes two areas of expense, with
distinctive balances 1 Explain that, as candidates, the students might be required
to prepare an expense account that includes two areas of expense, eg Rent & Rates
Account.
102
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 103
2 Illustrate this type of acccount by showing the example below on the overhead
projector or board. Example At 1 January Year 4, £780 of rates were prepaid and
£2,700 of rent payable was accrued. During Year 4, the following payments were
made:
Rent Rates £ 8,700 3,120
At 31 December Year 4, £780 of rates were prepaid and £3,200 of rent was owing. The
following amounts were due to be paid for Year 4:
Rent Rates £ 9,200 3,120
The combined Rent & Rates Account would appear as follows:

Rent & Rates Year 4 1 Jan Balance b/d (rates) Jan–Dec Bank (rent) Bank (rates) 31
Dec Balance c/d (rent) £ 780 8,700 3,120 3,200 15,800 Year 4 1 Jan 31 Dec Balance
b/d (rent) Profit & loss rent rates Balance c/d (rates) £ 2,700 9,200 3,120 780
15,800
31 Dec
Year 5 1 Jan
Balance b/d (rates)
780
Year 5 1 Jan
Balance b/d (rent)
3,200
3 Emphasize strongly that different categories of expense should be combined only

if the examination questions require it. 4 Copy and hand out or show exercise
T/14.3* in the Appendix (page 249) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to
work through it. T/14.3* is a question requiring the preparation of a combined type
of expense account. 5 Common errors made by candidates concerning income and
expense accounts Candidates sometimes: (a) lack a grasp of the rules of double
entry, eg payments credited to the expense account and income debited to the Rent
Receivable Account; (b) adjust actual individual payments or income in some
instances, instead of apportioning expense or income at the end of the period;
103
pages 60-104
15/3/03
12:21 pm
Page 104
(c) make entries inconsistently, often within the same account, eg payments are
partly debited or partly credited within an Insurance Account; income is partly
debited or partly credited within the Rent Receivable Account; (d) make adjustments
according to the calendar year instead of according to the firm’s financial year;
(e) overbalance accounts – each time an entry is made (in extreme cases); (f )
interpret ‘show transfers to the Profit & Loss Account’ as meaning that a Profit &
Loss Account is required rather than the transfer of entries within each income or
expense account. 6 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/14.4, T/14.5 and T/14.6 in
the Appendix (pages 250–3) on the overhead projector.Ask the students to work
through them. Point out that they should look out for differences between the
financial year and the calendar year, particularly when working through T/14.5.
104
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 105
Lesson 15: Depreciation of fixed assets

Topic summary
● ●
● ● ●
The need to allow for fixed asset depreciation The calculation of depreciation by
the straight line method and the reducing balance method The purpose, meaning, and
significance of a ‘provision’ The account entries for fixed asset depreciation
Suitable entries in the Profit & Loss Account and balance sheet in respect of fixed
asset depreciation The calculation of depreciation on fixed assets bought or sold
during the course of a financial year The account entries for the disposal of a
depreciated fixed asset

14.1 The nature of depreciation of fixed assets and the need for making provision
in the accounts (with the awareness that this is not the putting by of cash for
replacement) 14.2 The basis of the straight line (or fixed instalment) method of
depreciation 14.3 Calculation of the amount of annual depreciation and the effect
on the book value of a fixed asset, using the straight line method 14.4 The
accounting entries for straight line method depreciation, using a Provision for
Depreciation Account 14.5 The basis of the reducing balance (or diminishing
balance) method of depreciation 14.6 Calculation of the amount of annual
depreciation and the effect on the book value of a fixed asset, using the reducing
balance method 14.7 The accounting entries for the reducing balance method of
depreciation, using a Provision for Depreciation Account 14.8 A comparison, through
basic calculation, between use of the straight line method and use of the reducing
balance method 14.9 The accounting entries relating to the sale or scrapping of a
depreciated fixed asset, using an Asset Disposal Account 14.10 The entries in the
Profit & Loss Account and balance sheet relating to fixed assets and their
depreciation 14.11 Significance of the terms aggregate depreciation and net book
value and their use in the balance sheet 20.6 The effective presentation of fixed
assets to show, if appropriate: cost, aggregate depreciation, net book value
105
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 106
Depreciation of fixed assets
Depreciation of fixed assets, like accruals and prepayments, is a topic that might
occur as a question in its own right or as an element in a question, particularly
on final accounts.The First Level Syllabus is concerned with two depreciation
methods only: (i) the straight line method (ii) the reducing balance method. This
lesson is important also in that it introduces the concept of the provision.
Failure to understand a provision is often a major cause of failure in the
examination.
Step 1
Aim: to understand the need to allow for fixed asset depreciation
1 Explain why and how the value of fixed assets usually falls over a period of
time; that their fall in value may be due to:
● ●
being used (‘wear and tear’) the availability of newer superior or more efficient
assets, eg the newer assets might run more cheaply or use less fuel.
2 Point out that if fixed assets never fall in value and could, at a later date, be
sold for the price they were purchased at, there would be no ‘usage cost’ of owning
the fixed assets (although interest could not be earned on the money paid for the
fixed asset, effectively a cost). They do, however, generally fall in value, so
that by failing to take account of this:
● ●
profit would be overstated fixed assets in the balance sheet would be overstated in
value.
3 Explain that if fixed assets are hired, a charge for hiring would appear in the
Profit & Loss Account. However, for assets that are owned, depreciation is charged,
much like a charge for owning the assets. 4 Discuss the varying ways in which
depreciation applies, eg leases on premises as opposed to ownership of motor
vehicles. 5 Emphasize that depreciation, as recorded, is the estimate of the fall
in value of fixed assets over a period of time. Illustrate this point with the
following example.
106
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 107
Example
original cost of asset £15,000 less estimated disposal or sale amount £1,500 =
amount of depreciation £13,500
6 Explain that the calculation for depreciation is necessarily an estimate because:

●
of the problem of estimating the ‘working life’ of an asset, ie the number of years
of use the amount that will be received on eventual sale of the asset, is being
estimated, perhaps several years ahead
7 Point out that, often, simplified methods of measurement are used, therefore any
resulting figure is necessarily an estimate. For example, a motor vehicle that is
purchased on 1 January Year 4 for £9,000, for use in a business, is estimated to
have a working life of 4 years. At the end of that time it is believed that it will
be sold for £1,000.The fall in value – the cost of ownership and use of the asset –
is: £9,000 - £1,000 = £8,000. This will have to be ‘written down’ over the period
of 4 years until it is sold.
Step 2
Aim: to be able to calculate depreciation by the straight line method and the
reducing balance method 1 Point out that the LCCIEB First Level Book-keeping is
concerned with only two methods of calculating depreciation: the straight line and
reducing balance methods. 2 The straight line method This is also known as the
‘fixed instalment method’.The calculation follows from what was stated in Step 1
about estimation, point 6 above. It involves:
● ● ● ●
an estimate of the number of years of use (working life); an estimate of the

eventual sale (disposal) value; the original cost less sale value = total amount to
be written down; total amount to be written down = annual depreciation charge.
number of years
Illustrate the straight line method by showing the examples below on the overhead
projector or board.
107
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 108
Example (a) A machine, bought for £20,000, is estimated to have a working life of 6
years and to have a sale value at the end of the 6 years of £2,000. The annual
depreciation charge would be:
£20,000 - £2,000 = £3,000 6
Note The same result would be obtained by depreciating the total amount to be
written down (£18,000) by 162/3% each year. Example (b) Calculate the annual
depreciation charge in each of the following cases: (i) a motor vehicle, bought for
£10,500, is estimated to have a working life of 5 years and to have a resale value
at the end of that time of £1,500; (ii) a machine bought for £32,000 is estimated
to have a working life of 8 years and at the end of that time to have a zero resale
value. Solution (i) £10,500 - £1,500 = £1,800 per annum 5 (ii) There is no resale
value (sometimes termed ‘scrap value’) and so the original cost is the total amount
to be written down. £32,000 = £4,000 per annum 8 3 Reducing balance method This
method is also known as the ‘diminishing balance method’. Explain that a fixed
percentage is written off the reduced balance each year. The reduced balance is the
cost of the asset less depreciation to date. Illustrate this method by showing the
example below on the overhead projector or board. Example A machine is bought for
£15,000 and depreciation is to be provided at 40%. The calculations for the first 4
years would be as follows:
108
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 109
Cost of machine Year 1 depreciation (40%) Year 2 depreciation (40% of £9,000) Year
3 depreciation (40% of £5,400) Year 4 depreciation (40% of £3,240)
£ 15,000 6,000 9,000 3,600 5,400 2,160 3,240 1,296 1,944
Note that the amounts charged as depreciation fall quite strikingly. Depreciation
in Year 1 is nearly three times that of Year 3 and over 4.6 times that of Year 4. 4
Ask the students what advantage the reducing balance method has compared with the
straight line method. The answer should be that, in the early years, when repair
bills should be low, the depreciation charges are greatest. In later years, when
repair bills are likely to rise, depreciation charges are low. This has the effect
of smoothing out charges over the life of the asset. With the straight line method,
depreciation charges are relatively high in later years when repair bills increase.
Step 3
Aim: to have a basic understanding of the purpose, meaning, and significance of a
‘provision’ 1 Much of the problem experienced by candidates in answering questions
involving depreciation result from a failure to understand the purpose and
significance of a ‘provision’. Explain that a provision is an amount built up by
charges in the Profit & Loss Account to provide for a fall in value of certain
assets. A provision for depreciation is one example. Such a provision builds up
when a charge is made year by year for the estimated depreciation. 2 Point out that
any provision is not like a fund of cash: the charge(s) in the Profit & Loss
Account creating or increasing a provision do not ensure that cash is conserved for
the eventual replacement of the asset. However, creating a provision has the
advantage of:
●
helping to ensure that profits are not overstated, ie provision takes into account
the cost of owning and using fixed assets; helping to ensure that the values of
fixed assets are cautiously stated as the provision is deducted in the balance
sheet from the amount of the fixed asset.
109
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 110
A provision is usually shown in the balance sheet as a deduction from the amount of
the relevant asset. 3 Describe how the net book value of an asset at a particular
balance sheet date is not the amount for which it could be sold at that date, ie
depreciation calculations are based upon the business as a ‘going concern’. It is
assumed that the business will continue to operate for at least the period over
which depreciation provisions are being built up. If, however, the future of a
business is in considerable doubt, the net realizable value of assets might fall
below the net book value, so requiring extra depreciation to be charged to the
Profit & Loss Account.
Step 4
Aim: to be able to make book-keeping entries relating to fixed asset depreciation 1
Tell the students that it is usual to show the depreciation of fixed assets as
follows:
● ●
the fixed asset account is kept at cost, without any adjustment for depreciation; a
separate provision for depreciation account is maintained that accumulates the
amount of depreciation year by year.
2 Emphasize that the LCCIEB requires this method to be used in examination answers.
Far too many candidates make the mistake of recording depreciation in both the
Asset Account and the Provision Account. In doing so, they break the rules of
double entry. 3 Illustrate the correct method of showing the depreciation of fixed
assets by displaying the example below on the overhead projector or board. Example
A machine, purchased by cheque for £80,000 on 1 January Year 1, is expected to have
a working life of 4 years, after which it will be sold for £5,000. The financial
year ends on 31 December. The straight line method is calculated as follows:
£80,000 - £5,000 = £75,000 = £18,750 per annum 4 4
The reducing balance method is based in this instance on a 50% write down. Note Any
questions requiring the use of this method will state the percentage rate of the
write down to be applied.
110
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 111
The calculation for the reducing balance method is as follows:

Cost of machine Year 1 depreciation Year 2 depreciation Year 3 depreciation Year 4
depreciation £ 80,000 40,000 40,000 20,000 20,000 10,000 10,000 5,000 5,000
The accounts for each of the methods appears as follows:

Machine Year 1 1 Jan Bank £ 80,000
Straight line method Provision for depreciation on machine Year 1 31 Dec Balance
c/d Year 2 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 18,750 Year 1 31 Dec Profit & loss* Year 2 1 Jan
Balance b/d 31 Dec Profit & loss* £ 18,750
37,500 37,500
18,750 18,750 37,500
Year 3 31 Dec Balance c/d
56,250 56,250
Year 3 1 Jan Balance b/d 31 Dec Profit & loss* Year 4 1 Jan Balance b/d 31 Dec
Profit & loss*
37,500 18,750 56,250 56,250 18,750
* or Depreciation expense
111
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 112
Reducing balance method Provision for depreciation on machine Year 1 31 Dec Balance
c/d Year 2 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 40,000 Year 1 31 Dec Profit & loss* Year 2 1 Jan
Balance b/d 31 Dec Profit & loss* £ 40,000
60,000 60,000
40,000 20,000 60,000
Year 3 31 Dec Balance c/d
70,000 70,000
Year 3 1 Jan Balance b/d 31 Dec Profit & loss* Year 4 1 Jan Balance b/d 31 Dec
Profit & loss*
60,000 10,000 70,000 70,000 5,000
Note In reality, a firm would use only one method.The two are shown here for
comparison. An examination question might require both methods to be shown. The
provision accounts are left open in Year 4 to deal with the sale of the machine.
This feature will be dealt with in Step 7. 4 Draw the students’ attention to the
key points illustrated by the example:
●
● ●
the Asset Account has a debit balance (unchanged in amount and the same for the two
depreciation methods); provision for depreciation has a credit balance; the
provision for depreciation builds up (accumulates) the amounts of depreciation year
by year; the difference between the asset balance and the provision balance is the
‘book value’ or ‘net book value’ of the asset.
5 Common error made by candidates concerning depreciation The common error is to

show the provision for depreciation with a debit balance, which is fundamentally
wrong. Emphasize that a provision account always has a credit balance. 6 Underline
the fact that a provision exists because the charge to the Profit & Loss Account
creating it (or increasing it) lessens the net profit and thus lessens the addition
to the Capital Account. Instead of being part of Capital Account (Cr balance), the
amount is shown as a provision (Cr balance).
112
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 113
Step 5
Aim: to be able to make suitable entries in the Profit & Loss Account and balance
sheet in respect of fixed asset depreciation 1 Point out that the provision
accounts, shown in Step 4 in the details column, state ‘Profit & loss’ or
‘Depreciation expense’.The use of a Depreciation Expense Account to carry the
debits of asset write down is standard practice. The account serves as a collection
point for depreciation charges and is especially useful when a business has a
number of depreciation provision accounts. At the end of the year the total of the
Depreciation Expense Account is transferred to the Profit & Loss Account and
therefore only one entry has to appear there. The use of a Depreciation Expense
Account is therefore an indirect way of achieving the same result as a direct debit
to the Profit & Loss Account. The LCCIEB will accept either entry. First Level
candidates may find the further stage in the process (ie recording depreciation in
a Depreciation Expense Account) somewhat confusing. 2 The Profit & Loss Account
Creating or increasing a depreciation provision results in the double entry
appearing as follows:
●
the Profit & Loss Account is debited (or the Depreciation Expense Account for later
transfer to the Profit & Loss Account); the Provision for Depreciation Account is
credited.
3 Balance sheet Usually leads to each fixed asset (or class of fixed asset) being
shown at cost less total depreciation to date, resulting in the net book value. 4
Show the following typical layout of fixed assets in a balance sheet on the
overhead projector or board.
Fixed Assets Premises Fixtures and fittings Motor vehicles Cost £ 120,000 9,500
17,800 147,300 Accumulated depreciation £ 4,200 5,200 9,400 Net book value £
120,000 5,300 12,600 137,900
The total of the net book value, £137,900, is to be added in due course to the
other assets in the balance sheet.
113
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 114
5 Copy and hand out or display the following exercise on the overhead projector.Ask
the students to work through the exercise. Exercise On 1 April Year 5, L Johns
purchased a machine for £30,000. He decided to depreciate it at the rate of 40%
using the reducing balance method. He keeps a provision for depreciation account.
Required Show, as an extract, how the asset would appear in the balance sheet of L
Johns at 31 March Year 8. Solution
L Johns Balance sheet (extract) at 31 March Year 8 Fixed Assets Machine Cost £
30,000 Accumulated depreciation £ 23,520 Net book value £ 6,480
Step 6
Aim: to be able to calculate depreciation on fixed assets bought or sold during the
course of a financial year 1 Explain that sometimes fixed assets are either bought
or sold during the course of a financial year and the instructions given in the
examination question need to be followed with care.The question will state what to
do when a fixed asset is purchased part of the way through a firm’s financial year.
There are various ways in which candidates can answer the question, including: (a)
charging depreciation for the part of the year the asset is owned, eg if the
financial year ends on 31 December, then for a fixed-asset purchase on 1 May the
charge for the year to 31 December would be 8/12 of the annual amount of
depreciation; (b) charging a full year’s depreciation for assets purchased in the
first half of the financial year and charging a half year’s depreciation for those
purchased in the second half of the financial year; (c) providing depreciation for
the whole year on assets held at the end of the year.
114
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 115
The following example illustrates the calculation of depreciation on fixed assets

purchased during the course of the financial year. Example The financial year of
Sands & Co ends on 31 December. During Year 1, the following fixed assets were
purchased:
Date of purchase Fixed Assets Motor vehicle Fixtures and fittings 5 February Year 1
11 September Year 1 Cost £ 9,000 6,000
The assets are depreciated using the following bases:

Motor vehicles Fixtures and fittings 40% per annum, using the reducing balance
method 20% per annum, using the straight line method
The policy for assets purchased during the year is as follows:

●
a full year’s depreciation is charged for assets purchased in the first half of the
financial year; a half year’s depreciation is charged for assets purchased in the
second half of the financial year.
Required In a statement, show the amount of the depreciation on each asset for each
of the years ended 31 December Year 1 and 31 December Year 2. Solution
Depreciation Year 1 Year 2 Motor vehicles £ 3,600 2,160 Fixtures and fittings £ 600
1,200
2 For asset sales during a financial year there are also different ways of dealing
with depreciation, eg: (a) ignoring part periods and calculating a full period’s
depreciation only on those assets owned at the end of the period.Thus, assets sold
during the period will have no provision for depreciation made for that last
period; whereas assets bought during the period will have a full period’s
depreciation provision; (b) calculating the depreciation provision according to the
proportion of time the asset was owned (probably calculated to the nearest whole
month); (c) making no provision for depreciation on assets sold in the first half
of the financial year and half the annual provision for assets sold in the second
half of the year. 3 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/15.4 and T/15.5 in the
Appendix (page 255–6) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through
the exercises.
115
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 116
Step 7
Aim: to be able to make book-keeping entries concerning the disposal of a
depreciated fixed asset 1 Identify the 3 elements involved in the sale of a fixed
asset, which are
● ● ●
the original cost of the asset the depreciation provided to date the sale proceeds
Explain that there is often a ‘profit’ or a ‘loss’ arising out of the sale: the
original calculations regarding the working life and sales value of the asset were
only estimates. 2 Review the book-keeping entries regarding the disposal of an
asset.The entries are: the original cost of the asset (i) Dr Disposals Account (ii)
Cr Fixed Asset Account ● the depreciation provided to date (i) Dr Provision for
Depreciation Account (ii) Cr Disposals Account ● the sale proceeds (i) Dr Bank/Cash
Account (ii) Cr Disposals Account ● loss on sale (i) Dr Profit & Loss Account (ii)
Cr Disposals Account ● profit on sale (i) Dr Disposals Account (ii) Cr Profit &
Loss Account.
●
3 Illustrate the calculation and account entries for an asset sold at a profit by
displaying the example below on the overhead projector.The data are taken from the
example in Step 4 on page 111.The straight line method has been used to calculate
depreciation. Example The machine is sold on 31 December Year 3 for £27,200. At
that date, the Provision for Depreciation Account has a credit balance of £56,250.
116
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 117
The calculation for profit/loss appears as follows:

Cost of machine less Provision for depreciation to 31 Dec Yr 3 Sale price Profit on
sale £ 80,000 56,250 23,750 27,200 3,450
The book-keeping entries, excluding bank account, are:

Machine Year 1 1 Jan Year 2 1 Jan Year 3 1 Jan Bank £ 80,000 Year 1 31 Dec Balance
c/d Year 2 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 80,000
Balance b/d
80,000
80,000
Balance b/d
80,000
Year 3 31 Dec Disposal of machine 80,000
Provision for depreciation of machine Year 3 31 Dec Disposal of machine £ 56,250

56,250 Disposal of machine Year 3 31 Dec Machine 31 Dec Profit & loss (profit on
sale) £ 80,000 Year 3 31 Dec Prov for deprec’n – machine 31 Dec Bank £ 56,250
27,200 83,450 Year 3 1 Jan Balance b/d 31 Dec Profit & loss* £ 37,500 18,750 56,250
3,450 83,450
Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 3 Profit on sale of
machine
£ 3,450
4 Illustrate the calculation and account entries for an asset sold at a loss by
displaying the example overleaf on the overhead projector.
117
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 118
Example Using the same data and the same disposal date, this time the machine is
sold for £22,100. The calculation for profit/loss is as follows:
Cost of machine less provision for depreciation to 31 December Year 3 Sale price
Loss on sale Machine Year 1 1 Jan Year 2 1 Jan Year 3 1 Jan Bank £ 80,000 Year 1 31
Dec Balance c/d Year 2 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 80,000 £ 80,000 56,250 23,750 22,100
1,650
Balance b/d
80,000
80,000
Balance b/d
80,000
Year 3 31 Dec Disposal of machine 80,000
Provision for depreciation of machine Year 3 £ 31 Dec Disposal of machine 56,250

56,250 Disposal of Machine Year 3 31 Dec Machine £ 80,000 Year 3 31 Dec Prov for
deprec’n – machine 31 Dec Bank 31 Dec Profit & loss (loss on sale) £ 56,250 22,100
1,650 80,000 Year 3 1 Jan Balance b/d 31 Dec Profit & loss* £ 37,500 18,750 56,250
80,000 Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 3 £ Loss on sale
of machine 1,650
In the examples above, a full year’s depreciation has been charged in the year of
disposal, ie Year 3.
118
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 119
5 Point out that the so-called profit or loss on disposal is only a depreciation
adjustment. In practice, it is usual for profit or loss to be added to
depreciation, which in the first instance of the disposal, would be:
£18,750 less £3,450 = £15,300 for the year
If the policy is to charge no depreciation in the year of disposal, then (again in

the first instance) the calculation would be:
Cost less Accumulated depreciation Net book value Sale of the machine
Loss/depreciation £ 80,000 37,500 42,500 27,200 15,300
6 Explain that loss is really another word for depreciation. 7 Common errors made
by candidates regarding depreciation Draw the students’ attention to the errors
they should avoid, such as: (a) recording depreciation to the credit of both the
Provision Account and the Asset Account, breaking the rules of double entry; (b)
using the Provision Account as merely a calculating stage: ie entering the amount
to the credit of the Provision Account, and then transferring it to the Asset
Account (Dr provision, Cr asset); (c) debiting depreciation to the Provision
Account; (d) failing to accumulate the depreciation from year to year; (e) failing
to follow the instruction regarding the due proportion of annual depreciation where
the asset is purchased during the year; (f) wording account entries poorly. 8 Copy
and hand out or show exercise T/15.6 in the Appendix (page 256) on the overhead
projector. Ask the students to work through the exercise.
119
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 120
Lesson 16: Bad debts and provision for doubtful debts

Topic summary
● ● ● ●
The meaning of ‘bad debts’ and the effect of writing off a debt Recording the
writing off of customer debts The function of the provision for doubtful debts and
the creation of such a provision The increase or decrease of the provision for
doubtful debts and making book-keeping entries accordingly The effect on debtors of
a doubtful debts provision (i) within a balance sheet or (ii) as a balance sheet
extract Making specific provision for the non-recovery of certain debts as well as
a general provision for doubtful debts Recording the recovery of debts previously
written off

15.1 The process of debts becoming irrecoverable and being written off, in whole or
in part 15.2 The accounting entries for writing off individual debtor balances, in
whole or in part, using a Bad Debts Account 15.3 The end-of-period transfer of
total debts written off from the Bad Debts Account to the Profit & Loss Account
15.4 The reasons for the creating of, and subsequent adjusting of, a provision for
doubtful debts 15.5 Given certain data, the creating of a provision for doubtful
debts and the adjusting of it, as necessary, for subsequent accounting periods 15.6
The entries in the Profit & Loss Account and balance sheet relating to the
provision for doubtful debts 15.7 Making specific provision for certain bad debts
as well as general provision for doubtful debts 15.8 The accounting entries
relating to the recovery of debts previously written off 15.8.1 if recovered within
the same financial period in which the debt was written off; and/or 15.8.2 if
recovered after the year of writing off
120
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 121
Bad debts and provision for doubtful debts
Writing off amounts due from debtors (‘bad debts’), in whole or in part, is not
usually a great problem for LCCIEB book-keeping students. They can have more
difficulty with creating and/or adjusting a provision for doubtful debts, which
arises largely from the failure to grasp the concept of the provision. Careful
explanation and illustration is therefore required. The recovery of debts that have
been written off is often neglected in book-keeping studies and yet it is a
relatively straightforward exercise.
Step 1
Aim: to appreciate the meaning of ‘bad debts’ and the effect of writing off a debt
1 Explain that a bad debt is an amount that a firm is unable, for a number of
reasons, to collect from a customer; it is a debt beyond any hope of recovery. The
amount is written off in the firm’s accounts as being ‘irrecoverable’. Sometimes,
however, a debtor will pay part of the amount owing and the balance of the debt
will be written off. 2 Tell the students that the aim in writing off bad debts is
to ensure that the figure shown in the balance sheet for debtors represents the
total of collectable debts, ie that the figure for debtors is not overstated. 3
Point out that writing debts off involves charging the amount written off in the
Profit & Loss Account.The effect of charging this amount is to reduce the net
profit for the year in question.As the net profit is reduced, so the addition to
capital is lessened, which is matched by the reduction in the total of the current
assets. 4 Outline the fact that the frequency with which debts are written off may
vary. For example, they may be written off:
● ● ●
at intervals throughout the year yearly (e.g. as part of a year-end review) as the
need arises.
Step 2
Aim: to be able to record the writing off of customer debts 1 Explain that the role
of the Bad Debts Account is to be a collection point for amounts written off, which
are later transferred in total to the Profit & Loss Account.
121
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 122
2 Illustrate the role of the Bad Debts Account by displaying the example below on
the overhead projector or board. Example T Jackson and J Grand are debtors whose
balances are outstanding. In the annual review of debtors on 31 December Year 7,
the following accounts are shown in the Sales Ledger:
T Jackson Year 7 1 Jan Balance £ 530 Year 7 13 Apr J Grand Year 7 11 Mar Sales £
415 Bank £ 90
T Jackson has managed to pay part of the amount due, but it is now clear that he
will be unable to pay the balance due.The decision is made to write off this
balance and the whole amount due from J Grand.
T Jackson Year 7 1 Jan Balance £ 530 530 J Grand Year 7 11 Mar Sales £ 415 Year 7
31 Dec Bad debts Bad Debts Year 7 31 Dec T Jackson 31 Dec J Grand £ 440 415 855
Year 7 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 855 855 £ 415 Year 7 13 Apr Bank 31 Dec Bad debts £
90 440 530
Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 7 Bad debts £ 855
122
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 123
3 Set out the rule below for bad debt entries on the overhead projector or board:
(a) Dr Bad Debts Account Cr Individual debtor accounts (or ‘debtors’ if only a
total figure is stated in the question) (b) Dr Profit & Loss Account Cr Bad Debts
Account 4 Copy and hand out or show the exercise below on the overhead projector or
board.Ask the students to work through the exercise. Exercise During the year ended
31 December Year 4,W Glossop had written off debts due from customers that amounted
to £1,306. On 31 December Year 4, he received a cheque for £73 from J Hinge in part
payment of the amount of £295 that was due. W Glossop believed that it was now
unlikely that any further payment would be received from this debtor and that the
balance of the debt should be written off. Required Show the following accounts for
the year ended 31 December Year 4: (i) J Hinge (ii) Bad Debts (iii) Profit & Loss –
as an extract. Solution
J Hinge Year 4 1 Jan Balance £ 295 295 Bad debts Year 4 Jan–Dec Sundries 31 Dec J
Hinge £ 1,306 222 1,528 Year 4 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 1,528 1,528 Year 4 31 Dec
Bank 31 Dec Bad debts £ 73 222 295
Profit & Loss Account (extract) for the year ended 31 December Year 4 Bad debts £
1,528
123
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 124
Step 3
Aim: to be able to understand the function of the provision for doubtful debts and
to be able to create such a provision 1 Explain the practice of firms allowing for
a certain number of debts becoming ‘bad’, i.e. irrecoverable. It is never certain
which debtors will be unable to pay, but experience makes it possible to calculate
the total amount of debts that will need to be written off approximately, eg 2% of
total debtor balances. A provision for doubtful debts is then created and
maintained. Draw attention to the term ‘doubtful’.The calculation is really a broad
estimate and is not the result of a close analysis of the position of individual
debtors. 2 Distinguish the provision for doubtful debts from writing off bad
debts.The procedure for creating a provision for doubtful debts is as follows: (a)
a gross debtors’ figure is calculated by totalling the balances on individual
debtor accounts; (b) individual debtor balances may have to be written off; (c) the
provision for doubtful debts is calculated on the total of remaining debtor
balances. 3 Illustrate this procedure with the following on the overhead projector
or board.
Gross debtors (at 31 Dec Yr 5) less Bad debts written off less Provision for
doubtful debts at 3% £ 38,360 960 37,400 1,122 36,278
The account entries appear as follows:

Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 5 Provision for doubtful
debts £ 1,122 Provision for Doubtful Debts Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 1,122
124
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 125
4 Explain that, like any provision, a provision for doubtful debts remains in the
books until it is changed.The provision is likely, in practice, to be reviewed
annually because:
●
if the provision is kept at a certain percentage of debtors, the amount of the

provision has to be adjusted as the total of debtors changes; it may be considered
desirable from time to time to change the percentage rate.
5 Copy and hand out or display the following exercise on the overhead projector.Ask
the students to work through the exercise. Exercise At 31 December Year 3, Ellen
Tamworth has debtors totalling £25,130. During Year 3, she has written off £540 of
debts. She decides to write off a further £330 of debts. In addition, she creates a
provision for doubtful debts of 4% of the remaining debtors. Required Show the
following accounts for the year ended 31 December Year 3: (i) Bad Debts (ii)
Provision for Doubtful Debts (iii) Profit & Loss – as an extract. Solution Working:
£25,130 - £330 = £24,800 4% of £24,800 = £992
Bad debts Year 3 Jan–Dec Debtors 31 Dec Debtors £ 540 330 870 Year 3 31 Dec Profit
& loss £ 870 870
Provision for Doubtful Debts Year 3 31 Dec Profit & loss Profit & Loss Account for
the year ended 31 December Year 3 Bad debts Provision for doubtful debts £ 870 992
£ 992
Note Point out that the £540 was written off ‘during Year 3’ and is therefore
removed before 31 December Year 3.Thus, only £330 has to be deducted from debtors.
125
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 126
Step 4
Aim: to be able to increase or decrease the provision for doubtful debts and make
book-keeping entries accordingly 1 Make it clear that the provision, once created,
carries on as it is in the book until it is either increased or reduced. 2 Increase
in the provision Continuing with the last example, it is supposed that, at 31
December Year 4, the amount of debtors after writing off bad debts is £29,400. The
4% rate is unchanged. The calculation is:
4% of £29,400 less Amount of existing provision Increase in provision £ 1,176 992
184
The book-keeping entries are:

Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 4 £ Increase in provision
for doubtful debts 184 Provision for Doubtful Debts Year 3 31 Dec Balance c/d Year
4 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 992 Year 3 31 Dec Profit & loss Year 4 1 Jan Balance b/d 31
Dec Profit & loss £ 992
1,176 1,176
992 184 1,176
Year 5 1 Jan
Balance b/d
1,176
Stress that only the increase in the provision is debited to the Profit & Loss
Account. 3 Decrease in the provision It is supposed that, at 31 December Year 5,
the amount of debtors after writing off bad debts is £26,800.The 4% rate is
unchanged.
126
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 127
The calculation is:

4% of £26,800 less Amount of existing provision Decrease in the provision £ 1,072
1,176 104
The book-keeping entries are:

Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 5 £ Reduction in
provision for doubtful debts Provision for Doubtful Debts Year 3 31 Dec Balance c/d
Year 4 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 992 Year 3 31 Dec Profit & loss Year 4 1 Jan Balance
b/d 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 992 104
1,176 1,176
992 184 1,176
104 1,072 1,176
Year 5 1 Jan
Balance b/d
1,176 1,176
Year 6 1 Jan
Balance b/d
1,072
Step 5
Aim: to be able to show the effect on debtors of a doubtful debts provision (i)
within a balance sheet or (ii) as a balance sheet extract 1 Explain that the
provision, although having a credit balance, is always deducted from debtors in the
balance sheet. 2 Relate this deduction to the deduction of a provision for
depreciation from the relevant fixed asset.The principle of obtaining a figure net
of the provision is the same.
127
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 128
3 Illustrate a doubtful debts provision within a balance sheet on the overhead

projector with the following:
Current Assets Debtors less Provision for doubtful debts £ 36,800 1,840 £ 34,960
4 Inform the students that if a balance sheet extract is required, then a suitable
heading should be included, eg:
F Lucas Balance sheet (extract) at 30 September Year 6 Current Assets Debtors less
Provision for doubtful debts £ 41,300 1,239 £ 40,061
5 Copy and hand out or display the following exercise on the overhead projector or
board. Ask the students to work through the exercise. With reference to Step 4,
show each of the following as balance sheet extracts: (a) The debtors at 31
December Year 4, following the example on page 125. (b) The debtors at 31 December
Year 5, following the examples on pages 126 and 127. Solutions (a)
Balance sheet (extract) at 31 December Year 4 Current Assets Debtors less Provision
for doubtful debts £ 29,400 1,176 £ 28,224
(b)
Balance sheet (extract) at 31 December Year 5 Current Assets Debtors less Provision
for doubtful debts £ 26,800 1,072 £ 25,728
6 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/16.1 and T16.2 in the Appendix (pages 257–
8). Ask the students to work through them.
128
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 129
Step 6
Aim: to be able to make specific provision for the non-recovery of certain debts as
well as a general provision for doubtful debts 1 Explain that some firms create 2
categories of debt provision. (a) After writing off known bad debts, a specific
provision is made on a few debtors when there is a high chance that they will
become bad debts. They are not yet known as bad debts but information suggests they
might become so. The full amount of each high-risk debt might be included in the
provision. (b) A general provision is made on the remaining balance of debtors. The
provisions dealt with in Steps 3 and 4 are known as general provisions. The
calculation involving both a specific provision and a general provision might be as
follows:
Gross amount of debtors less Bad debts written off less Specific provision (ie the
total of certain high-risk debts) less general provision at 3% £ 32,970 870 32,100
1,100 31,000 930 30,070
The balance sheet is shown as follows:

Current Assets Debtors less Provision for bad and doubtful debts £ 32,100 2,030
30,070
2 Copy and hand out or show exercise T/16.3* in the Appendix (page 259) on the
Step 7
Aim: to be able to record the recovery of debts previously written off 1 Debts that
have been written off are sometimes recovered, ie the debtor may, after all, be
able to pay part of the original debt. Point out that it is necessary to
distinguish between:
129
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 130
(a) debts recovered within the same year as the debt was written off; (b) recovery
after the year the debts were written off. 2 Explain that if the debts are
recovered within the same financial year as the debt was written off, the entries
would be: Dr debtor Cr bad debts Dr cash/bank Cr debtor which reinstates the debt
(or part of it) on the debtor’s account which effectively cancels the previous
write off which clears the account
Taking the year as a whole, the debtor is a late payer rather than a bad debtor.The
credit on the Bad Debts Account reduces the balance of bad debts to the sum of
debts written off and still not received by the year end. 3 If recovered after the
year of write off, demonstrate that the entries would be: Dr Cr Dr Cr debtor bad
debts recovered cash/bank debtor
At the end of the year of recovery, the balance on the bad debts recovered account
would be transferred to the Profit & Loss Account: Dr Cr bad debts recovered Profit
& Loss Account
4 Advise the students that the LCCIEB believes that, on recovery of a debt (or part
of it) that was previously written off, the amount should be reinstated in the
account of the debtor.The debtor has made the effort to clear the debt, even if
later than anticipated, and this should be recognized in the account. In any case,
decisions about granting credit in the future should not be decided by account
entries alone. 5 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/16.4 and T/16.5 in the
Appendix (pages 260–1) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through
them. 6 Common errors made by candidates relating to bad debts and provision for
doubtful debts Draw the students attention to common errors, which include: (a) not
appreciating that the purpose of the Bad Debts Account is to store the amounts of
debt written off during a trading period; (b) wrongly transferring each amount
written off to the Profit & Loss Account; it is the period total that should be
transferred; (c) failure to grasp the meaning of the provision: an especially
common mistake is to enter the whole of the latest provision amount in the Profit &
Loss Account, regardless of any existing provision;
130
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 131
(d) the provision account showing a debit balance; (e) incorrect calculation of the
provision, which should be a percentage of the debtor balance after any further bad
debts have been written off; (f ) taking bad debts that have been written off to
the provision for doubtful debts account (see the Extended Syllabus, paragraph
15.3) ‘Bad Debts Account should not be written off against the Provision Account’;
(g) poor wording of entries in Bad Debts Account and Provision for Doubtful Debts
Account.
131
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 132
Lesson 17: Bank reconciliation statements

Topic summary
● ● ● ● ● ●
The need for reconciling the Cash Book with the bank statement Updating the Cash
Book from the bank statement Preparing a bank reconciliation statement The meaning
and effects of a cheque being dishonoured Reconciling the Cash Book and bank
statement where a bank overdraft is involved Drafting a bank statement from the
data provided

8.13 8.14 8.15 9.1 9.2 9.3 The periodic updating of the Cash Book from the bank
statement The possible reasons for the dishonouring of a cheque and its signficance
The book-keeping entries arising on the dishonouring of a cheque The need for
periodic reconciliation between the balance in the bank statement and the balance
in the Cash Book (Bank Current Account) The updating of the Cash Book (bank column)
with as yet non-recorded items which are revealed in the bank statement
Understanding of and use of the terms: 9.3.1 unpresented cheques (or cheques drawn,
not yet presented) 9.3.2 cheques paid in (lodged ), not yet credited The
preparation of a statement reconciling the balance in the Cash Book (Bank Current
Account) with that shown in the bank statement, in respect of items still causing a
difference From data provided, the drafting of a bank statement
9.4
9.5
Knowledge of bank facilities and practice with the Cash Book (see Lessons 9 and 10)
are an essential basis for answering questions relating to bank reconciliation.
Candidates are often unaware of the purpose of the bank statement and of what
should be done by the customer on receiving it from the bank. Only when the Cash
Book has been brought up to date should bank reconciliation begin formally.
132
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 133
Bank reconciliation statements
Step 1
Aim: to understand the need for reconciling the Cash Book with the bank statement 1
Outline the records used to keep the bank and account holder up to date with a bank
account:
● ●
the Cash Book: the firm’s record of transactions with the bank; the bank statement:
issued by the bank at regular intervals, eg monthly or weekly, it is the bank’s
record of the firm’s account.
2 Explain that differences will arise between the two records, due to:
●
timing differences, eg a cheque being paid into the account that the bank has not
yet recorded; the Cash Book not yet showing items that appear on the bank
statement, ie the account holder can update the Cash Book by including items from
the bank statement.
3 Explain and discuss with students the main timing differences. Link the
discussion with Lesson 9, focusing in particular on how cheque clearance can affect
timing. For example:
●
a drawn cheque may not be recorded on a bank statement until 2-3 days after it has
been drawn; the time delay is increased if the payee delays paying the cheque into
his or her bank account; amounts paid into the bank may not yet be included in a
current bank statement because the amounts were paid into a different branch of the
account holder’s bank; alternatively, they may have been paid in late in the
banking day and crediting could be further delayed if the next day(s) are not
working days.
Step 2
Aim: to be able to update the Cash Book from the bank statement 1 Tell the students
that when the bank statement has been received, they should: (a) compare the Cash
Book with the bank statement, tick ( ) off the items that correspond (which might
include most items in both sets of record), and look carefully for any mistake made
by the bank or the customer; (b) look for any items in the bank statement that
should be entered in the Cash Book before it is (finally) balanced; the items
relate to transactions that have already taken place and that should no longer
cause any difference between the two records; such items include:
133
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 134
● ●
various means of bank transfer, eg credit transfer, standing order, direct debit –
for either the payment or receipt of money (see Lesson 9,‘Other payment methods’,
page 53); bank charges for operating the account or interest charged for a bank
overdraft; interest paid by the bank to the account holder, which applies to some
bank accounts if the account balance is over a certain minimum figure.
2 Illustrate how to update the Cash Book from the bank statement by showing the
example below on the overhead projector or board. Example It is supposed that Alec
Simmons’ Cash Book for August Year 4 appears as follows:
CASH BOOK (bank columns) Year 4 1 Aug 3 Aug 9 Aug 19 Aug 30 Aug £ Balance b/d J
Slade T Medway N Thorne L Nathan 790 125 363 95 156 1,529 338 Year 4 5 Aug 14 Aug
26 Aug 29 Aug 31 Aug £ R Clapton (316) W Rigden (317) B Tallon (318) P Gaul (319)
Balance c/d 280 406 190 315 338 1,529
31 Aug Balance b/d
The above represents only a preliminary (first) balancing. An alternative practice

is not to record a balance at this stage, but to keep a separate note of the
preliminary balance. Alec Simmons receives the following bank statement:
Year 4 1 5 7 8 10 11 17 20 22 27 Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Balance
b/f J Slade Credit transfer (C/T): K Jordan R Clapton (214316) Direct debit (D/D):
Midshire Gas Co T Medway W Rigden (214317) N Thorne Credit transfer (C/T): Wilders
Ltd Standing order (S/O): DVS Publications Balance c/f Paid out £ Paid in £ 125 96
280 62 363 406 95 310 174 Balance £ 790 Cr 915 Cr 1,011 Cr 731 Cr 669 1,032 626 721
1,031 Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
31 Aug
857 Cr 857 Cr
Note Show that the reconciliation of the 2 balances should be carried out by:
●
ticking ( ) the items that appear in both the Cash Book and bank statement and
watching out for errors;
134
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 135
● ●
entering the unticked items on the bank statement into the Cash Book and checking
for errors; balancing the Cash Book finally to provide the updated balance; using
the unticked items in the Cash Book to prepare the bank reconciliation statement.
The updated Cash Book appears as follows:

CASH BOOK (bank columns) Year 4 1 Aug 3 Aug 9 Aug 19 Aug 30 Aug £ Balance b/d J
Slade T Medway N Thorne L Nathan 790 125 363 95 156 1,529 338 96 310 744 508 Year 4
5 Aug 14 Aug 26 Aug 29 Aug 31 Aug £ R Clapton (316) W Rigden (317) B Tallon (318) P
Gaul (319) Balance c/d 280 406 190 315 338 1,529 62 174 508 744
31 Aug Balance b/d 31 Aug K Jordan – credit transfer (C/T) 31 Aug Wilders Ltd –
credit transfer (C/T) 1 Sep Balance b/d
31 Aug Midshire Gas Co – direct debit (D/D) 31 Aug DVS Publications – standing
order (S/O) 31 Aug Balance c/d
Note Point out that the items obtained from the bank statement are entered at the
last date of the period, ie 31 August Year 4.
Step 3
Aim: to be able to prepare a bank reconciliation statement 1 Emphasize that only
the final stage of reconciliation is recorded in the bank reconciliation statement,
ie after the Cash Book has been updated. 2 Display the reconciliation for the data
regarding Alec Simmons shown overleaf on the overhead projector or board.
135
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 136
Alec Simmons Bank reconciliation statement at 31 August Year 4 £ Balance as per

Cash Book add Unpresented cheques: B Tallon (318) P Gaul (319) less Cheque paid in,
not yet credited: L Nathan Balance as per bank statement £ 508 190 315
505 1,013 156 857
3 An alternative way of showing the reconciliation would be to start with the bank
statement balance. If so, the items appear in reverse order to those shown above.
The bank reconciliation statement for Alec Simmons would then be:
Alec Simmons Bank reconciliation statement at 31 August Year 4 £ Balance as per
bank statement add Cheque paid in, not yet credited: L Nathan less Unpresented
cheques: B Tallon (318) P Gaul (319) Balance as per Cash Book £ 857 156 1,013 190
315
505 508
4 Ensure that the students are able to prepare a bank reconciliation statement in
both ways: starting either with Cash Book balance or the bank statement balance. 5
Common errors made by candidates concerning bank reconciliation statements Draw the
students’ attention to the common errors, which are:
● ●
failing to update the Cash Book before preparing the bank reconciliation statement;
attempting the wrong ‘reconciliation’, eg attempting to reconcile the closing bank
statement balance with the opening Cash Book balance, which is sometimes done even
though the students have updated the Cash Book.
6 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/17.1, T/17.2, and T/17.3 in the Appendix
(pages 262–5) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through them.
136
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 137
Step 4
Aim: to understand the meaning and effects of a cheque being dishonoured 1 Explain
that the meaning and significance of a cheque being dishonoured is that the
drawer’s bank refuses to accept (ie to honour) the cheque. 2 Tell the students that
a cheque may be dishonoured because: (a) the cheque has been prepared incorrectly,
which may not have been noticed before; (b) the cheque may have become ‘stale’ (ie
too old to be accepted by the paying bank); a cheque is usually considered stale 6
months after the date on the cheque, although practice varies; (c) the drawer has
insufficient funds in his or her bank account. 3 Illustrate the effects of a cheque
being dishonoured by showing the example below on the overhead projector or board.
Example It is supposed that on 9 July Year 8 a cheque for £3,000 is received from J
Fargo in settlement of a debt.
Bank Year 8 9 Jul J Fargo £ 3,000 J Fargo Year 8 1 Jul Balance b/f £ 3,000 Year 8 9
Jul Bank £ 3,000
On 14 July Year 8, the bank returns the cheque marked ‘refer to drawer’. The bank
account needs to be adjusted and the debt reinstated on Fargo’s account.
Bank Year 8 9 Jul J Fargo £ 3,000 Year 8 14 Jul £ J Fargo – cheque dishonoured
3,000
J Fargo Year 8 1 Jul 14 Jul Balance b/f Bank – cheque dishonoured £ 3,000 3,000
Year 8 9 Jul Bank £ 3,000
J Fargo is once again a debtor.
137
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 138
Step 5
Aim: to be able to reconcile the Cash Book and bank statement where a bank
overdraft is involved Candidates tend to find reconciling the Cash Book and bank
statement more difficult if the procedure involves a bank overdraft. The measure of
the problem depends upon the stage at which the overdraft arises. If, for instance,
the Cash Book opens with an overdraft, this overdraft might be turned into a
positive balance once the Cash Book is updated. The positive balance removes the
difficulty of dealing with the overdraft. An overdraft is problematic, however,
when it exists at the stage of formal reconciliation, ie after the Cash Book has
been updated. Example The example that follows can be used to show the students how
to produce a bank reconciliation statement when an overdraft is involved.The
following Cash Book has been updated from the bank statement at the bottom of the
page.
CASH BOOK Year 6 3 Apr 18 Apr 29 Apr 30 Apr 30 Apr 30 Apr £ J Drake L Trim A Simes
Balance c/d T Lofter – credit transfer (C/T) Balance c/d 57 203 59 694 1,013 68 796
864 1 May Balance b/d Bank statement Year 6 1 4 11 13 18 23 30 Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr
Apr Apr Paid out £ Balance b/f J Drake Credit transfer (C/T): T Lofter R Upton:
217572 96 L Trim Direct debit (D/D): Uplands Services 142 Bank interest 28 Paid in
£ 57 68 203 Balance £ 715 O/D 658 O/D 590 O/D 686 O/D 483 O/D 625 O/D 653 O/D Year
6 1 Apr 9 Apr 17 Apr 25 Apr 30 Apr 30 Apr 30 Apr £ Balance b/f R Upton (572) T
Gunge (573) P Skate (574) Balance b/d Uplands Services – direct debit (D/D) Bank
interest 715 96 115 87 1,013 694 142 28 864 796
138
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 139
Note ‘O/D’ on the bank statement means that the account is overdrawn. In this case,
not only is the opening Cash Book balance overdrawn but an overdraft also exists at
the stage of formal reconciliation. The bank reconciliation statement might be
shown as follows:
Bank reconciliation statement at 30 April Year 6 £ Balance per Cash Book –
overdraft add Unpresented cheques: T Gunge (573) P Skate (574) less Cheque paid in,
not credited: A Simes Balance per bank statement – overdraft £ (796)
115 87
202 (594) 59 (653)
Note The addition is serving to reduce the overdraft and any deduction serving to
increase it. Alternatively, the bank reconciliation statement might be shown as
follows:
Bank reconciliation statement at 30 April Year 6 £ Balance per Cash Book –
overdraft add Cheque paid in, not yet credited: A Simes less Unpresented cheques: T
Gunge (573) P Skate (574) Balance per bank statement – overdraft £ 796 59 855 202
653
115 87
Step 6
Aim: to be able to draft a bank statement from the data provided 1 Display the
following example of a bank statement on the overhead projector.
139
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 140
Westshires Bank 12 High Street Crampton Shropshire CR3 5TU Mr Roger Dolby Account
No. 75643 Date Year 4 1 3 5 8 12 14 17 20 22 May May May May May May May May May
Particulars Balance b/f R Tenby: 200136 C/T – R Beale L Scales D/D – Selsby
Services L Germaine: 200137 C/T – F Renoir L Pinter S/O – Loxby Publications A
Croft: 200138 L Scales Interest Paid out £ 92.00 405.00 392.00 125.50 33.00 253.50
141.00 174.00 207.00 367.00 32.00 Paid in £ Balance £ 716.00 O/D 808.00 O/D 403.00
O/D 11.00 O/D 136.50 O/D 169.50 O/D 84.00 Cr 225.00 Cr 51.00 156.00 211.00 179.00
Cr O/D Cr Cr
24 May 27 May 31 May
Key: C/T credit transfer D/D direct debit O/D overdrawn S/O standing order
2 Point out that bank statements are prepared in running balance format, so that
the ‘balance’ column is automatically updated as each transaction is entered. 3
Explain that bank statements have become more ‘user friendly’ in recent years.Thus
the headings of Dr and Cr above the amount columns – confusing for many bank
customers – have been replaced by some banks by ‘paid out’ and ‘paid in’. 4 Make it
clear that, in the ‘particulars’ column, it is now common for cheques drawn on the
bank to be entered on the bank statement by cheque number only. In examination
questions, there will be sufficient information provided to link the items. In bank
reconciliation statements, it is desirable to include names and cheque numbers (if
applicable) wherever possible. 5 Copy and hand out or show exercise T/17.4* in the
Appendix (page 265) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through the
exercise.
140
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 141
Lesson 18: Petty Cash Book – imprest system

Topic summary
● ● ● ●
The purpose and uses of petty cash The principle and working of the imprest system
Recording the opening imprest and individual payments in the Petty Cash Book
Totalling and balancing the Petty Cash Book and recording the reimbursement of the
float at the period end The purpose of the petty-cash analysis columns and making
double-entry postings to the ledger Responding to questions involving (i)
variations within the Petty Cash Book and (ii) the part played by the Petty Cash
Book in the double-entry system Preparing a Cash Book with analysis of expenditure

8.16 The use of simple columnar analysis (of expenditure) within the Cash Book 10.1
The possible need for one (or more) Petty Cash Book(s) as subsidiary to the main
Cash Book 10.2 Petty cash as a system for effecting minor disbursements 10.3 The
use of sequentially numbered vouchers and their authorization for payment 10.4 The
practice of setting a limit to the amount allowed in reimbursement per
claim/voucher 10.5 The basis of the imprest system; periodic reimbursement of the
(controlled) float 10.6 The recording of incidental receipts of money into petty
cash, other than the periodic reimbursement of the float 10.7 The balancing of the
Petty Cash Book and the book-keeping entries relating to the reimbursement of the
float, as well as in respect of any adjustment of the float 10.8 The analysis of
petty cash outlay, the totalling of the analysis columns, and the posting of these
totals as required to appropriate ledger accounts 10.9 The dual role of the Petty
Cash Book as a book of prime entry and an integral part of the double-entry record
The students should understand the function of the Petty Cash Book, its
relationship to the Cash Book itself, its part in the double-entry system, and the
practical way in which it is operated (including the imprest system).The means of
analysing expenditure that is used in a Petty Cash Book can be applied also to the
main Cash Book, which is covered in Step 7.
141
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 142
Petty Cash Book – imprest system
Step 1
Aim: to appreciate the purpose and uses of petty cash 1 The students will often
have had experience of using petty cash, even if only as a user or beneficiary.
Draw upon their experience when discussing the purpose and uses of petty cash.
Emphasize that in numerous cases many of the disbursements will be to members of
staff, ie reimbursing them for payments already made on behalf of their employer,
such as travelling expenses. A limit, such as a maximum of £50, may be placed on
the amount of any individual payment from petty cash. 2 Point out that the Petty
Cash Book is a means of lessening the load on the main Cash Book.The Petty Cash
Book is concerned with minor payments, while the Cash Book is for recording
payments above a certain figure and for entering the receipt of money. 3 Explain
that, by having analysis columns (where petty cash outlay is classified) beside the
total payments column, expenditure can be recorded under different headings, such
as postage or ‘travelling’. This analysis can provide useful information and can be
used to save time and effort when making account entries. The role of analysis
columns is explained in greater detail in Step 5 (page 146).
Step 2
Aim: to understand the principle and working of the imprest system 1 Explain the
basis of the imprest system. The petty cashier starts each week or month with a
certain amount of money, called the imprest amount or ‘float’. As payments are made
during the week or month, the amount of money decreases. At the end of the period
(or the beginning of the next one), the fund of cash is made up by the main cashier
to the imprest amount. 2 Illustrate the principle and working of the imprest system
by showing the example below on the overhead projector or board. Example
Amount of cash at first made available to the petty cashier Amount spent during the
month Amount left in cash ‘float’ at month-end Amount reimbursed from main Cash
Book Float topped up ready for next month £ 100 79 21 79 100
142
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 143
3 Point out that if at any time the size of the float proves to be insufficient for
the demands placed upon it, the imprest amount may be increased, either temporarily
or permanently. 4 Acquaint the students with the use of vouchers to control
payments from petty cash. An employee must present a voucher with a request for
petty cash. Each voucher must be signed by someone in authority to formally
authorize the payment. The vouchers should be numbered and filed in numerical
order.Vouchers help to make an imprest system of petty cash self-regulating:
the total of voucher amounts for the period + the balance of cash = the float
Step 3
Aim: to be able to record the opening imprest and individual payments in the petty
cash book 1 Show that for first setting up the float (with reference to the figures
in Step 2) the book-keeping entries would be:
Dr Petty cash Cr Cash/bank £100 £100
Entries for reimbursing (or topping up) the float in the example in Step 2 would
be:
Dr Petty cash Cr Cash/bank £79 £79
2 Illustrate how to record individual petty-cash payments by displaying the

information below and the analysed Petty Cash Book that follows it. Example
Year 4 1 Nov The cashier gives £200 in cash to the petty cashier as the starting
imprest of petty cash Voucher no £ Postage 1 3.70 Cleaning expenses 2 14.60
Stationery 3 5.30 T Fallon – travel expenses 4 11.80 Cleaning expenses 5 16.20
Payment of the amount owing to J Wilds in the Purchases Ledger 6 31.10 Postage 7
4.50 Stationery 8 9.40 Refund of overpayment by debtor, W Costain 9 40.30 R Ward –
travel expenses 10 13.90
4 6 9 11 14 18
Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov
21 Nov 24 Nov 27 Nov 29 Nov
143
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 144
The Petty Cash Book appears as follows:

PETTY CASH BOOK
Receipts Date Details £ Year 4 200.00 1 Nov Cash 4 Nov Postage 6 Nov Cleaning
expenses 9 Nov Stationery 11 Nov T Fallon – travel 14 Nov Cleaning expenses 18 Nov
J Wilds (creditor) 21 Nov Postage 24 Nov Stationery 27 Nov W Costain (debtor) 29
Nov R Ward – travel Voucher no Total £ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3.70 14.60 5.30 11.80
16.20 31.10 4.50 9.40 40.30 13.90 13.90 16.20 31.10 4.50 9.40 40.30 Travel Postage
Stationery Cleaning expenses Ledger £ £ £ £ £ 3.70 14.60 5.30 11.80
3 Inform the students that columns headed from ‘postage’ to ‘ledger’ are the
analysis columns. 4 Emphasize the following points about the Petty Cash Book: (a)
the ‘date’ and ‘details’ columns are shared by both Dr and Cr sides; (b) the
‘receipts’ column represents the debit side and the ‘total’ column the credit side;
(c) the voucher numbers are entered in sequence, in this instance starting with
‘1’; from the beginning of December Year 4, the voucher numbers will start with
‘11’; (d) each item is entered in the ‘total’ column and in the appropriate
analysis column; (e) the column headed ‘ledger’ is used for other ledger postings
not covered by the other analysis columns.
Step 4
Aim: to be able to total and balance the Petty Cash Book and record reimbursement
of the float at the period end 1 Show that the columns are totalled at the end of
the period. The total of the ‘total’ column should agree with the total of all the
analysis columns.
144
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 145
In line with common practice, reimbursement of money paid out takes place on the
first day of the next period. This time, the cashier hands a cheque to the petty
cashier for the amount of the reimbursement. 2 Display the Petty Cash Book as it
would now look on the overhead projector or board.
PETTY CASH BOOK
Receipts Date Details £ Year 4 200.00 1 Nov Cash 4 Nov Postage 6 Nov Cleaning
expenses 9 Nov Stationery 11 Nov T Fallon – travel 14 Nov Cleaning expenses 18 Nov
J Wilds (creditor) 21 Nov Postage 24 Nov Stationery 27 Nov W Costain (debtor) 29
Nov R Ward – travel Voucher no Total £ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Travel Postage
Stationery Cleaning expenses Ledger £ £ £ £ £
3.70 3.70 14.60 5.30 11.80 16.20 31.10 4.50 4.50 9.40 40.30 13.90 150.80 8.20 14.70
30.80 13.90 25.70 71.40 16.20 31.10 9.40 40.30 14.60 5.30 11.80
30 Nov Balance c/d 200.00 49.20 150.80 1 Dec Balance b/d 1 Dec Bank
49.20 200.00
3 Show the students that, if reimbursements were made on the last day of the
period, the previous balancing would be laid out as follows:
Receipts £ Date Total £ 150.80 150.80 350.80 200.00 1 Dec Balance b/d 30 Nov Bank
30 Nov Balance c/d 200.00 350.80
145
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 146
Note The total of all the analysis columns should equal the total of the ‘total’
column. 4 Display the Cash Book entries relating to the period-end reimbursements
of petty cash shown above.
CASH BOOK Year 4 1 Nov Petty cash 1 Dec Petty cash Cash Bank £ £ 200.00 150.80
Step 5
Aim: to appreciate the purpose of the petty-cash analysis columns and be able to
make the double-entry postings to the ledger 1 Explain the existence of analysis
columns in the Petty Cash Book means that the expenditure is grouped (classified)
under different expenditure headings. If the classifications were not made, then
each item would have to be posted individually to an expense account to ensure
double entry. The credit entry in petty cash, remember, merely records a fall in
the cash float. 2 Point out that the analysis columns serve as collection points,
which are similar, in principle, to the discount columns in the Cash Book. At the
end of each period, the total of each analysis column is posted to an appropriate
expense account in the General Ledger.An exception to this procedure is the total
of the ‘ledger’ column: it is not posted anywhere. Instead, the individual entries
are posted directly to the relevant personal accounts as soon as possible. The
existence of that total, however, is useful for crosschecking the column totals. 3
Demonstrate that the analysis columns are posted to the ledger accounts as follows:
GENERAL LEDGER Postage Year 4 30 Nov Petty cash £ 8.20
146
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 147
Stationery Year 4 30 Nov Petty cash £ 14.70 Cleaning Year 4 30 Nov Petty cash £
30.80 Travel expenses Year 4 30 Nov Petty cash £ 25.70 PURCHASES LEDGER J Wilds
Year 4 18 Nov Petty cash £ 31.10 Year 4 1 Nov Balance b/f £ 31.10
SALES LEDGER W Costain Year 4 27 Nov Petty cash £ 40.30 Year 4 1 Nov Balance b/f £
40.30
Step 6
Aim: to be able to respond to questions involving (i) variations within the Petty
Cash Book; and (ii) the part played by the Petty Cash Book in the double-entry
system 1 Sometimes, employees of the firm or members of the public pay small sums
of money to use the services of the firm, ie there is income from sources other
than sales. An example of this type of transaction might be paying for the private
use of the telephone. This money might be paid into petty cash, temporarily
increasing the float. One way of recording this transaction is to enter it in the
receipts column (debit) with suitable explanation in the details column.When
totalling and balancing at the end of the period, an allowance must be made for
this amount.The appropriate expense account must be credited with the amount (see
exercise T/18.3* in the Appendix, page 269). 2 An increase in the float would
usually take place at the time of reimbursement, ie at the beginning or end of a
period.The amount received from cash or bank would then be the amount of the
reimbursement, plus the increase in the float. Increase of the float also arises in
exercise T/18.3*. Copy and hand out or show exercise T/18.3* on the overhead
projector.Work through the exercise with the students.
147
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 148
3 An examination question might require the preparation of the Petty Cash Book for
2 periods, and totalling and balancing at the end of each period. Preparation for 2
periods is required in exercise T/18.4 in the Appendix (page 271), a question from
a past paper. The period covered in the situation given is 2 weeks. It should be
noted that the exercise states that the Petty Cash Book is to be balanced and the
analysis columns totalled at the end of each week. Some candidates balanced the
account at the end of each week but then wrongly provided one total only for each
analysis column. Part (b) of T/18.4 is a test of the students’ insight into a
practical situation. It provides scope for some discussion with the students, which
should take place before any ‘solution’ is handed to them. 4 Copy and hand out or
show exercise T/18.4 on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through
the exercise. 5 Common errors made by candidates concerning the Petty Cash Book
Errors that are commonly made include:
● ●
● ● ●
faulty balancing at period-end and incorrect reimbursement of the float; poor

balancing when there is more than one period to record, eg 2 separate weeks, and,
especially, poor recording of separate (weekly) totals for the analysis columns;
faulty recording of double entry in the Cash Book in respect of reimbursement;
failing to keep to instructions regarding the headings of analysis columns; faulty
posting of period totals to General Ledger accounts.
Step 7
Aim: to be able to prepare a Cash Book with analysis of expenditure 1 Advise the
students that an alternative to using a Petty Cash Book and float is to record all
disbursements, including minor ones, in the Cash Book itself.The practice of having
columns for analysing expenditure can be applied to the Cash Book just as it can to
the Petty Cash Book.The same principle of analysing items can be applied also to
income, but the LCCIEB First Level syllabus is restricted to the analysis of
expenditure. 2 Explain that there might be, eg, 5 regular classes of expenditure
recorded in the analysis columns.Anything apart from these regular expenses could
be entered in a ‘ledger’ column. 3 Illustrate the preparation of a Cash Book with
analysis columns by showing the example below on the overhead projector. Example J
Kilbride, trader, maintains a 2-column Cash Book with additional columns for the
analysis of expenditure. Expenditure is analysed under the following headings:
Wages,
148
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 149
Stationery, Cleaning, Postage,Travelling, Ledger. On 1 March Year 6, she had a

balance of £65 in cash and a bank balance of £2,030 (Dr). The following
transactions took place in March Year 6:
3 5 8 9 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 21 23 25 27 28 30 31 Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar
Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Withdrew £130 in cash from bank for office
Purchased stationery for £43 in cash Received cheque for £250 from L Dunster Paid
£67 for travelling expenses in cash Withdrew £350 in cash from bank for office Paid
£230 in wages in cash Sales for cash £440 Paid £300 cash into bank Paid £95 by
cheque for cleaning Paid £27 for postage in cash Sent cheque for £315 to T Smart
Paid £52 for travelling expenses in cash Paid £195 in wages by cheque Purchased
stationery for £17 in cash Paid £31 for postage in cash Cash sales £216 Paid £230
for machinery repairs by cheque Paid £180 in wages in cash
Required Prepare for J Kilbride the Cash Book for March Year 6. Balance the Cash
Book at 31 March Year 6 and bring down the balances. (The answer is shown
overleaf.) The transaction recorded in the ‘ledger’ column would be posted
directly, and as soon as possible, to the ledger accounts concerned.Thus, the
account of T Smart would be debited at 18 March Year 6 with £315; the Machinery
Repairs Account would be debited at 30 March Year 6 with £230.The column totals
would be posted to the 5 expense accounts in the General Ledger at the end of each
month. Note For checking purposes: The total of the analysis columns = total of
cash and bank credit columns less the amounts of contra entries
149
pages 105-157
15/3/03
J Kilbride CASH BOOK

Year 6
Wages
Year 6 £ 43 £ £ £ £
Cash £ 65 130 250 350 230 95 27 315 52 195 17 31 230 180 605 1,315 1,265 1,201
2,580 60 95 58 195 17 31 95 27 230 300 43 67
Bank £ 2,030
Cash £
Stationery Cleaning Postage Travelling Ledger
Bank £ 130
11:16 am
67
Page 150
350 440 300
1 3 8 11 14 15 28
Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar
Balance b/f Bank C L Dunster Bank C Sales Cash C Sales
216
315 52
3 5 9 11 12 15 16 17 18 21 23 25 27 30 31 31 Mar Balance c/d 180 947 254
Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar Mar
Cash C Stationery Travelling expenses Cash C Wages Bank C Cleaning Postage T Smart
Travelling expenses Wages Stationery Postage Machinery repairs Wages
230 119 545
1,201 1,265
2,580
1 Apr
Balance b/d
254
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 151
Lesson 19: Capital and revenue expenditure

Topic summary
● ● ●
The nature of capital expenditure and revenue expenditure Classifying examples of

expenditure as capital expenditure or revenue expenditure The significance of
classifying capital and revenue expenditure for net profit and the balance sheet
The basic accounting significance of the distinction between the two types of
expenditure

12.1 The distinctive nature of capital expenditure and revenue expenditure 12.2 The
definition, in brief, of capital expenditure and revenue expenditure 12.3
Classifying a list of items into capital expenditure and revenue expenditure
respectively 12.4 The different ways in which capital expenditure and revenue
expenditure items are dealt with in the accounts 12.5 The effect on final accounts
of the incorrect treatment of capital expenditure and/or revenue expenditure
Examination answers from some LCCIEB Centres strongly suggest that the topic of
capital and revenue expenditure has been given little attention or has been
overlooked. Often, candidates are able to select between examples presented to
them, either capital or revenue. However, they have much greater difficulty in
applying their knowledge to a situation that requires correction, for example.
Step 1
Aim: to understand the nature of both capital expenditure and revenue expenditure 1
Explain that capital expenditure is the type of expenditure that is expected to
provide benefit to the business over a period longer than the current accounting
period. Capital expenditure usually involves the purchase of fixed assets or
expenditure that adds to the value of existing fixed assets. For example, extending
a factory, shop, or office premises, or adding a fitment to a machine or adapting a
machine so that its productivity improves requires capital expenditure.
151
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 152
Capital and revenue expenditure
2 Inform the students that, by contrast to capital expenditure, the benefit

provided by revenue expenditure is expected to be obtained within the accounting
year. This type of expenditure may include:
● ● ● ●
buying goods to sell; buying raw materials and/or parts to use in the course of
manufacturing; running the business, the selling and distributing of goods;
maintaining fixed assets, eg repairing or servicing machines, which does not add to
the original value of the fixed assets.
3 Show that capital expenditure is sometimes treated as revenue expenditure.This

treatment might occur when expenditure on developing new products might take
several years to result in increased sales.This capital expenditure is charged
against profits in the year in which it is spent as though it were revenue
expenditure.1
Step 2
Aim: to be able to classify examples of expenditure as capital expenditure or
revenue expenditure 1 Tell the students that treating an item of expenditure as
capital expenditure, ie ‘capitalizing’ it, means that the outlay is not included in
the year’s Profit & Loss Account but is carried forward as an asset in the balance
sheet. Of course, if a provision for depreciation were created on a newly purchased
fixed asset, then there would be some charge for the year in the Profit & Loss
Account. Expense items such as rent, insurance, and salaries are likely to be
reviewed at the end of each financial year. Thus at the end of Year 1, if
prepayments are identified, the prepayments will not be charged against the income
of Year 1 but will be carried forward as a current asset into Year 2. Effectively,
the prepayment is ‘capitalized’ at the end of Year 1. 2 Illustrate the
classification of expenditure by showing the example opposite on the overhead
projector.
152
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 153
Example
Capital expenditure £ 27,000 Revenue expenditure £ 760 28,400 45,000 1,520 3,200
980 1,750
Purchase of office equipment £27,000 Repairs to existing office equipment £760

Salaries and wages £28,400 Construction of new warehouse £45,000 Cleaning of
offices £1,520 Painting of office premises £3,200 Purchase of goods for resale £980
Painting of newly constructed warehouse £1,750 Wages and salaries £63,800, of which
£8,000 was paid to employees engaged on building an addition on to the office
premises (10) Purchase of land for building new premises £30,000 (11) Payment of
fee for legal services in connection with purchase of the land mentioned in (10)
£2,500
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
8,000 30,000 2,500
55,800
3 Advise the students that, regarding item (6) in the example, it might be argued
that if the paintwork is expected to last 4 years for example, then the cost of
painting the warehouse should be capitalized and spread over the next 4 years.This,
however, would be incorrect. If repairs, renovation, painting, etc merely restore
an asset to its original condition, the outlay is regarded as revenue expenditure
and should be fully charged in the year that the cost was incurred. Item (8)
contrasts with item (6).The initial painting of the warehouse helps to complete the
construction (item (4)) and is therefore treated as capital expenditure. The cost
of painting the warehouse at a later time would then, of course, be treated as
revenue expenditure. 4 Point out that in item (9) the expenditure is partly capital
and partly revenue.The cost has been ‘apportioned’ between the two categories of
expenditure. Note also that item (11) is capitalized; the legal services are
necessary to make the purchase of land possible. 5 Copy and hand out or show the
following exercise on the overhead projector or board. Ask the students to work
through the exercise. Exercise In the columns beside the items listed below, enter
the amount of capital expenditure or revenue expenditure for each item.
Capital expenditure £ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Paid heating and lighting bill £68
Purchased stationery £1,760 Fitting of new refrigerator in delivery vehicle £2,100
Repairs to motor vehicle £215 Paid insurance £470 Fitting of new tyres to motor
vehicle £190 Revenue expenditure £
153
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 154
Solution
Capital expenditure £ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Revenue expenditure £ 68 1,760 215
470 190
2,100
Note Item (2) – is treated as a consumable purchase. Item (3) – improves the
usefulness of the vehicle and might well increase the vehicle’s resale value. Item
(6) – fitting new tyres merely helps to ‘make good’ the wear on the vehicle and
does not increase the value of the vehicle beyond the original value.Although the
tyres may have a useful life of more than one accounting year, such a purchase
would generally be treated as revenue expenditure. 6 Copy and hand out or show
exercises T/19.1, T/19.2, and T/19.3 in the Appendix (pages 272–3) on the overhead
projector. Ask the students to work through them. Candidates should be ready to
apply their knowledge by suggesting examples of capital and revenue expenditure for
different types of business activity. 7 Copy and hand out or show on the overhead
projector or board the exercise below. Ask the students to work through the
exercise. Exercise Give one example of (a) capital expenditure, and (b) revenue
expenditure for each of the following business organizations: (i) a manufacturer of
washing machines (ii) a motor-vehicle distributor (iii) a retailer of books,
newspapers, and magazines. Solution
(a) Capital expenditure (i) Purchase of machinery for production (ii) Purchase and
improvement of showrooms (iii) Purchase of retail shop premises (b) Revenue
expenditure Wages, advertising, etc Salespersons’ salaries and commission Purchase
of newspapers, books, etc
Note These answers are only examples from a range of possible answers.The answers
should be related to the type of business organization.
154
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 155
Step 3
Aim: to appreciate the significance of classifying capital and revenue expenditure
for net profit and the balance sheet
1 Make it clear to the students that capital expenditure relates to assets and
revenue expenditure to running expenses. Capital expenditure is treated as
affecting the balance sheet, and payment is expected to be used up over more than
one financial period. Revenue expenditure, however, is treated as a profit & loss
expense that is used up within a financial period. Therefore, incorrect
classification of capital and revenue expenditure will have consequences for both
net profit and the balance sheet. 2 Illustrate the consequences of incorrect
classification by displaying the following table on the overhead projector or
board.
Incorrect classification Purchase of fixed asset treated as revenue expenditure
Revenue expense treated as capital item Effect on accounts Expense overstated Fixed
asset account understated Expenses understated Fixed asset account overstated
Overstated Effect on net profit Understated Effect on balance sheet Capital
understated Fixed asset understated Capital overstated Fixed asset overstated
3 Explain that incorrect classification can also distort the gross profit, an
effect that is shown in the next 2 exercises. 4 Copy and hand out or show exercise
T/19.5* and T/19.6* in the Appendix (pages 275–6) on the overhead projector. Ask
the students to work through them.
155
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 156
Step 4
Aim: to develop an understanding of the basic accounting significance of the
distinction between the two types of expenditure 1 Tell the students that they
should be able to apply their knowledge of expenditure classification to different
situations. Exercises T/19.7* and T/19.8* in the Appendix (pages 277 and 279),
taken from LCCIEB First Level Book-keeping past examination papers, will give them
some practice at applying what they have learnt. 2 Copy and hand out or show
exercises T/19.7* and T/19.8* on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work
through the exercises and to explain the comments given. 3 The explanation of the
comments in T/19.7* should be as follows: Item (1) – these are all items of capital
expenditure and should be deducted from the figure for purchases. Item (2) – £1,600
should be deducted from the figure for sales. A common mistake made by candidates
is to deduct the book value of the old delivery van, ie £3,400.That figure is
completely internal to the business and would not enter into the transaction of
selling the delivery van. Item (3) – the figures for closing stock should be
reduced by £300. Item (4) – the £2,100 is capital expenditure and should be
deducted from the wages figure. 4 The explanation of the comments in T/19.8* should
be as follows: (a) John Bradford failed to make the distinction between capital and
revenue. (b) ● Item (1) – the total of recorded sales is the total value of sales
transactions in the period, not the amount received in cash.Therefore, the amount
of £1,082 should be added to the existing figure to give a ‘true’ sales figure of
£23,746. ● Item (2) – the accrual of £286 increases the item ‘Wages’ to £2,926. ●
Item (3) – £1,730 becomes the figure for closing stock. ● Item (4) – the purchase
price of the motor vehicle less expected trade in value of £700 = £1,500 cost to be
carried over 3 years. £1,500 ÷ 3 = £500 depreciation per annum. The item, ‘Cash
taken for own use’ in the profit statement really means ‘drawings’.This item is not
an expense of the business and therefore should not be included in the Profit &
Loss Account. It would, of course, appear in a balance sheet as a deduction from
capital. 5 Common errors made by candidates in dealing with capital and revenue
expenditure Draw the students’ attention to these comments.
156
pages 105-157
15/3/03
11:16 am
Page 157
(a) Overlooking the significance of information in the question that explains the
purpose of certain expenditure. The information provides the clue about whether the
expenditure is to be classed as capital or revenue expenditure. (b) In considering
the effect on net profit of certain capital expenditure, students sometimes
disregard the effect of any provision for depreciation. For example, the purchase
of a motor vehicle, as a capital item, has no direct effect on net profit; however,
the need to provide for depreciation over the life of the motor vehicle would
result in reduced net profit. (c) Students may provide an unnecessary explanation
of the chosen classification when all that is required is a one-word answer.
157
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 158
Lesson 20: The journal

Topic summary
● ● ● ● ●
The role and main uses of the journal and the advantages of having a journal The
preparation of journal entries with the correct layout Making journal entries for
certain transactions or purposes Making journal entries for non-regular
transactions or adjustments The role and uses of the journal

4.1 16.1 16.2 16.3 The function of the ledger The main uses of the (General)
Journal The advantages of having a journal, as a support to the double-entry system
Journal entries, in standard format, covering: 16.3.1 the purchase and sale on
credit of fixed assets 16.3.2 the correction of errors 16.3.3 opening entries
16.3.4 other non-regular transactions or adjustments 16.4 The books of original
entry; their function
Questions requiring journal entries are quite common in the LCCIEB First Level
Book-keeping examination and yet the answers are often disappointing.The quality of
the answers indicates that not enough attention is given to this topic. The
questions may test the use of the journal in its own right, eg as a record of the
purchase or sale on credit of fixed assets. Alternatively, journal entries may be
used as a convenient and direct way of testing the students’ understanding of a
number of features of doubleentry book-keeping that would otherwise require the use
of too much examination time.
158
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 159
The journal
Step 1
Aim: to be aware of the role and main uses of the journal and the advantages of
having a journal 1 Explain the origin of the journal and its present-day function.
The day books exist to assist the ledger. Detail is recorded in the day books and
more summarized postings are made to the ledger. Originally, the day books were
part of the journal and the journal was like a notebook for recording the detail of
transactions. In the course of time, specialized day books (eg the Purchases Day
Book) or journals came into use and the journal was used to record less common
transactions or adjustments. Today, the journal is sometimes termed the Main
Journal, Journal Proper, or General Journal. 2 Point out that the Cash Book serves
as both a book of prime entry – effectively a day book – and as part of the
ledger.The ledger and the various day books cover the great majority of
transactions.A general rule is that any transaction not included in any of the day
books should be noted in the General Journal. 3 Tell the students that the main
uses of the General Journal are to make notes on:
● ● ● ●
the purchase and sale on credit of fixed assets; opening entries, ie the opening of
a new set of accounts; the correction of errors; other transfers.
4 Draw the students’ attention to the advantages of having and using a journal,
that:
● ● ●
it is an easily accessible record of the purchase and sale of fixed assets; it

helps to explain entries, eg various adjustments or the correction of errors; there
is less chance of omitting a transaction altogether, or of making an entry on one
side only of the accounts.
Regarding the first point above, some firms include the purchase and sale of fixed
assets for cash or bank, even though these are recorded anyway in the Cash Book – a
book of prime entry. More details of the assets, authority to purchase, etc can be
shown there than is possible in the Cash Book.1 5 Emphasize the role of the
journal, that it is to support the ledger. The journal itself is not part of the
double-entry system.
159
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 160
The journal
Step 2
Aim: to be able to prepare journal entries with the correct layout 1 Demonstrate
the standard layout for a journal on the board or overhead projector using the
example below. Example
T Morley JOURNAL Dr £ X Cr £ X
Date
Name of account to be debited Name of account to be credited Narrative
2 Highlight the following points:

● ●
a date should always, if possible, be entered for each journal entry; the account
to be debited should always appear first; followed by the account to be credited; a
narrative is an explanation of the journal entry; narratives, if required, should
be relevant, meaningful, and to the point.
Concerning the second point above, some candidates show the credit entries first
or, even worse, mix the entries – sometimes debit entries first, sometimes credit
entries first. The students should avoid both these errors, which are confusing for
the Examiner and which may lose them marks.
Step 3
Aim: to be able to make journal entries for certain transactions or purposes 1
Introduce the students to some uses of the journal with the aid of the examples
given below. (a) The purchase and sale on credit of fixed assets Example (i) On 9
June Year 3, a computer is bought on credit from Datarite Limited for £23,600.
160
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 161
The journal
Year 3 9 Jun
Computer equipment Datarite Ltd Purchase, on credit from Datarite Ltd, computer . .
. .
Dr £ 23,600
Cr £ 23,600
(ii) On 21 June Year 3, a motor vehicle, used for delivery purposes within the
firm, was sold on credit to Smithson Garages for £2,300. No provision for
depreciation had been made.
Year 3 21 Jun Dr £ 2,300 Cr £ 2,300
Smithson Garages Motor-vehicle disposal Sale on credit of motor vehicle no . . . .
In practice, more detail concerning the fixed assets is likely to be included, but
this is not required for examination purposes. (b) The correction of errors See
Lessons 21 and 22 (pages 168–77). (c) Opening entries Opening entries are to be
used when a business is started or for opening a new set of accounts for an already
established business. Example N Maxwell has been in business for some years. He now
decides to set up and maintain a proper set of double-entry accounts. On 1 March
Year 8, his assets and liabilities were as follows:
Assets Premises £42,000 Fixtures and fittings £5,200 Office equipment £4,800 Motor
vehicle £7,500 Stock £4,360 Debtors £1,840 (C Brandon £720; R Sims £440; L Upton
£680) Cash £130 Bank £1,100 Creditors £1,370 (M Denby £580; A Trott £790)
Liabilities
Solution The total of the assets £66,930 less liabilities £1,370 = £65,560 capital
161
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 162
The journal
The opening journal entries appear as follows:

JOURNAL Year 8 1 Mar Premises Fixtures and fittings Office equipment Motor vehicle
Stock Debtors: C Brandon R Sims L Upton Cash Bank Creditors: M Denby A Trott
Capital £ 720 440 680 Dr £ 42,000 5,200 4,800 7,500 4,360 Cr £
1,840 130 1,100
£ 580 790 66,930
1,370 65,560 66,930
The journal is the basis for opening the set of accounts as follows:
GENERAL LEDGER Premises Year 8 1 Mar Balance £ 42,000 Fixtures and fittings Year 8
1 Mar Balance £ 5,200 Office equipment Year 8 1 Mar Balance £ 4,800 Motor vehicle
Year 8 1 Mar Balance £ 7,500 Stock Year 8 1 Mar Balance £ 4,360 Capital* Year 8 1
Mar Balance £ 65,560
162
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 163
The journal
SALES LEDGER C Brandon Year 8 1 Mar Balance £ 720 R Sims Year 8 1 Mar Balance £ 440
L Upton Year 8 1 Mar Balance £ 680 PURCHASES LEDGER M Denby Year 8 1 Mar Balance A
Trott Year 8 1 Mar Balance CASH BOOK Year 8 1 Mar Balance Cash £ 130 Bank £ 1,100 £
790 £ 580
* The Capital Account could, alternatively, be kept in a Private Ledger
2 Ask the students whether journal opening entries are prepared each year. The
correct answer is that they are not. The opening entries are prepared only as
required, eg as a new set of accounts is opened, which, in practice, is rare. 3
Copy and hand out or show exercise T/20.1 in the Appendix (page 280) on the
Step 4
Aim: to be able to make journal entries for non-regular transactions or adjustments
1 Explain that non-regular transactions or adjustments that are not otherwise
recorded in a book of prime entry, include:
163
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 164
The journal
● ●
special transactions or adjustments arising during the course of the year; year-end
adjustments.
Possible adjustments include:

● ● ● ●
● ● ●
transfers to the Trading and Profit & Loss Account; accruals and prepayments;
provision for depreciation; writing off a fixed asset, ie transferring the
remaining balance on the asset account to the Profit & Loss Account; writing off
bad debts; creating or adjusting a provision for doubtful debts; adjusting for
owner’s drawings.
2 Illustrate journal entries for non-regular transactions or adjustments by showing

the examples below on the board or overhead projector. Example (a) At 31 December
Year 5, the balance on the Advertising Account is £4,850 (Dr). Of this, £4,100
relates to Year 5, while £750 is a prepayment for Year 6.
Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss Advertising Transfer of expenditure for advertising for
the year ended 31 Dec Yr 5 Dr £ 4,100 Cr £ 4,100
Example (b) At 31 December Year 5, the balance on the Rent Receivable Account is
£3,350. All of this relates to Year 5. In addition, £450 is accrued for Year 5.
Year 5 31 Dec Rent receivable Profit & loss Transfer of the amount of rent
receivable for the year ended 31 Dec Year 5 Dr £ 3,800 Cr £ 3,800
164
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 165
The journal
Example (c) At 31 December Year 5, bad debts written off for the year amount to
£715.
Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss Bad debts Total of bad debts written off for the year
ended 31 Dec Year 5 Dr £ 715 Cr £ 715
Example (d) At 31 December Year 5, the existing provision for doubtful debts is to
be increased by £370.
Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss Provision for doubtful debts Increase in provision for
doubtful debts Dr £ 370 Cr £ 370
Step 5
Aim: to develop and reinforce learning on the role and uses of the journal 1 Review
the relationship between the various books of account. Figure 20.1 (overleaf )
structurally illustrates the various books of account. Note that the books of prime
entry are not part of the double-entry system.The Cash Book and Petty Cash Book are
both books of prime entry and part of the ledger in the wider sense. Also note
that, apart from contra entries in the Cash Book, it is still necessary to post
from these two books into the ledger itself to complete the double entry. 2 Remind
the students that the Trading and Profit & Loss Account is part of the double-entry
system but that the balance sheet is not. The General Journal, in its function as a
diary, holds information on transactions that are not entered into any other book
of prime entry. It should also contain adjustments – changes made without a
transaction arising. In addition, transactions of a special nature may be recorded
there even though they are entered in another book of prime entry, eg the purchase
or sale of fixed assets for cash or bank payment. 3 Advise the students to practise
answering questions requiring journal entries as much as possible.These questions
can be a compact way of testing the students’ knowledge of the rules of double
entry; the importance of this topic cannot be overstated.
165
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 166
The journal
Cash
Book Ledger General (Nominal) Ledger Purchases Ledger Sales Ledger (Private Ledger)
DOUBLEENTRY SYSTEM
Trading and Profit & Loss Account
Balance sheet Figure 20.1 The account system
4 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/20.2*, T/20.3, T/20.4*, and T/20.5* in the
Appendix (pages 281, 283–4, and 286). It is important that the students work
through these exercises and that you review the answers with them. Overall they
show the range of topics that can be covered in journal entries. 5 When the
students work through T/20.4*, emphasize that they must provide sufficient
information in journal entries that relate to year-end adjustments on expense or
income accounts. ‘Common errors’ below deals further with this feature. 6 Common
errors made by candidates regarding journal entries Candidates sometimes:
● ●
provide ledger accounts instead of journal entries; provide insufficient

information for year-end adjustments on expense/income accounts, eg:
Date Insurance Insurance Narration . . . . £ 90 £ 90
166
Petty Cash Book
BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY
Discount columns
Purchases Day Book
Returns Outwards Day Book
Sales Day Book
Returns Inwards Day Book
General Journal
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 167
The journal
The correct entries appear as follows:

Date Insurance (year to 30 Jun Yr 9) Insurance (year to 30 Jun Yr 8)
Narration . . . . £ 90 £ 90
ie, the financial years must be stated for the entry to be valid.
●
● ●
lay out journal entries poorly; eg, the entries might be cramped together –
sometimes it is not clear which is debit and which is credit provide description
and explanation instead of an account name either state no date (where it can or
should be provided) or show an incorrect date; the date given should be the one on
which (in the firm concerned) the journal entry is made.
167
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 168
Lesson 21: Errors in the accounts 1

Topic summary
●
The basic classification of errors and errors that have no effect on agreement of
the trial balance Errors that might affect agreement of the trial balance and how
the trial balance might be affected

11.3 11.4 11.5 17.1 Errors in the accounts and their effect on the trial balance
The revising of an incorrectly drafted trial balance The limitations of the trial
balance as a means of check The difference between errors which affect agreement of
the trial balance and those errors which do not affect such agreement 17.2 Those
errors which do not affect agreement of the trial balance; types of such error 17.3
From data provided, the selection of the relevant type of error 17.4 The drafting
of appropriate adjusting journal entries
Students often experience difficulty with this topic, and the terms used should be
explained with care.
Step 1
Aim: to be aware of the basic classification of errors and, in particular, of the
errors that have no effect on agreement of the trial balance 1 Explain that errors
in accounts may be classified as:
● ●
those that have no effect on agreement of the trial balance; those that usually
affect the trial balance.
2 Review the range of errors (below) that do not affect agreement of the trial
balance.
168
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 169
Errors in the accounts 1
(a) Errors of omission This type of error occurs when a transaction is completely
omitted from the books. Use the example that follows to illustrate errors of
omission. Example Credit note number 387 for £73 is issued to a customer. A Doyle,
on the return of goods, has not been entered in the accounts. An adjusting journal
entry should be made, as follows, before making the necessary correcting entries in
the two ledger accounts concerned.
JOURNAL Dr £ 73 Cr £ 73
Returns inwards A Doyle Correction of omission of entry of credit note no 387
(b) Errors of commission These errors occur when a transaction is entered in a

wrong account of the same class as the one in which it should have been recorded.
Often, this error means that a transaction is entered in the wrong person’s account
(either debtor or creditor). Use the example below to illustrate this type of error
of commission. Example Invoice number S/598 for goods bought on credit for £345
from Eastern Supplies had been entered in the account of Eastern Sundries. The
adjusting entry would appear as:
Eastern Sundries Eastern Supplies Purchase invoice no S/598 entered in wrong

supplier account, now corrected
In the Purchases Ledger, the 2 accounts would appear as:

Eastern Supplies £ Purchases (entered wrongly in Eastern Sundries Account) 345
(continued)
169
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 170
Eastern Sundries £ Eastern Supplies (posting error corrected) Purchases 345 £ 345
The correction of an error involving impersonal accounts is as follows:

Postage Telephone Payment in cash for postage was wrongly posted to Telephone
Account, now corrected
Stress that both accounts are in the same class, ie they are both nominal accounts.
A further example for impersonal accounts is as follows:
Office furniture Fixtures and fittings Purchase by cheque of office furniture,

wrongly posted to Fixtures and Fittings Account, now corrected
In this case, both accounts are real accounts. (c) Reversal of entries Debit and
credit entries for the correct amount have been made, but on the wrong side of the
2 accounts. Use the example that follows to illustrate the reversal of entries.
Example The sale of goods for £420 cash has been entered as a debit to the Sales
Account and a credit to the Cash Account.
170
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 171
The correct entries should be:

Sales Cash Cash Sales £ 420 £ 420
If the correct entries are adjusted by crediting the Sales Account and debiting the
Cash Account with £420, it merely cancels the errors.To adjust fully, and to
achieve what was first intended, it is necessary to double the amount.
Sales Cash £ 420 Cash Sales (correction of error) £ 840 Sales £ 420 Cash
(correction of error) £ 840
Therefore, the journal entry would be:

Cash Sales Sales of goods for £420 cash and wrongly reversed in the accounts, now
corrected
(d) Error of principle When a transaction is entered in the wrong class of account,
an error of principle occurs. Use the example given below to illustrate this type
of error. Example The purchase of office equipment for £1,264 has been wrongly
debited to the Purchases Account. This purchase is an item of capital expenditure
that, wrongly, has been treated as revenue expenditure and entered in a nominal
account. As capital expenditure, it should have been recorded in a real account. It
is therefore necessary to cancel the incorrect entry in the Purchases Account, ie
using a credit entry, and to make a debit entry in the Office Equipment Account.
171
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 172
JOURNAL Dr £ 1,264 Cr £ 1,264
Office equipment Purchases Purchase of office equipment wrongly debited in

Purchases Account, now corrected
(e) Error of original entry When an error of original entry occurs, the correct
accounts have been used and the entries are on the correct sides, but the amount
has been entered incorrectly in both accounts. Often, although not necessarily,
this error is the result of the source document being incorrect. Use the following
example to illustrate error of original entry. Example Sale of goods £350 on credit
to T Hogan has been entered in the accounts as £380. Both entries are £30 too much.
Sales T Hogan Sales overstated by £30, now corrected
(f) Compensating error A compensating error occurs when errors cancel each other
out. Use the example that follows to illustrate this type of error. Example
Purchases account (debit) is understated by £10 and rent receivable (credit) also
is understated by £10. The trial balance is still in balance, provided there are no
other errors in the accounts.
Purchases Rent receivable Purchases Account and Rent Receivable Account each
undercast by £10, now corrected
172
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 173
(g) Error of duplication In this instance, a transaction is entered correctly in

the accounts and then, in error, is entered again.This error is not revealed by the
trial balance. 3 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/21.1, T/21.2, and T/21.3 in
the Appendix (pages 288–9) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work
through them.
Step 2
Aim: to be aware of errors that might affect agreement of the trial balance and of
how the trial balance might be affected 1 Outline the errors that would usually
affect the trial balance, including:
● ● ● ●
an incorrect posting on one side of the transaction; an error in addition, eg of

entries within an account; a balance wrongly brought forward to the trial balance;
a balance omitted from the trial balance.
These errors affect agreement within the trial balance only if they do not
compensate one another. 2 Ask the students when the errors are likely to become
known.The answer is that some will become known during the course of the year,
partly through checks in the system. They will then be corrected. Others will
become known at the end of the year when the trial balance is prepared. Either way,
the adjustments necessary to correct the errors should be ‘journalized’. 3 Discuss
with the students how the various errors will affect the trial balance. 4 Explain
that agreement between the 2 sides of a trial balance does not prove that all
entries have been made correctly in the accounts.The trial balance is limited as a
means of checking entries. The 2 sides of the trial balance could be in agreement
even though any of the errors outlined in Step 1 could have been made, eg the
complete omission of a transaction, a compensating error, or an error of
commission. 5 Fully discuss the limitations of the trial balance with the students.
6 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/21.4 and T/21.5 in the Appendix (pages 290–
1) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through them. 7 Review and
discuss the answers to the questions.
173
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 174
Lesson 22: Errors in the accounts 2

Topic summary
● ●
Adjustments for errors through journal entries or in accounts The effect of errors
or of correcting errors on gross and net profits, as well as upon the balance sheet

17.4 The drafting of appropriate adjusting journal entries 17.5 The effect of
errors and/or the effect of the correction of errors both in principle as well as
by calculation on: 17.5.1 the trial balance 17.5.2 gross profit 17.5.3 net profit
17.5.4 the balance sheet
A topic that frequently occurs in LCCIEB First Level Book-keeping examinations is

correcting errors by means of journal entries or by entries in accounts. Answers to
questions requiring the correction of journal entries strongly indicate that
insufficient attention is paid to this topic. It is also evident that candidates
experience some difficulty in answering questions on the effect of errors on profit
and the balance sheet.The guidance in Step 2 and the supporting exercises should
help to overcome this problem.
Step 1
Aim: to understand the effect of errors or of correcting errors on gross and net
profits, as well as on the balance sheet 1 The problem for candidates in answering
this type of question is often one of method. In preparing for the examination as
well as in the examination itself, attention should be paid to the points listed
below.
174
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 175
(a) Have the students fully grasped the question? Often marks are lost because
parts of the question have been misunderstood. Lack of understanding might be the
result of unfamiliarity with the topic or with the particular form of question. (b)
In preparing an answer requiring journal entries, candidates may find it helpful to
draft T-type accounts. This exercise might help them to visualize debit and credit
entries.The T-type accounts should not be in detail – just miniature ‘accounts’ are
enough. If necessary, the account can be written in the answer book and then boldly
crossed through. It is, of course, wrong to show accounts as part of an answer when
only journal entries are required. (c) Does the question require narrations? Or
does it state that narrations are not required? (d) Journal entries should always
be in the correct format with the debit entry first and the credit entry following
it.When an answer requires a multiple of account entries, eg in recording the sale
of a depreciated fixed asset, there may be various ways of setting out the answer,
but the same rule applies: debit comes before credit. 2 Copy and hand out or show
exercises T/22.1 and T/22.2 in the Appendix (page 292) on the overhead projector.
Ask the students to work through them. 3 Explain that, sometimes, an item in a
question may require a one-sided journal entry only. For example, an error could be
the result of a posting failure. Illustrate this point with the example below.
Example Stationery purchased on 12 March Year 3 for £37 in cash is correctly
entered in the Cash Book but is not posted to the Stationery Account in the General
Ledger.The trial balance would therefore be short on the debit side by £37.The
correcting journal entry made on 31 March Year 3 would be:
JOURNAL Year 3 31 Mar Stationery Dr £ 37 Cr £ – Stationery purchased on 12 March
Year 3: entered in cash book but not posted, now corrected.
Note The dash (–) in the credit column gives a positive indication to the Examiner
that that candidate recognizes that no credit entry is required. 4 Copy and hand
out or show exercise T/22.3* in the Appendix (page 293) on the overhead projector.
Ask the students to work through the exercise. Note that this question requires
some one-sided journal entries.
175
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 176
Step 2
Aim: to understand the effect of errors or of correcting errors on gross and net
profits, as well as on the balance sheet 1 Explain that the effect of errors in
terms of reported profits and a prepared balance sheet is being discussed. 2 Stress
the need to distinguish between the effect of the error itself and the effect of
correcting the error.Thus, if purchases were undercast:
the effect of the error gross profit overstated the effect of correcting the error
gross profit reduced
The amount is the same for both effects.The distinction is of fundamental

importance: often questions relating to errors are answered from the wrong
angle.When errors are made, there is a sequence of consequences. It will help the
students considerably if they become used to working through the likely
consequences of various types of error. For example, the understatement of
purchases mentioned above will, by itself, lead to:
●
understatement of cost of goods sold
which results in
overstatement of gross profit
which results in
overstatement of net profit
which results in
overstatement of the addition to capital on the balance sheet
3 Copy and hand out or show the following exercise on the overhead projector. The
errors should be put to students one-by-one. Review the consequences of each one
before moving on to the next. Exercise Trace the sequence of consequences of the
following errors through to the balance sheet: (1) overstatement of sales (2)
overstatement of returns outwards (3) understatement of carriage outwards
176
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 177
(4) overstatement of closing stock (5) overstatement of carriage inwards (6)

understatement of returns inwards. 4 Use Table 22.1 to illustrate the differences
between the effects of errors on reported profits, etc, before making any
correction, and the effects resulting from correction.This table also appears on
page 217 of the student’s book, How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level.
Table 22.1 Effects of the error and effects of correcting the error Effects of the
error, ie before correction Gross profit Purchases undercast Overstated Net profit
Overstated Balance sheet Capital overstated Capital overstated Stock overstated
Capital understated Effects (upon already reported profits) of correcting the error
Gross profit Reduced Net profit Reduced Balance sheet Capital reduced
Closing stock overvalued
Overstated
Overstated
Reduced
Reduced
Capital reduced Stock reduced
Expense item, eg rent overstated Income item, eg commission overstated
No effect
Understated
No effect
Increased
Capital increased
No effect
Overstated
Capital overstated
No effect
Reduced
Capital reduced
Note Any overstatement or understatement of either an asset or a liability affects

only the balance sheet. 5 Exercise T/22.4* in the Appendix (page 294) shows the
effects of errors and of their correction. Copy and hand out, or show the exercise
on the overhead projector, and work through it with the students. Pay special
attention to the note at the end of T/22.4A.
177
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 178
Lesson 23: Final accounts and adjustments further considered Stock valuation
Topic summary
● ● ● ● ●
Adjustments for drawings other than cash drawings End-of-period adjustments for
outstanding purchase invoices Year-end adjustments in the preparation of final
accounts Trading and Profit & Loss Accounts in a vertical format The basic rule for
stock valuation

13.6 Adjustments in the Trading Account and balance sheet for end-of-period
‘outstanding’ purchases, ie goods received but invoices still awaited 13.11
Adjustments for end-of-period income accrual and income prepayment in the Profit &
Loss Account and balance sheet 18.2 The meaning of the term drawings; the various
forms of drawings 18.3 The book-keeping entries for drawings 18.4 The possible
effect of drawings upon the amount of capital 18.5 How drawings are stated in the
balance sheet and, where necessary, in the Trading Account (where goods are
withdrawn for private benefit) 19.4 The valuation of closing stock: the lower of
cost or net realizable value 19.13 Showing income and expenses within the final
accounts, with related items being suitably brought together
This lesson considers the further adjustments that might have to be made to the
final accounts. The adjustments include different forms of drawings and the
valuation of stock. Stock valuation could also be the main subject of a question or
a part of a question. The vertical layout of the Trading and Profit & Loss Account
is also discussed. By this stage of their studies, the students should have gained
a fair knowledge of the various topics that have been discussed. Final accounts
brings together many facets of book-keeping.The working and review of final
accounts affords an opportunity to clarify points, sort out difficulties, and if
necessary to reinforce key study points.
178
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 179
Final accounts and adjustments further considered
Stress that the overriding aim of the final accounts is to present a true picture
of a business by showing that:
●
the net profit is a true result after taking into account all relevant costs and
income for the given period the balance sheet is a true statement of assets and
liabilities at the balance sheet date
Correctly classifying expenditure between capital and revenue, and making period-
end adjustments for accruals and prepayments, all contribute towards presenting a
true picture of a business.
Step 1
Aim: to be able to make adjustments for drawings other than cash drawings 1 Remind
the students of the entries for drawings by the proprietor (ie owner of the
business), that they are:
Dr Cr Drawings Account Cash/bank account
In the balance sheet, the total of the drawings for the year is deducted from the
owner’s capital balance at the start of the year. If the drawings take the form of
goods being withdrawn from the business for private use, the necessary adjustment
would be:
Dr Cr Drawings Account Purchases Account
2 Point out that if the adjustment for drawings is made before the preparation of
the trial balance, then the purchases balance will already be reduced by the amount
of the drawings, while the Drawings Account will show both cash and goods drawings.
However, the candidates may be required to prepare final accounts that incorporate
an adjustment for goods withdrawn by the proprietor, using an already prepared
trial balance that is not adjusted for the withdrawal. It will then be necessary
to:
● ●
show a deduction from purchases in the Trading Account; increase the amount
deducted as drawings in the balance sheet.
Sometimes, examination candidates merge these figures, eg drawings of cash and

drawings of goods are added together and entered as one figure.Advise the students
to show each adjustment to make sure they obtain the mark(s).
179
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 180
3 Explain that there are other alternative forms of drawings (ie besides cash) that
usually involve the private use of business facilities. For example, the owner may
use a motor vehicle or the business telephone, or live in part of the business
premises for which rent would otherwise be payable to the business. Use of these
facilities may mean that the cost of a facility is shared (or ‘apportioned’)
between the business and the owner personally. 4 Illustrate how to show shared cost
by displaying the following example on the overhead projector or board. Example The
business telephone is also used by the owner for private purposes.The yearly cost
of the telephone is apportioned as follows:
business owner’s private use
4 1
/5 /5
At the year end, an adjustment would be made to allow for the owner’s private
use.The amount paid from the business bank account for the telephone during the
year ended 30 June Year 7 was £380, of which £30 was prepaid at the year end.
Solution
Amount paid during year ended 30 Jun Yr 7 less Prepayment at 30 Jun Yr 7 Annual
charge To be apportioned: business use private use
4
£ 380 30 350
/5 1 /5
£ 280 70 350
The period-end adjustments in the ledger would be:

Dr Cr Drawings Telephone £70 £70
In the final accounts:

● ●
the figure for the telephone in the Profit & Loss Account would be shown as £280;
drawings in the balance sheet should be increased by £70. (= capital reduced) (=
capital increased)
The increased figure for drawings is offset by the increased figure of net profit
180
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 181
Step 2
Aim: to be able to make end-of-period adjustments for outstanding purchase invoices
Explain that, at the end of a financial period, purchased goods might already have
been received but the invoice may still have to come from the seller.The Purchases
Account will therefore be understated, while the period-end stock check will
include the goods in the value of the closing stock. In addition, creditors will be
understated in the Purchases Ledger. The effects will be that:
●
the cost of goods sold will be understated, resulting in an overstated gross profit
and overstated net profit; in the balance sheet, creditors will be understated,
while capital (through the addition of net profit) will be overstated.
The adjustment for this at the period-end would therefore be to debit the Purchases
Account and credit the creditor’s account with the amount of the anticipated
invoice.The account entries should be supported by a journal entry. If, for some
reason the amount in the invoice (when it is received) is different from the amount
shown in the adjustment, then a further adjustment for the difference in amount has
to be made. For examination purposes, if Trading Account and balance sheet
adjustments are required, the candidates should make it clear that they are
including the amount in their figures, ie it should not be lost in the total
figure.
Step 3
Aim: to reinforce understanding and practice in making year-end adjustments in the
preparation of final accounts 1 Explain that, at the stage of preparing final
accounts from a trial balance, the students should keep in mind that, with the
trial balance in agreement, a position of balance exists at the start of drafting
the final accounts. Therefore, if any adjustment has to be made, the student should
always look for 2 effects: a debit adjustment and a credit adjustment. An
adjustment for an expense prepayment of £100 will reduce total expenditure in the
Profit & Loss Account and will also create an asset balance for the expense prepaid
(debit effect). The matching effect will be an increase of £100 in net profit and
consequently in the amount of capital (credit effect). 2 Copy and hand out or show
exercise T/23.1* in the Appendix (page 299) on the overhead projector. Ask the
students to work through the exercise and give them guidance on method and the
particular items.
181
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 182
Remind the students that the techniques recommended in Lesson 7 for marking each
item with its position in the final accounts should be followed here. After the
students have had time to scan the question, review the adjustments one by one,
pointing out the two-fold aspect of each adjustment: (1)(a) The increase in each
depreciation provision is charged to the Profit & Loss Account, which reduces the
net profit; (b) this decrease is matched by a reduction in the figure for fixed
assets. (2)(a) Closing stock, as a deduction, reduces the cost of goods sold; (b)
therefore the gross profit is increased and, as a result, net profit is increased.
(3)(a) The revised provision for doubtful debts at 2% of debtors, ie 2% of £35,000
= £700 less the existing provision of £600 = an increase of £100 which is charged
to the Profit & Loss Account which reduces net profit by £100; (b) in the balance
sheet, the smaller net assets figure (ie from a reduced figure for net debtors) is
matched by a reduced addition of net profit to capital. (4)(a) £520 is added to
motor-vehicle running expenses and £420 is added to heating and lighting in the
Profit & Loss Account, so reducing the net profit; (b) this reduction is matched in
the balance sheet by 2 accrual items included under liabilities. (5)(a) Rates and
insurances in the Profit & Loss Account is reduced by £120, making the net profit
£120 more; (b) in the balance sheet, the increased net profit addition to capital
is matched by an item, ‘rates and insurances prepaid’, among the current assets.
Note The adjusted entries are highlighted in the solution given in T/23.1A. 3 Copy
and hand out or show exercises T/23.2 and T/23.3 in the Appendix (pages 302–3) on
the overhead projector.Ask the students to work through them. Note that in T/23.3,
item (6), the Sales Ledger figure of £370 is set off against the Purchases Ledger
figure of £4,096, resulting in a net figure of £3,726.
Step 4
Aim: to be able to prepare Trading and Profit & Loss Accounts in vertical format 1
Explain that the practice is now well established of preparing Trading and Profit &
Loss Accounts in vertical format. Stress that the double entry is maintained; only
the presentation is different.
182
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 183
2 Illustrate vertical format on the board or overhead projector with the Trading
and Profit & Loss Account for J Salmon for the year ended 30 June Year 6 (see
exercise T/23.1*, page 299), shown below.
J Salmon Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 30 June Year 6 £
Sales less Sales returns less Cost of goods sold: Stock, 1 Jul Yr 5 Purchases less
Purchases returns less Stock, 30 Jun Yr 6 Gross profit add Discount received
Depreciation: Motor vehicles Fixtures and fittings 20,000 8,200 £ 370,000 3,400
15,700 263,500 7,300 256,200 271,900 17,400 £ 366,600
254,500 112,100 1,600 113,700
Discount allowed Bad debts Provision for doubtful debts Rent Motor-vehicle running
expenses Rates and insurances Salaries Lighting and heating Net profit
28,200 2,300 650 100 12,000 3,870 3,300 12,300 4,350
67,070 46,630
3 Ask the students to rewrite the Trading and Profit & Loss Account for exercise
T/23.3 in vertical format.
Step 5
Aim: to appreciate and be able to apply the basic rule for stock valuation 1 Remind
students of the significance of the value placed on closing stock. Show that:
183
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 184
the value of closing stock
affects cost of goods sold
which in turn affects
gross profit
which then affects
net profit
with balance sheet consequences
asset value and amount of capital
2 Point out that (closing) stock is usually valued at the end of a trading period
(generally a year). Valuation involves: (a) a check on and count of the items in
stock, to allow for items lost, stolen, that have physically deteriorated, or that
are otherwise unsaleable; (b) placing a value per item on the stock. Then
total stock value = number of items held × stock value per item
Each item of stock is valued according to the rule of valuing at the lower of:
●
cost price
or
●
net realizable value.
3 Tell the students that profit should not be anticipated, ie it should not be
included in the accounts until the goods concerned have actually been sold. Net
realizable value is defined as the selling price less the costs of getting the
goods into a saleable condition. This means, for example, that costs incurred for
repairing damaged goods before they can be sold must first be deducted. 4 Emphasize
that the result of applying the rule of valuing at the lower cost price or net
realizable value is that stock is cautiously valued. A lower figure for closing
stock means a higher ‘cost of goods sold’ and therefore a lower gross profit. This
is known as being ‘prudent’. 5 Illustrate how to apply the basic rule of stock
valuation by showing the example opposite on the board or overhead projector.
184
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 185
Example Andy Struddles has valued his stock at 31 December Year 3 at cost £6,340.
Included in this figure are items for which the stock value is under review.
● ●
Item 1 cost £410.The likely selling price has fallen from £590 to £530. Item 2 cost
£290. Its normal selling price is £350 but it is now expected to sell for only
£270. Item 3 cost £330.The item now has no sale or scrap value.The normal selling
price is £450. Item 4, which cost £215, has been damaged and cannot be repaired.
Its normal selling price is £280 but it is now expected to sell for only £220. Item
5 cost £170. Its normal selling price was £250 but this had been reduced in
November Year 3 to £190. Item 6, which cost £520, has been damaged and is to be
repaired at a cost of £110. Once repaired it is expected to sell for £570.
Andy Struddles Revised stock valuation at 31 December Year 3
Pre-revised stock valuation Item 1
£ 6,340
Valued at cost. The stock value is unchanged. The likely selling price is well
above this figure. Item 2 Valued at net realizable value. The expected selling
price has fallen below the cost price, so that £270 becomes the stock valuation
figure. (20) Item 3 Valued at net realizable value. The stock value has fallen to
zero. This will be written off. (330) Item 4 Valued at cost. Although the selling
price has fallen it is still above cost. The stock value is unchanged. Item 5
Valued at cost. The stock value is unchanged. The reduced selling price remains
above cost. Item 6 Valued at net realizable value. The expected selling price has
fallen below the cost price, so that £460 (ie £570 - £110) becomes the stock
valuation figure. (60) Revised stock valuation 5,930
Note A detailed explanation is given here for each item. Usually a question would
not require such detail to be provided. 6 Explain that the type of question similar
to the example above requires adjustment for the difference in valuation. In
examination answers, some candidates add the total net realizable value to the
existing stock figure, which results in a much higher figure than they started
with. 7 Show the significance of the stock valuation rule by displaying the example
overleaf on the board or overhead projector.
185
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 186
Example In Year 1 a trader purchases 8 machines at a cost of £1,000 each. During

the course of the year, 6 machines are sold at £1,500 each. The remaining 2
machines are valued at the year end at cost price, ie at £1,000 each.The profit is
calculated as follows:
Sales (6 × £1,500) less Cost of goods sold: Purchases (8 × £1,000) less Stock (2 ×
£1,000) Profit £ £ 9,000
8,000 2,000
6,000 3,000
The profit in Year 1 consists of £500 on each of the 6 machines sold. If the unsold
machines had been valued at the selling price, ie at £1,500, the profit for Year 1
would have been calculated as follows:
Sales (6 × £1,500) less Purchases (8 × £1,000) less Stock (2 × £1,500) Profit £
8,000 3,000 £ 9,000 5,000 4,000
The profit is therefore equal to £500 on each of the 8 machines when, in fact, only
6 have been sold. The profit on the 2 unsold machines has been ‘anticipated’. If
the machines are sold in Year 2 then no profit on their sale is recorded for that
year even though plenty of effort, time, and expense might have gone into selling
them in that year. The stock at the end of Year 1 becomes the opening stock for
Year 2. By valuing the stock in Year 1 at selling price (ie the higher figure), the
opening stock for Year 2 is increased. The cost of goods sold is also increased and
gross profit is reduced. The recorded position between the 2 years is incorrect and
misleading. 8 Copy and hand out or show exercises T/23.4 and T/23.5 in the Appendix
(pages 304–5) on the overhead projector. Ask the students to work through them. 9
Explain the term ‘mark-up’. It is a term used in questions relating to stock
valuation, and it often causes students problems in the examination. ‘Mark-up’ can
be defined as: cost of goods sold + some running cost + profit
= mark-up
= selling price
10 Display Figure 23.1 (opposite) on the board or overhead projector to illustrate

how mark-up is obtained. 11 With reference to Figure 23.1, explain that goods may
be ‘marked up’ from the cost price to ensure that an amount is received towards
running costs and, if possible, to make some net profit. For example, if the cost
price of a product is £300 and the mark-up to
186
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 187
selling price is 331/3 %, the selling price will be £400.The original cost portion
can be viewed as thirds.The extra 1/3 at the end means that there are now 4 thirds
(4/3 ) instead of 3 thirds ( 3/3 ).The mark-up or 1/3 on the cost price = 1/4 (25%)
of the selling price.
Selling Price Cost of goods sold Running cost + profit
4 Mark-up 331/3 % = 1/3
Figure 23.1 Mark-up
12 Point out that the cost portion may also be viewed as quarters, fifths, and so
on. By adding the numerator to the denominator in the fraction of the cost price,
the denominator of the fraction in the selling price (the mark-up) can be
obtained.Thus:
1
/3 on cost price = 1 + 3 = 1/4 of selling price or 1 /3 on cost price = 1 + 4 = 1/5

of selling price or 1 /5 on cost price = 1 + 5 = 1/6 of selling price
187
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 188
Lesson 24: Club and society accounts

Topic summary
● ●
● ● ● ●
The deficiencies of a Receipts & Payments Account The presentation of an Income &
Expenditure Account with regard to the distinctive features of club or society
accounts The suitable and effective presentation of subsidiary income and expense
information The calculation of the accumulated fund of a club or society The
presentation of a balance sheet of a club or society The correct recording of
amounts received through donations

21.1 The differences between a Receipts & Payments Account and an Income &
Expenditure Account 21.2 The preparation of an Income & Expenditure Account from a
list of balances or from a Receipts & Payments Account (both with supporting data)
21.3 The suitable grouping of associated items of income and expenditure within an
Income & Expenditure Account 21.4 The preparation, if required, of an ancillary
account for trading activities, eg Refreshments Account, and the carrying of the
surplus/deficit into the Income & Expenditure Account 21.5 The preparation of the
balance sheet of a club or society 21.6 The calculation, if necessary, of the
amount of the Accumulated Fund
Many candidates will have personal experience of club or society accounts, whether
as club member recipients of the accounts or whether in helping to prepare the
accounts. This experience can be drawn upon when teaching this topic.
Unfortunately, though, club accounts are often not prepared according to good
accounting principles. Questions on this topic can be set with various kinds of
starting information.The questions usually start from either a trial balance or a
Receipts & Payments Account. Plenty of care is needed to answer the questions and
some distinctive terms should be learned. Club accounts, nevertheless, are based on
the same accounting principles as those for a business.
188
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 189
Club and society accounts
Step 1
Aim: to recognize the deficiencies of a Receipts & Payments Account 1 Explain the
nature of a Receipts & Payments Account, ie that it represents a summary (in debit
and credit form) of cash/bank transactions for a given period. 2 Display the
example of a Receipts & Payments Account that follows on the board or overhead
projector. Example
Linkwell Social Club Receipts & Payments Account for the year ended 31 December
Year 9 Receipts £ Balance at bank, 1 Jan Yr 9 Subscriptions received: Year ended 31
Dec Yr 8 420 31 Dec Yr 9 4,100 31 Dec Yr 10 240 £ 870 Payments Hire of rooms
Printing and stationery Purchase of video equipment Hire of films Annual social
Visit to Bruges Balance at bank, 31 Dec Yr 9 £ 1,860 570 1,160 320 490 380 850
5,630
4,760 5,630
3 Point out that the 2 sides of the account relate to the debit and credit of a
cash or bank account.The amounts, however, are item totals for the year and not
individual transaction entries. Ask the students to identify the weaknesses of a
Receipts & Payments Account. The weaknesses are that:
●
there is no allowance for accruals and/or prepayments, eg subscriptions are

included for Years 8 and 10; no account is taken of capital expenditure as distinct
from revenue expenditure, eg the video equipment is fully charged to Year 9 even
though it may well be in use for several years; by itself the Receipts & Payments
Account is incomplete: there is no mention of assets owned other than those
mentioned in the account; there is no mention of liabilities and, unfortunately,
the Receipts & Payments Account is sometimes the only account statement issued to
members.
Regarding the third and fourth points, assets and liabilities should be dealt with
separately, ie in a balance sheet. The club or society members also need to know by
means of the balance sheet whether the capital has increased or decreased over the
period and why this is so.
189
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 190
Step 2
Aim: to be able to present an Income & Expenditure Account with regard to the
distinctive features of club or society accounts 1 Explain that the Income &
Expenditure Account is used by clubs and societies, ie non-profit-making
organizations, as a replacement for the Profit & Loss Account. The account has
certain distinctive features, but it is constructed on similar principles to the
Profit & Loss Account. It incorporates adjustments for:
● ● ●
accruals prepayments provision for depreciation of fixed assets.
Thus, the reason for using an Income & Expenditure Account is to include only
‘true’ income & expenditure for a period, in order to obtain a result that
correctly reflects the activities of the club or society for the period. 2 Tell the
students that, like the Profit & Loss Account, the Income & Expenditure Account is
part of the double-entry system: the period totals for income and the various
expenses are transferred to it from the General Ledger. 3 Emphasize that the final
accounts issued to members of clubs or societies should be:
● ● ●
meaningful relevant easily understood.
Many club members may have little if any knowledge of accounting. They should be
supplied with statements that are informative and yet easily read.The members
should not have to search for separate pieces of information and then have to put
them together to form a complete financial picture.Therefore, matters relating to a
particular topic should be brought together, ie items should be appropriately
‘grouped’. 4 Illustrate how to present an Income & Expenditure Account by showing
the example opposite on the board or overhead projector.
190
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 191
Example
Tattenham Sports Club Trial balance at 31 December Year 4 Dr £ 6,300 2,200 Cr £
Sports equipment at cost Video equipment at cost Provision for depreciation: Sports
equipment Video equipment Balance at bank Subscriptions received Rent payable
Insurance Telephone and postage General expenses Surplus on annual dance
Accumulated fund
2,400 800 1,860 7,150 3,400 530 410 260 180 4,430 14,960
14,960
Additional information that applies at 31 December Year 4: (1) subscriptions: £280

has been received in advance of Year 5; £360 is accrued due for Year 4; (2) rent
payable accrued due amounted to £400; (3) prepaid insurance £80; (4) depreciation
to be provided: sports equipment – 20% on cost video equipment – 121/2% on cost.
Required An Income & Expenditure Account for Tattenham Sports Club for the year
ended 31 December Year 4. Note Remind the students that capital expenditure items
and liabilities are not included in this account.They are shown in the balance
sheet, which is dealt with on page 196.
191
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 192
Solution
Tattenham Sports Club Income & Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December
Year 4 Expenditure Rent payable (+400) Insurance (-80) Telephone and postage
General expenses Depreciation: Sports equipment Video equipment Surplus of income
over expenditure £ £ 3,800 450 410 260 Income Subscriptions less received in
advance add accrued due for Year 4 £ 7,150 280 6,870 360 7,230 180
1,260 275
Annual dance – surplus 1,535 955 7,410
7,410
5 Point out that a common mistake made by candidates is that they confuse this
account with the Receipts & Payments Account. Stress that income is entered on the
credit side of Income & Expenditure Account and expenditure on the debit side, as
they are in the Profit & Loss Account. 6 Subscriptions Highlight the fact that in
the above account, it is acceptable merely to state ‘7,230’ against subscriptions
without any detail of adjustments. However, the students should be warned that this
method is unwise. Examiners like to award marks for correct workings, if possible.
If only the adjusted figure is given with no indication of the adjustments made and
that figure is incorrect, then no marks for workings can be awarded. An alternative
to showing adjustments within the Income & Expenditure Account is to key the
adjusted figures to workings shown clearly after the account.This practice can, of
course, be applied to other workings and is discussed further in Lesson 25. 7
Events Clubs or societies may hold events or have special occasions, eg a dance, a
social, a day out, or a trip abroad.These events may be aimed at raising funds.The
outcome may be a surplus, which can boost club funds, or it may be a deficit where
expenditure exceeds income.These events might involve 2 or even 3 items that are
classified as partly income and partly expenditure. The members would be interested
in the result of any particular event, ie whether a surplus or a deficit. It is
therefore essential that these items are brought together, ie ‘grouped’. If the
outcome is a deficit, the group should be positioned on the debit side; if a
surplus, the group should be on the credit side. Candidates often fail to position
groups correctly and consequently lose marks.
192
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 193
In the example on page 192, surplus on the annual dance is recorded as one entry
only in the trial balance, ie it is shown as the outcome.This entry could have been
shown as 2 or more items. The best practice is for the students to develop the
habit of looking for appropriate groupings when presented with a question
concerning Income & Expenditure Accounts.The exercises in this lesson provide the
opportunity for practice. 8 With reference to the Income & Expenditure Account
above, draw attention to use of the phrase ‘surplus of income over expenditure’.
For Income & Expenditure Accounts, this phrase replaces the term ‘net profit’ found
in Profit & Loss Accounts. If expenditure exceeds income, the phrase to use is
‘deficit, excess of expenditure over income’, not ‘net loss’. 9 Copy and hand out
or show exercise T/24.1 in the Appendix (page 307) on the overhead projector. Ask
the students to work through the exercise.
Step 3
Aim: to be able to present subsidiary income and expense information suitably and
effectively 1 The presentation of subsidiary income and expense information has
been referred to in Step 2. Explain that this can be taken a stage further by using
a separate account to deal specifically with a club or society’s trading
activities. The examination might require a separate Trading Account to carry the
trading activities. The Trading Account should reach a profit or loss on trading
which is then transferred to the Income & Expenditure Account.A common and major
mistake made by candidates is to fail to carry the trading profit or loss into the
Income & Expenditure Account or else to repeat the items already included in the
Trading Account in the Income & Expenditure Account. Set out the correct sequence
of the effect of trading and other activities:
Trading Account £ Trading expenditure Profit on trading c/d Trading income X1
Income & Expenditure Account £ Various expenditure items Surplus of income over
expenditure Profit on trading b/d X3 £ X2 £
2 Copy and hand out or show exercise T/24.2* in the Appendix (page 308) on the
overhead projector.Work through the exercise with the students. Stress that with
T/24.2 capital expenditure items are not included in the account.
193
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 194
The item ‘subscriptions’ might involve making a number of adjustments.This

situation occurs in exercise T/24.3* in the Appendix (page 310), which also
involves the preparation of a separate Trading Account.Ask the students to work
through the exercise. Note Advise the students to follow the requirements of the
question closely. A separate Trading Account should be provided in an examination
answer only if it is specifically required. Some candidates prepare one when it is
not required – and forfeit marks by preparing it incorrectly.
Step 4
Aim: to be able to calculate the accumulated fund of a club or society 1 Explain
that instead of a Capital Account, a non-profit-making organization has an
‘accumulated fund’. Like a Capital Account, the fund represents the difference
between assets and liabilities.Therefore,
assets = capital + liabilities
is replaced by
assets = accumulated fund + liabilities
2 Illustrate how to calculate an accumulated fund by showing the following example

on the board or overhead projector. Example The following receipts and payments
account has been prepared for the Bloxmore Travel Group for the year ended 31
December Year 5:
Receipts Balance at bank Cash in hand Subscriptions for Year 5 Interest on bank
account Subscriptions for Year 6 £ 1,020 48 2,760 32 75 Payments £ Refreshments 182
Rent of room 1,680 Travelling expenses 64 Postage, printing and stationery 53
Expenses for guest speakers 810 Hire of films 78 Cash in hand 82 Balance at bank
986 3,935
3,935
Additional information:
31 December Year 4 £ – 40 18 31 December Year 5 £ 60 50 15
Subscriptions in arrears Rent accrued due Stock of stationery
194
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 195
The calculation of the accumulated fund at 1 January Year 5 is as follows:

Balance at bank Cash in hand Stock of stationery less Rent accrued £ 1,020 48 18
1,086 40 1,046 £
3 Ask the students to prepare the Income & Expenditure Account for Bloxmore Travel
Group in vertical format for the year ended 31 December Year 5. This Income &
Expenditure Account is shown below.
Bloxmore Travel Group Income & Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December
Year 5 Income Subscriptions add accrued due Year 5 Interest on bank account £ 2,760
60 £ 2,820 32 2,852
less Expenditure Refreshments 182 Rent of room (1,680 - 40 + 50) 1,690 Travelling
expenses 64 Postage, printing and stationery (53 + 18 - 15) 56 Expenses for guest
speakers 810 Hire of films 78 Excess of expenditure over income (deficit)
2,880 (28)
Step 5
Aim: to be able to present a balance sheet of a club or society 1 As a
straightforward example, work through the balance sheet for Bloxmore Travel Group
(overleaf) with the students. Carefully explain each item.
195
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 196
Bloxmore Travel Group Balance sheet at 31 December Year 5 Current assets Stock of
stationery Subscriptions accrued due Bank balance Cash in hand less Amounts due
within 1 year Rent accrued due Subscriptions received for Year 6 £ 15 60 986 82 £
1,143
50 75
125 1,018
Accumulated fund Balance at 1 Jan Yr 5 less Deficit for Yr 5
1,046 28 1,018
2 Refer the students to the example in Step 2 (pages 191–2). The items not yet
marked off should be brought into the balance sheet for Tattenham Sports Club at 31
December Year 4.The balance sheet is presented below in vertical format.
Tattenham Sports Club Balance sheet at 31 December Year 4 Cost £ 6,300 2,200 8,500
Accumulated depreciation £ 3,660 1,075 4,735 360 80 1,860 2,300 400 280 Net book
value £ 2,640 1,125 3,765
Fixed Assets Sports equipment Video equipment Current Assets Subscriptions accrued
due Prepaid insurance Bank less Amounts due within 1 year Rent Subscriptions in
advance
680 1,620 5,385
Financed by: Accumulated fund add Surplus of income over expenditure
4,430 955 5,385
3 Refer the students back to exercise T/24.1 and ask them to prepare the balance
sheet of the Southern Jazz Club.
196
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 197
Step 6
Aim: to be able to record correctly amounts received by a club or society through
donations Explain that a donation is a gift of money to an organization.There are
two ways in which a donation can be recorded in the books of account: (a) as income
in the Income & Expenditure Account; (b) by adding the amount to the accumulated
fund in the balance sheet, ie ‘capitalizing’ it. If the amount is small it is more
likely, that method (a) will be used. Note In any examination question involving a
donation, the candidates will be told if it is to be capitalized. If there is no
specific instruction, the amount should be placed to the credit of Income &
Expenditure Account.
197
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 198
Lesson 25: The presentation of answers

This lesson is devoted to bringing together points regarding the layout and
presentation of examination answers. It is often evident that candidates understand
the subject matter of a question but throw away vital marks by overlooking or
disregarding key points of presentation. Attention to the appearance of the answers
could well make all the difference between an overall fail or pass. A number of
matters are highlighted, regarding presentation, that could be introduced into the
course at appropriate stages.These points can be particularly related to the
requirements of worked questions. However, it is advisable to reinforce them for
the concluding stages of the course and when finally helping the students to
prepare for the examination itself. 1 Ledger accounts The correct description must
be shown for each debit and credit entry.The rule is that this should be the name
of the related account, ie where the double entry is completed. Whenever possible,
the date should be included as part of an entry.When balancing an account, the
double entry should be completed by bringing down the balance.The date shown should
be the first day of the next accounting period. 2 Layout of final accounts For the
Trading and Profit & Loss Account and balance sheet, vertical presentation is
purely optional and the students will not lose marks by using horizontal layout.
However, the balance sheet, in particular, can often be presented more effectively
in vertical format. 3 The difference between an account and a statement This
difference needs to be fully stressed. If a statement is required, it must not be
presented in account form. For an example of a statement, see ‘Andy Struddles:
revised stock valuation at 31 December Year 3’ in Lesson 23, page 185. A suitable
heading should always be provided for a statement. Where an account is specified as
being required, it must be in proper account format with debit and credit. Running
balance format is usually acceptable, as long as the debit and credit columns are
clearly marked with Dr and Cr respectively, and the cumulative (updated) balance is
clearly shown as well (either Dr or Cr). Vertical presentation of a Trading and
Profit & Loss Account effectively becomes a statement, but that is acceptable.The
balance sheet is a statement anyway. 4 Presentation in columns (‘columnar
presentation’) The 3-column Cash Book is probably the most familiar example.This
should be shown in the recognized sequence as follows:
198
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 199
The presentation of answers
Dr Discount allowed £
Cr Cash £ Bank £ Discount received £ Cash £ Bank £
Another example could be as follows:

Year 1 A B C Year 2 Year 3
A question might specify this layout. If so, an answer should keep to the
instructions and not show something totally different, as may sometimes be the
case. 5 Workings Workings should be clearly shown. They should not be unnecessarily
complicated. Thus, if an adjustment is made to the figure of ‘rent payable’ in the
Profit & Loss Account, it is sufficient to show the adjustment as follows:
Rent payable (16,000 - 2,400) £ 13,600
The examiner can spot the working straightaway instead of having to search it out
at a more distant point. If, however, the adjustment of an item has to be more
complicated, workings (W1 W2 and so on) should be shown underneath the main account
but ‘keyed’ to it, eg:
Profit & Loss Account £ W1 Rent & rates Various other entries 12,130 X X X X Net
profit X X W1 X X X X X Gross profit b/d X £
199
pages 158-200
15/3/03
11:17 am
Page 200
The presentation of answers
6 Spacing The spacing of examination answers often leaves much to be desired.

Sometimes work is crammed together within the first 3 or so pages of the answer
book and becomes difficult to read. Sensible spacing comes with practice and some
guidance. Where work is cancelled, it should be struck through with a bold diagonal
line. If part of the answer is shown later on in the answer book, the earlier stage
of the answer should clearly signal the fact. Work often lacks legibility because
candidates use too light a shade of ink. Dark blue or black inks are strongly
recommended. Pencil should never be used to write answers to questions in this
examination.
200
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 201
Appendix 1: Exercises, some worked solutions, and support material

T/1.1
State the effect on a balance sheet of each of the following transactions, in each
case stating which assets and/or liabilities are affected. (1) Purchase of goods by
cheque £350. (2) Sale of goods for cash £290. (3) Purchase of office furniture from
D Jackson on credit £318. (4) Repayment by cheque of £1,500, previously borrowed
from T Walls. (5) The receipt of a cheque for £965 from a debtor, F Wiles. (6)
Purchase of postage stamps for £11 in cash. (7) Payment by cheque of £617, due to T
Gates, creditor.
T/1.2
State the effect on a balance sheet of selling a computer for £3,600: (i) if the
purchaser paid by cheque; (ii) if it were sold on credit; (iii) if £2,000 were paid
by cheque on account and if the remainder were on credit.
T/1.3
Draw up A Grant’s complete balance sheet from the following incomplete data at 31
March Year 4, including any missing items:
Creditors Goods Debtors Cash at bank Loan from J Tesco Motor vehicle Office
equipment Fixtures and fittings £ 3,970 5,160 4,250 2,380 3,500 5,600 3,400 2,870
201
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 202
Appendix 1: Exercises
T/1.4
Enter the following transactions into the accounts of K Morgan:
Year 8 1 Aug 3 Aug 7 Aug 12 Aug 16 Aug 19 Aug 25 Aug 28 Aug 30 Aug Started business
with £15,000 in cash Transferred £14,200 of the cash into a newly opened business
bank account Bought goods on credit from B Fury for £760 Bought office furniture,
for £390, paid by cheque Sold for cash £125-worth of goods that had cost the same
amount Purchased a lease on premises, for £8,200 paid by cheque Bought stationery
for £27 in cash Paid B Fury the amount owing Received from N Lawson a cheque for
£2,000, as a loan to the business
T/1.5
R Lines has the following items in his balance sheet on 31 October Year 3:
Cash at bank Debtors Goods Creditors Motor vehicle Office equipment Fixtures and
fittings Loan from T Clasp £ 1,615 3,740 4,850 2,860 6,400 4,100 2,200 4,000
During November Year 3, R Lines:

● ● ● ●
banked cheques received from debtors, amounting to £2,900; paid creditors £2,060 by
cheque; bought goods on credit for £1,300; sold on credit goods that had cost
£1,450 for the same amount.
Required Prepare the balance sheet of R Lines at: (i) 31 October Year 3 (ii) 30
November Year 3.
202
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 203
T/2.1
Beside each of the details in the table, state: (i) the name of the account to be
debited; (ii) the name of the account to be credited.
Account debited (1) Bought goods on credit from T Ball (2) Sold goods for cash (3)
Weighing equipment for use in the business bought by cheque (4) Returned some of
the goods previously bought from T Ball (5) Sold goods on credit to D Trill (6)
Some furniture for use in the business bought on credit from T Doyle Account
credited
T/2.2
Beside each of the details in the table, state: (i) the name of the account to be
debited; (ii) the name of the account to be credited.
Account debited (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Sold goods on credit to A Darby A Brittle,
debtor, returns goods A Darby pays his account by cheque Goods are returned to T
Zuck, creditor The account of F Lane, a creditor, is paid by cheque A Darby returns
some of the goods previously sold to him Account credited
T/2.3
You are required to enter the transactions of B Lancaster in the appropriate
accounts.
Year 9 2 Jan 5 Jan 9 Jan 13 Jan 16 Jan 22 Jan 25 Jan 27 Jan 30 Jan Commenced
business with £15,000 in the bank Bought goods from T Minott on credit for £620
Bought office equipment by cheque for £940 Sold goods to R Lake on credit for £370
R Lake returned goods worth £80 Sent cheque for £350 to T Minott on account
Returned goods worth £120, to T Minott Sold goods for £90 in cash Purchased goods
from T Marner on credit for £430
203
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 204
T/2.4
You are required to enter the transactions of R Quarnby in the appropriate
accounts.
Year 5 3 Sep 6 Sep 8 Sep 11 Sep 13 Sep 17 Sep 20 Sep 24 Sep 27 Sep 29 Sep Bought
goods from A Little on credit for £846 Sold goods for £73 in cash Bought motor
vehicle by cheque for £4,300 Sold goods to H Keen on credit for £380 H Keen
returned goods worth £83 Returned goods to A Little worth £143 Received cheque for
£60 from H Keen on account Bought office furniture by cheque for £365 Sent cheque
to A Little in settlement of account Sold goods to J Strong on credit for £412
T/3.1
In the column beside each of the details in the table, state which account is to be
debited and which account is to be credited.
Account debited (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Bought goods for cash Paid creditor the
amount owing by cheque Bought office equipment on credit from Office Services Ltd
Paid rent in cash Sold goods for cash F Tracey, debtor, paid her account by cheque
Account credited
T/3.2
In the column beside each of the details in the table, state which account is to be
debited and which account is to be credited.
Account debited (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Received cheque from T Ward as a loan
Sold goods on credit to J King Paid telephone account by cheque Sold office
furniture for cash Paid insurance by cheque Bought goods on credit from R Veal A
customer, B Trent, returned goods Account credited
204
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 205
T/3.3
Record the following in accounts:
Year 5 1 Jul 3 Jul 7 Jul 9 Jul 11 Jul 12 Jul 14 Jul 16 Jul 19 Jul 20 Jul 22 Jul 25
26 28 30 31 Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Jen Ling started in business with £17,000 in a new
bank account Purchased goods from K Merrit on credit for £620 Returned goods to K
Merrit worth £45 Paid rent by cheque for £310 Drew £130 from bank for office cash
Bought office furniture by cheque for £420 Sold goods to T Larkspur on credit for
£560 T Larkspur returned goods worth £65 Purchased stationery for £34 in cash Sold
goods for £370, paid by cheque Bought a computer for use in the business for £3,500
from Comtec Ltd, £1,000 of which was paid by cheque, with the remainder on credit.
Drew from bank £360 in cash for office Paid wages in cash, £330 Sold goods to T
Larkspur for £850 on credit Received cheque from T Larkspur for the amount owing on
17 July Year 5 Paid insurance by cheque for £270
T/3.4
Record the following in accounts:
Year 3 1 Oct 2 Oct 4 Oct 7 Oct 9 Oct Choi Wing started in business with £21,000 in
cash Paid £19,000 cash into a newly opened business bank account Purchased goods
from N Tucker on credit for £850 Bought office furniture by cheque for £930 Bought
a fax machine for use in the business for £2,500 from Oftech Ltd, £1,000 of which
was paid by cheque with the remainder of the account on credit Returned goods worth
£70 to N Tucker Paid wages in cash, £150 Sold goods to K Francis on credit for £590
Paid insurance by cheque for £280 Choi Wing drew £350 from bank for private use
Purchased stationery for £210 in cash K Francis returned goods worth £80 Bought
goods from B Minott on credit for £380 Sold to A Jenkins some office furniture
bought for £200 on 7 October: received a cheque for £30, with the balance of £170
on credit Sent cheque to N Tucker to settle the account Paid wages in cash, £180
Received cheque from K Francis in settlement of the amount owing Choi Wing drew
£430 from bank for private use Sold goods on credit to R Flinn for £360
10 12 13 14 16 18 20 21 22 24 26 28 30 31
Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct
205
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 206
T/4.1
(a) Balance the following account:
Ching Wong Year 4 6 May Returns outwards £ 80 Year 4 2 May Purchases 9 May
Purchases 17 May Purchases £ 730 315 250
(b) How would you describe the balance you have just entered?
T/4.2
Enter the following into debtor and creditor accounts only. Balance each account at
31 October Year 3 and bring down the balances.
Year 3 2 Oct 6 Oct 9 Oct 12 Oct 15 Oct 18 Oct 20 Oct 21 Oct 23 Oct 26 Oct 27 Oct 29
Oct Bought goods from F Swain on credit for £480 Sold goods to N Knight on credit
for £215 Returned goods to F Swain that had cost £62 Bought goods from A Hinter on
credit for £390 N Knight returned goods which she had bought on 6 October for £45
Returned goods to A Minter that had cost £65 Received cheque for £80 from N Knight
in part payment Sold goods to W Mull on credit for £535 Sent cheque for £418 to F
Swain W Mull returned goods that he had bought on 21 October for £90 Sold goods to
N Knight on credit for £383 Received cheque for £70 on account from W Mull
206
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 207
T/4.3
This bank account is an example of running balance format.
Bank account Year 7 1 Mar 4 Mar 7 Mar 11 Mar 14 Mar 18 Mar 20 Mar 23 Mar 25 Mar 26
Mar 28 Mar 30 Mar 31 Mar Debit £ Balance Insurance Sales Drawings Purchases Wages
Sales Machine repairs L Logan Wages Sales Rent Balance Credit £ 300 740 200 450 300
860 700 570 380 920 450 Balance £ 1,316 1,016 1,756 1,556 1,106 806 1,666 966 1,536
1,156 2,076 1,626 1,626
Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr Dr
Note The above is not a representation of statements issued by banks to their

customers. It is of an account drawn up and maintained by the customer.
T/4.4
The following transactions are to be entered in (two-sided) accounts:
Year 5 1 Apr 2 Apr 5 Apr 9 Apr 12 Apr 14 Apr 16 Apr 18 Apr 21 Apr 24 Apr 25 Apr 28
Apr 30 Apr Chan Lee commenced business with £12,000 in cash Transferred £11,000 in
cash into a bank account Purchased goods from D Styles on credit for £830 Bought
office furniture for £250 in cash Sold goods to S Wick on credit for £570 Returned
goods worth £75 to D Styles Paid rent by cheque for £350 Purchased office
stationery for £30 in cash Chan Lee made drawings in cash for £140 Paid insurance
by cheque for £170 Sold goods to S Wick on credit for £490 Purchased goods from D
Styles on credit for £560 Sent cheque to D Styles for £755
207
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 208
T/4.5
Against each of the listed items, tick ( ) either the debit column or the credit
column according to which side of the trial balance you would expect the item to
appear.
Debit Office equipment Creditors Insurance Cash Rent payable Debtors Sales Rent
receivable Drawings Motor vehicle Loan from F Lang Capital Wages Premises Credit
T/4.6
On 30 June Year 4, D Lamb had the following account balances:
Debtors Creditors Rent Motor vehicle Loan from A Green General expenses Purchases
Sales Cash at bank Wages Drawings Fixtures and fittings Capital £ 2,530 3,670 1,400
5,300 2,500 1,040 3,650 5,980 7,900 2,740 420 6,800 19,630
Required Prepare the trial balance of D Lamb at 30 June Year 4.
208
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 209
T/5.1*
(a) The following details relate to K Fox for the year ended 30 September Year 3:
Sales Cost of goods sold Running expenses £ 15,800 8,500 4,300
Required A statement relating to K Fox showing the following for the year ended 30
September Year 3: (i) gross profit (ii) total net profit. (b) The following
information is available relating to R Lott in respect of the year ended 31
December Year 2:
Sales Income from other than trading Cost of goods sold Running expenses £ 26,900
1,200 9,300 12,400
Required Prepare a statement relating to R Lott showing the following for the year
ended 31 December Year 2: (i) gross profit (ii) total net profit.
T/5.1/A
(a)
K Fox Income and profit for the year ended 30 September Year 3 Sales less Cost of
goods sold Gross profit less Running expenses Net profit £ 15,800 8,500 £
7,300 4,300 3,000
209
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 210
(b)
R Lott Income and profit for the year ended 31 December Year 2 Sales less Cost of
goods sold Gross profit add Non-trading income less Running expenses (Total) Net
profit £ 26,900 9,300 £
17,600 1,200 18,800 12,400 6,400
Note The above are statements – not accounts.
T/5.2
T Avis Trial balance at 31 December Year 5 Dr £ 5,160 750 910 700 360 420 450 800
1,600 1,040 50 800 11,680 4,000 11,680 Cr £ 6,320
Purchases Sales Debtors Creditors Rent payable Office expenses Lighting and heating
Rent receivable Fixtures and fittings Motor vehicle Cash at bank Cash in office
Drawings Capital
Note It is assumed that T Avis started in business on 1 January Year 5 by placing

£4,000 in a business bank account.Therefore, there is no opening stock. Stock at 31
December Year 5 was valued at cost at £2,100.This figure is due to be brought into
the accounts of TAvis after the agreement of the trial balance.
210
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 211
T/5.3
At the end of her first year’s trading, Shui Ling drafted the following trial
balance.You are required to draw up a Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the
year ended 31 December Year 4.
Shui Ling Trial balance at 31 December Year 4 Dr £ 19,800 3,960 7,510 3,680 2,100
3,700 12,400 390 5,400 520 3,800 4,300 65,460 31,000 65,460 Cr £ 32,360
Purchases Sales Cash at bank Wages Debtors Creditors Rent Motor vehicles Insurance
Office equipment General expenses Fixtures and fittings Drawings Capital
Shui Ling valued her stock at 31 December Year 4 at cost at £4,650. Note A balance
sheet is not required.
211
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 212
T/5.4
The following is the trial balance of Fred Trotter after his first year’s trading.
You are required to draw up a Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended
30 June Year 8.
Fred Trotter Trial balance at 30 June Year 8 Dr £ 2,080 2,600 9,200 3,100 36,440
15,100 59,400 3,600 1,620 38,500 4,300 570 390 117,500 53,000 117,500 Cr £
Cash at bank and in office Rent Motor vehicles Debtors Creditors Purchases Wages
Sales Fixtures and fittings Sundry expenses Premises Drawings Lighting and heating
Insurance Capital
5,100
Stock at 30 June Year 8 was valued at £4,220. Note A balance sheet is not required.
T/6.1*
From the following details you are required to draw up a complete balance sheet for
Sai Yoon at 31 October Year 7, including any item that you believe to be
missing.The balance sheet should be in the correct format.
Loan from T Gaul, repayable 31 December Year 9, £4,000 Stock £3,980 Premises
£42,000 Bank £3,130 Motor vehicle £7,100 Cash £110 Creditors £7,120 Debtors £7,800
Fixtures and fittings £2,750
212
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 213
T/6.1/A
Sai Yoon Balance sheet at 31 October Year 7 £ Fixed Assets Premises Fixtures and
fittings Motor vehicle Capital 42,000 2,750 7,100 51,850 Amount due in more than 1
year Loan: T Gaul, repayable 31 Dec Yr 9 Amount due within 1 year Creditors £
55,750
4,000 7,120
Current Assets Stock Debtors Bank Cash
£ 3,980 7,800 3,130 110
15,020 66,870
66,870
T/6.2*
With reference to the data in T/5.3 and the answer to it, draw up a balance sheet
for Shui Ling at 31 December Year 4.
T/6.2/A
Shui Ling Balance sheet at 31 December Year 4 £ Fixed Assets Fixtures and fittings
Office equipment Motor vehicles 3,800 5,400 12,400 21,600 £ Capital Commencing
balance add Net profit 5,090 less Drawings 4,300 £ 31,000 790 31,790
£ Current Assets Stock Debtors Bank 4,650 3,680 3,960 Amount due within 1 year
Creditors
12,290 33,890
2,100 33,890
213
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 214
T/6.3*
By reference to the data of T/5.4 and the answer to it, draw up a balance sheet for
Fred Trotter at 30 June Year 8.
T/6.3/A
Fred Trotter Balance sheet at 30 June Year 8 £ Fixed Assets Premises Fixtures and
fittings Motor vehicles 38,500 3,600 9,200 51,300 Capital Balance at 1 Jul Yr 7 add
Net profit less Drawings £ £ 53,000 6,900 4,300 2,600 55,600
Current Assets £ Stock Debtors Bank 4,220 3,100 2,080 Amount due within 1 year
Creditors
9,400 60,700
5,100 60,700
T/6.4*
(a) The ledger of Alison Sharpe includes the following balances at 30 September
Year 4:
Debtors Motor vehicle Stock Cash at bank Cash in office Creditors Loan from T
Wylie, repayable 30 Jun Yr 7 Fixtures and fittings £ 3,640 2,100 4,080 1,970 60
2,940 2,000 980
Required Prepare a balance sheet for Alison Sharpe at 30 September Year 4, complete
with the balance of capital, which has not been shown above. (b) On 1 October Year
4, Alison Sharpe purchased another motor vehicle for business use for £2,600. She
paid T Rolt £400 by cheque and the remainder of the amount was on credit.
214
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 215
Required (i) In ledger accounts, record the entries for the transaction. (ii) State
which one of the following effects this transaction will have: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
an increase of current assets by £2,600 a decrease of current assets by £2,600 a
decrease of current assets by £400 no effect on current assets an increase of
current assets by £2,200.
T/6.4/A
(a)
Alison Sharpe Balance sheet at 30 September Year 4 £ Fixed Assets Fixtures and
fittings Motor vehicle Capital 980 2,100 Amount due in more than 1 year Loan – T
Wylie (repayable 30 Jun Yr 7) £ 7,890
2,000
3,080 £ Current Assets Stock 4,080 Debtors 3,640 Bank 1,970 Cash 60
Amount due within 1 year Creditors 9,750 12,830 Motor Vehicle
2,940
12,830
(b) (i)
Year 4 1 Oct 1 Oct Balance Bank and T Rolt
£ 2,100 2,600 Bank
Year 4 1 Oct
Balance
£ 1,970 T Rolt
Year 4 1 Oct
£ Motor vehicle 400
Year 4 1 Oct
Motor vehicle
£ 2,200
(ii) Answer = (3) a decrease of current assets by £400
215
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 216
T/7.1
Prepare a Trading and Profit & Loss Account for Lui Man for the year ended 31
December Year 6 from the following details:
Purchases Sales Returns outwards Returns inwards Carriage inwards Carriage outwards
Wages General expenses Stock at 31 Dec Yr 6 £ 15,460 31,970 840 1,250 860 1,030
8,460 1,270 2,790
Note Year 6 was Lui Man’s first year of trading.
T/7.2
T Avis Trial balance at 31 December Year 6 Dr £ 9,260 430 1,170 1,750 1,100 590 610
450 480 340 380 900 1,600 1,230 70 2,100 1,100 21,020 5,430 21,020 Cr £ 13,050
Purchases Sales Carriage inwards Debtors Creditors Rent payable Office expenses
Lighting and heating Rent receivable Returns inwards Returns outwards Carriage
outwards Fixtures and fittings Motor vehicle Cash at bank Cash in office Stock at 1
Jan Yr 6 Drawings Capital
Stock at 31 December Year 6 was valued at £2,450.
216
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 217
T/7.3
Using the following information, draw up a Trading and Profit & Loss Account for
Chea Yee for the year ended 31 May Year 4:
Stock at 31 May Yr 3 Purchases Sales Returns outwards Returns inwards Carriage
outwards Wages Sundry expenses Stock at 31 May Year 4 £ 27,380 143,700 231,600 980
1,540 4,950 53,200 3,860 25,300
T/7.4
From the following information, draw up a Trading and Profit & Loss Account for G
Crumb for the year ended 31 October Year 7:
Sales Returns outwards Stock at 31 Oct Yr 6 Rent payable Carriage outwards
Purchases Returns inwards Rent receivable Wages Lighting and heating Carriage
inwards Office expenses Stock at 31 Oct Yr 7 £ 68,890 570 7,640 2,800 760 49,620
980 1,200 8,030 540 1,010 390 7,960
217
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 218
T/7.5: The end-of-year procedure

Purchases Sales Returns outwards Returns inwards Opening stock Closing stock
Trading Account
Gross profit to Profit & Loss Account
Expense accounts Other income accounts
Profit & Loss Account
Net profit to Capital Account
Drawings Account
Capital Account
Cash/bank account(s) Debtor/creditor accounts Asset accounts
Balanced, ie balances c/d on each account
Balance sheet
218
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 219
T/7.6
From the following trial balance of T Brackwell, prepare a Trading and Profit &
Loss Account for the year ended 31 July Year 8, together with a balance sheet at
that date.
T Brackwell Trial balance at 31 July Year 8 Dr £ 177,500 13,200 3,900 5,750 4,500
53,650 4,300 5,100 24,960 29,500 1,340 194 110,000 16,394 26,000 23,000 11,200
462,344 157,400 462,344 Cr £ 256,800
Purchases Sales Stock at 1 Aug Yr 7 Returns inwards Returns outwards Rent payable
Wages Lighting and heating Sundry expenses Debtors Equipment Bank Cash Premises
Creditors Loan from T Royal, repayable 31 Jul Yr 13 Motor vehicles Drawings Capital
Stock at 31 July Year 8 was valued at £14,400.
219
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 220
T/8.1*
Philip Wilshaw, a sole trader, uses the following accounts in his books: Fixtures
and fittings Rent Motor vans Light and heat J Symes, a creditor Purchases Sales
Stock T P Stanley, a debtor Bank Capital Drawings Required Set out the following
headings:
Account Type of account To be found in the following ledger
List under the heading ‘Account’ each of the accounts given above, fill in the
column ‘Type of account’ and, in the last column, state the ledger in which you
would find the account.
T/8.1/A
Account Fixtures and fittings Rent Motor vans Light and heat J Symes, a creditor
Purchases Sales Stock T P Stanley, a debtor Bank Capital Drawings Type of account
Real Nominal Real Nominal Personal Nominal Nominal Real Personal Real Personal
Personal To be found in the following ledger General (or Nominal) General (or
Nominal) General (or Nominal) General (or Nominal) Purchases (or Bought) General
(or Nominal) General (or Nominal) General (or Nominal) Sales (or Debtors) Cash Book
Private or General Private or General
220
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 221
T/8.2*
Division of the ledger Sales Ledger Purchases Ledger General Ledger Private Ledger
(A) Type of account (B) Name of account
Required (a) In column (A), state the type of accounts you would expect to find in
each division of the ledger. (b) In column (B), against the General Ledger and
Private Ledger, name 3 accounts that might be included.
T/8.2/A
Division of the ledger Sales Ledger Purchases Ledger General Ledger Private Ledger
(A) Type of account Personal/customers (or debtors) Personal/suppliers (or
creditors) Impersonal: nominal or real Personal (private) (B) Name of account
Wages, sales, rent receivable, etc Capital Drawings Trading and Profit & Loss
T/8.3*
(a) Set out the following table. In the right-hand column, enter the name of the
ledger in which each of the accounts is recorded.
Name of account (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Drawings T Lucan, creditor Trading Rent
receivable Fixtures and fittings Wages Capital Name of ledger
(b) Suggest 3 ways in which the Sales Ledger might be subdivided.
221
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 222
T/8.3/A
(a)
Name of account (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Drawings T Lucan, creditor Trading Rent
receivable Fixtures and fittings Wages Capital Name of ledger Private or General
Purchases (or Bought) Private or General General (or Nominal) General (or Nominal)
General (or Nominal) Private or General
(b) Answers to ways of subdividing the Sales Ledger might include:

● ● ● ● ●
alphabetically, eg by customer names; numerically, in which customers are numbered

individually, then grouped; geographically, ie by sales areas; on a product basis,
ie according to product categories; by type of customer, eg trade as opposed to
private customers.
T/8.4
T Avis Balance sheet at 31 December Year 6 £ Fixed Assets Fixtures and fittings
Motor vehicle Current Assets Stock Debtors Bank Cash less Amounts due within 1 year
Creditors Net current assets Financed by: Capital – balance at 1 Jan Yr 6 add Net
profit less Drawings 5,430 1,340 1,100 240 5,670 £ 900 1,600 2,500 2,450 1,170
1,230 70 4,920 1,750 3,170 5,670
222
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 223
T/8.5*
From the following trial balance of J Penarth, prepare: (i) a Trading and Profit &
Loss Account for the year ended 30 April Year 8; (ii) a balance sheet, in vertical
format, at 30 April Year 8.
J Penarth Trial balance at 30 April Year 8 Dr £ 154,300 48,000 39,650 7,200 615
20,000 32,290 18,160 22,400 915 6,670 265 1,430 475 6,400 3,510 16,500 339,190
87,000 339,190 Cr £ 212,600
Purchases Sales Premises Stock at 1 May Yr 7 Rent Returns inwards Loan from R
Jenks, repayable Yr 12 Debtors Creditors Wages and salaries Carriage inwards Cash
at bank Cash in office Returns outwards Insurance Fixtures and fittings Carriage
outwards Drawings Capital
Stock at 30 April Year 8 was valued at £41,080.
223
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 224
T/8.5/A
(i)
J Penarth Trading and Profit & Loss Account For the year ended 30 April Year 8 £
Stock at 1 May Yr 7 Purchases add Carriage inwards 154,300 915 155,215 1,430
153,785 193,435 41,080 152,355 59,630 211,985 7,200 22,400 475 3,510 26,045 59,630
Gross profit b/d £ 39,650 Sales less Returns inwards £ 212,600 615 211,985
less Returns outwards less Stock at 30 Apr Yr 8 Cost of goods sold Gross profit c/d
211,985 59,630
Rent Wages and salaries Insurance Carriage outwards Net profit
59,630
(ii)
Balance sheet at 30 April Year 8 £ Fixed Assets Premises Fixtures and fittings
Current Assets Stock Debtors Bank Cash less Amounts due within 1 year Creditors Net
current assets less Amount due in more than 1 year Loan from R Jenks, repayable Yr
12 Financed by: Capital – at 1 May Yr 7 add Net profit less Drawings 87,000 26,045
16,500 9,545 96,545 £ 48,000 6,400 54,400 41,080 32,290 6,670 265 80,305 18,160
62,145 116,545 20,000 96,545
224
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 225
T/9.1: The journey of a ‘drawn’ cheque

Year 4 7 May T Royle (drawer) cheque sent to P Sempster (payee) receives cheque T
Royle credits bank account
P Sempster debits bank account pays cheque into account with
8 May
Derbyshire Bank Chester branch 9 May cheque sent to Derbyshire Bank clearance
centre sent (with other cheques) to 10 May Albion Bank clearance centre Albion Bank
York East branch charged against account of T Royle
10 May
11 May
The journey of a ‘drawn’ cheque:

● ●
the cheque is drawn by T Royle (an account holder at Albion Bank,York East branch);
the cheque is made payable to P Sempster (an account holder at Derbyshire Bank,
Chester branch).
Note The delay in clearance will increase if P Sempster (the payee) were to delay
paying the cheque into his account.
225
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 226
T/9.2
Multiple choice questions (1) Which of the following are true of bank current
accounts? (a) (b) (c) (d) The account must not be overdrawn. They provide the
facilities for regular banking. The transfer of funds requires the use of a cheque.
It may be shown in the books of the account holder as having a credit balance.
Choose the answer from the following: (a) and (b) (a) and (c) (b) and (c) (b) and
(d) (2) Which of the following are true of the standing-order method of payment?
(a) (b) (c) (d) It It It It is suited to payment of fixed amounts. requires the use
of a cheque. can be cancelled by the payer. gives the payee freedom to draw upon
the bank account of the debtor.
Choose the answer from the following: (a) and (b) (b) and (d) (a) and (c) (b) and
(c) (3) Which of the following are not true of the direct-debit method of payment?
(a) (b) (c) (d) It is unsuited to the payment of wages and salaries. Payments are
always at pre-stated intervals. It is suited to the payment of gas bills. It is not
intended for variable amounts.
Choose the answer from the following: (a) and (b) (a) and (c) (b) and (c) (b) and
(d)
226
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 227
T/9.3*
Chandran Yin had the following balances on 1 October Year 9:
£ Cash 96 Bank 387 (Dr)
During October Year 9, she had the following transactions:

Year 9 3 Oct 5 Oct 8 Oct 13 Oct 20 Oct 23 Oct 27 Oct Purchased stationery for £27
in cash Received cheque from L Tarne for £312 Paid T Womble £95 by cheque Sales for
£117 in cash Paid wages in cash, £87 Carriage outwards paid in cash, £32 Received
cheque from T Lyle, £134
Required Enter the balances and transactions in the 2-column Cash Book of Chandran
Yin and balance it at 31 October Year 9.
T/9.3/A
Chandran Yin CASH BOOK Year 9 1 Oct 5 Oct 13 Oct 27 Oct Cash £ 96 117 134 213 1 Nov
Balances b/d 67 833 738 Bank £ 387 312 Year 9 3 Oct 8 Oct 20 Oct 27 Oct 31 Oct Cash
£ 27 87 32 67 213 Bank £ 95
Balances b/d L Tarne Sales T Lyle
Stationery T Womble Wages Carriage outwards Balances c/d
738 833
227
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 228
T/9.4*
Record the following in the 2-column Cash Book of W Towcester and balance the
accounts at the end of the month:
Year 6 1 Apr 4 6 8 9 13 16 20 23 24 26 28 Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr
Apr Balances brought forward: Cash Bank (Dr) £ 162 930 240 470 58 400 190 80 235
360 340 45 283
Paid rent by cheque Cash sales Purchased stationery for cash Banked some office
cash Paid wages in cash Drew from bank for office cash Received cheque from N Vine
Sales for cash Banked some office cash Paid for cleaning in cash Sent cheque to B
Lines
T/9.4/A
W Towcester CASH BOOK Year 6 1 Apr 6 Apr 9 Apr 16 Apr 20 Apr 23 Apr 24 Apr Cash £
162 470 80 235 360 340 Bank £ 930 400 Year 6 4 Apr 8 Apr 9 Apr 13 Apr 16 Apr 24 Apr
26 Apr 28 Apr 30 Apr Cash £ Rent Stationery Bank C Wages Cash C Bank C Cleaning B
Lines Balances c/d 58 400 190 80 340 45 39 1,072 283 1,302 1,905 Bank £ 240
Balances b/d Sales Cash C Bank C N Vine Sales Cash C
1,072 1 May Balances b/d 39
1,905 1,302
228
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 229
T/9.5*
Prepare a 2-column Cash Book from the following transactions. Balance the Cash Book
at the end of the month.
Year 5 1 Nov 2 Nov 5 Nov 8 Nov 10 Nov 13 Nov 15 Nov 17 Nov 18 Nov 20 Nov 23 Nov 28
Nov 29 Nov F Swaine started in business with £12,000 in cash Placed £11,500 of cash
in a newly opened business bank account Bought motor vehicle for £4,200, paid by
cheque Sales for £860 in cash, which was banked the same day Paid wages in cash,
£270 Bought goods by cheque for £1,040 Paid carriage in cash, £43 Withdrew £130
from bank for office cash Paid wages in cash, £290 Received cheque from T Dart for
£315 Sales for £910 in cash, of which £700 was banked the same day F Swaine
withdrew £150 in cash for private use Paid F Glubb £460 by cheque
T/9.5/A
F Swaine CASH BOOK Year 5 1 Nov 3 Nov 8 Nov 17 Nov 20 Nov 23 Nov Cash £ 12,000 Bank
£ 11,500 860 130 210 315 700 Year 5 3 Nov 5 Nov 10 Nov 13 Nov 15 Nov 17 Nov 18 Nov
28 Nov 29 Nov 30 Nov Cash Bank £ £ 11,500 4,200 270 1,040 43 130 290 150 460 87
7,545 12,340 13,375
Capital Cash C Sales Bank C T Dart Sales
Bank C Motor vehicle Wages Purchases Carriage Cash C Wages Drawings F Glubb
Balances c/d
12,340 1 Dec Balances b/d 87
13,375 7,545
229
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 230
T/10.1
The following information relates to the business of J Mander:
Year 5 1 May Balances brought forward: Cash Bank (Dr) Debtors – – Creditors – – £
93 1,040 440 350 280 300
A Croft R Vine T Dole W Kone
11 May R Vine settled his account by cheque after deducting a 2% cash discount 13
May Purchased stationery for £56 in cash 18 May Settled the account of T Dole by
cheque number 136214, after deducting a 21/2% cash discount 21 May Paid insurance
by cheque number 136215 for £190 24 May A Croft settled his account by cheque,
after deducting a 21/2% cash discount 28 May Withdrew £80 from bank (cheque number
136216) for office cash 30 May Settled the account of W Kone by cheque number
136217, after deducting a 3% cash discount
Required Record these balances and transactions in the books of J Mander. Use a 3-
column Cash Book, ie which includes discount columns. Balance the Cash Book at 31
May Year 5 and post the totals of the discount columns to the General Ledger.
230
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 231
T/10.2
Thelma Cook keeps a 3-column Cash Book for her business. The following information
refers to the month of March Year 6:
Year 6 1 Mar 2 Mar 3 Mar 5 Mar 8 Mar 9 Mar 11 Mar 13 Mar 16 Mar 18 Mar 20 Mar 22
Mar 25 Mar 26 Mar 27 Mar 29 Mar 30 Mar 31 Mar 31 Mar 31 Mar 31 Mar Balances of cash
and bank were £106 and £3,214 (Dr) respectively Drew cheque number 10674, for rent
of £250 Sales totalled £1,050, of which £950 was banked on the same day Paid
cleaning expenses of £35 from cash Sales banked £1,680 Drew cheque number 10675,
for purchases costing £1,200 Drew cheque number 10676 for £150, to replenish office
cash Cash from sales totalling £1,800 was banked Paid postage of £50 from cash Drew
cheque number 10677 for £168, to pay a telephone bill Paid £128 for stationery from
cash Drew cheque number 10678 for £150, to replenish office cash Cash from sales
totalling £2,108 was banked Paid office expenses of £70 from cash Drew cheque
number 10679 for £2,000, to pay wages Income from sales totalled £2,200, of which
£2,000 was banked on the same day Drew cheque number 10680 for £106, to pay a gas
bill Drew cheque number 10681 for £855 payable to D Coyne, in settlement of a debt
of £900 Drew cheque number 10682 for £494 payable to F Cox, in settlement of a debt
of £520 Received cheque for £720 from S Britton, in settlement of an amount of £750
Received cheque for £1,160 from D F Pratt, in settlement of an amount of £1,210
Required Write up the 3-column Cash Book, bringing down the balances at 1 April
Year 6.
231
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 232
T/10.3
On 1 November Year 4, the Cash Book of T Jackson, a sole trader, showed a debit
balance of cash in hand of £34 and a credit balance on bank account of £287.
Jackson prepared the Cash Book by entering the cheque-book counterfoils directly
from the bank paying-in book and by entering from a record of movements of cash in
the office. For the month of November Year 4, these showed respectively: (1) Bank
paying-in book
7 12 19 24 29 Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov Cheque – K Lawton Cash banked Cheque – N West
Cash banked Cash banked £ 153 425 373 420 360
(2) Cheque-book counterfoils

8 14 18 22 26 Nov Nov Nov Nov Nov B Thwaites Electricity account T Smith Telephone
account C Lord £ 423 46 327 68 197
(3) Record of movements of cash

11 23 29 30 Nov Nov Nov Nov Cash sales Cash sales Cash sales Taken for personal use
£ 460 440 510 140
All these transactions were entered by Jackson. He then received the bank
statement, which showed the following additional items for November Year 4:
11 Nov 15 Nov 21 Nov 29 Nov Standing order payment: subscription to local trade
association £25 T Drummond, a debtor of Jackson, settled his account by credit
transfer £236 The account for servicing the heating system in Jackson’s office was
settled by direct debit £54 Jackson instructed the bank to pay monthly salary
direct into an employee’s bank account £340
Required Prepare the cash and bank columns of Jackson’s Cash Book for November Year
4, entering the information given in (1) to (3) above and balancing the cash and
bank columns.Then record the additional items obtained from the bank statement,
showing the final balance at the end of November. (LCCIEB)
232
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 233
T/10.4
Ket Rampalla owns a small catering business. On 1 May Year 11, there was a credit
balance of £345 in the bank column of his Cash Book. During May Year 11, he paid
the following cheques into his bank account:
Amount of cheque £ 242 83 156 95 Cash discount allowed £ 18 – 7 –
3 12 19 26
May May May May
Keston Services F Savage Quantell Ltd L Wright
He also paid the following amounts from cash sales into his bank account:
6 13 20 27 May May May May £ 585 614 603 526
He received the following remittances, which were paid directly into his bank
account:
14 May 22 May From Westerns Ltd From Dugard & Wells £ 180 76
During the month, he drew the following cheques:

In favour of 5 11 15 21 28 May May May May May Malata Foods Kentish Supplies
Ambrostic Dairies Kenton Electricals Malata Foods Amount of cheque £ 507 335 261 68
283 Cash discount received £ 25 – 8 – 14
In addition, the following took place:

(1) (2) (3) (4) 18 May 19 May 23 May 29 May Payment by direct debit to Wombles
Linen Services Bank charges Payment by standing order of annual subscription to
Caterers’ Association Bank interest charged £ 63 36 40 24
Required (a) Prepare the bank and discount columns of the Cash Book of Ket Rampalla
for May Year 11, in date order, and balance the Cash Book at 31 May. (b) Open the
ledger accounts and post the totals of the discount columns of the Cash Book.
Include in your answer the name of the ledger in which the posting would be made.
233
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 234
T/11.1
From the following details, you are to: (a) enter the transactions in the Sales Day
Book; (b) post the items to relevant accounts in the Sales Ledger; (c) record the
transfer to the Sales Account in the General Ledger at the end of the month.
Year 6 2 5 12 18 23 29 Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Aug Credit sales to F Dene T Marchant P
Drummond T Marchant F Dene S Field Invoice no 3,516 3,517 3,518 3,519 3,520 3,521 £
258 312 406 194 425 538
T/11.2
From the following details, you are to: (a) enter the items in the Sales Day Book;
(b) post the items to the relevant accounts in the Sales Ledger; (c) record the
transfer to the Sales Account in the General Ledger at the end of the month.
Year 6 4 9 15 22 26 Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Credit sales to J Burton W Thorne A Glenn J
Burton W Thorne Invoice no £ 5,839 5,840 5,841 5,842 5,843 List price £ 320 460 240
580 360 Trade discount % 121/2 15 71/2 20 121/2
234
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 235
T/11.3
From the following details, you are required to: (a) enter the items in the
Purchases Day Book; (b) post the items to the relevant accounts in the Purchases
Ledger; (c) record the transfer to the Purchases Account in the General Ledger at
the end of the month.
Year 8 3 8 12 17 24 29 Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Credit purchases from T Slocombe J
Barnaby K Linden R Tredgarth J Barnaby T Slocombe Invoice no* B361 1634 958 A179
2583 B398 List price £ 190 370 240 420 860 320 Trade discount % 10 20 121/2 20 25
15
* The invoice numbers are those provided by each supplier.
235
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 236
T/11.4
The Cash Book balances of Rachel McLeod at 30 June Year 2 were:
Cash £100 Bank £850 (Dr)
In July Year 2, she had the following transactions:

Date Year 2 2 Jul 4 Jul 6 Jul 7 Jul 10 Jul 11 Jul 13 Jul 15 Jul 18 Jul 20 Jul 21
Jul 23 24 28 29 30 Jul Jul Jul Jul Jul Details Drew cheque number 554 for telephone
expenses of £224 Paid sundry expenses in cash, £45 Cash sales of £750, £650 of
which was paid into the bank Drew cheque number 555 for electricity, £145 Drew
cheque number 556 for purchases, £650 Received cheque from J Royle for £880, in
settlement of a debt of £900 Cash sales totalled £80 Drew cheque number 557,
payable to N Henry for £480 to settle an account of £500 Cash sales totalled £440,
£400 of which was paid into the bank Paid travelling expenses in cash, £12 Drew
cheque number 558, payable to D Beckford for £240 to settle an account of £250 Drew
cheque number 559 for insurance, £442 Received and banked cheque from G Halle for
£360 in settlement of a debt of £370 Drew cheque number 560 for drawings of £400
Received and banked cheque from R Holden for £620 in settlement of a debt of £650
Cash sales totalling £950 were banked the same day
Required In Rachel McLeod’s Cash Book, enter the balances at 1 July Year 2 and the
transactions for the month of July, bringing down the balances at 1 August Year 2.
(LCCIEB)
236
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 237
T/12.1
From the following details, you are required to: (a) enter the transactions in: (i)
the Sales Day Book (ii) the Returns Inwards Day Book; (b) post to the relevant
accounts in the Sales Ledger; (c) show the transfers to the General Ledger.
Year 3 5 Dec 8 Dec 11 Dec 18 Dec 21 Dec 23 Dec 30 Dec Credit sales of £196 to S
Preen Credit sales of £430 to M Quant Goods worth £38 returned by S Preen Credit
sales of £287 to M Quant Goods worth £53 returned by M Quant Credit sales of £392
to R Robson Goods worth £61 returned by M Quant
T/12.2
From the following details, you are required to: (a) enter the transactions in: (i)
the Purchases Day Book (ii) the Returns Outwards Day book; (b) post to the relevant
accounts in the Purchases Ledger; (c) show the transfers to the General Ledger.
Year 6 3 May 7 May 12 May 19 May 24 May 28 May Credit purchases of £254 from L
Squires Credit purchases of £385 from N Neale Goods worth £37 returned to L Squires
Credit purchases of £138 from N Neale Goods worth £72 returned to N Neale Credit
purchases of £364 from T Roberts
237
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 238
T/12.3
From the following details, you are required to: (a) enter the transactions in the
Purchases, Sales, Returns Outwards and Returns Inwards Day Books; (b) post the
items to the personal accounts in the Purchases and Sales Ledgers; and (c) record
the transfer to appropriate accounts in the General Ledger at the end of October
Year 6.
Year 6 3 Oct 5 8 11 15 17 19 21 24 Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Oct Credit purchase
from R Varney, at a list price of £480, subject to a trade discount of 121/2%
Credit sale to K Petts at a list price of £420, subject to a trade discount of 15%
Returned goods to R Varney with a list price of £64 Credit sale to J Beaver at a
list price of £560, subject to a trade discount of 20% K Petts returned goods with
a list price of £120 Credit purchase of £296 from T Langton J Beaver returned goods
with a list price of £90 Credit sale to K Petts at a list price of £680, subject to
a trade discount of 20% Credit purchase from R Varney at a list price of £320,
subject to a trade discount of 15% Returned goods worth £37 to T Langton Returned
to R Varney, goods bought on 24 October Year 6 at a list price of £40
27 Oct 30 Oct
Note The entry about the returns to R Varney on 8 October refers back to the
purchase of 3 October, ie a discount rate of 12 1/2% must be applied to the
returns. The entry concerning returns to R Varney on 30 October is related to the
purchase on 24 October; therefore, a trade discount of 15% must be applied to the
returns.
238
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 239
T/12.4
During the month of January Year 4, Lung Kwok had the following transactions:
5 Jan 7 Jan 12 Jan 17 Jan 18 Jan 22 Jan 22 Jan 23 Jan 25 Jan 30 Jan Bought goods on
credit from T Brown with a list price of £720, subject to a trade discount of 25%
Sold goods on credit to B Stevens for £340, subject to a cash discount of 5%, if
paid within 10 days Bought goods from F Robins with a list price of £420, subject
to a trade discount of 20% and a cash discount of 5%, if paid within 14 days Sold
goods to J New for £580, subject to a trade discount of 25% and a cash discount of
3%, if paid within 10 days Paid cheque to F Robins, in full settlement, for goods
bought on 12 January Received cheque from J New, in full settlement, for goods sold
on 17 January Bought goods from P Harper with a list price of £840, subject to a
331/3% trade discount and a cash discount of 2 1/2%, if paid within 14 days Sold
goods to K Burton for £660 less a trade discount of 15% and a cash discount of 5%,
if paid within 10 days Paid cheque to T Brown, in full settlement, for goods bought
on 5 January Received cheque from B Stevens, in full settlement, for goods bought
on 7 January
Required (a) Enter the above transactions in Lung Kwok’s Purchases Day Book, Sales
Day Book and Purchases Returns Day Book and show the Cash Book entries. (b) Why do
traders allow cash discount?
239
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 240
T/12.5
T Riggan is a sole trader and has a sports goods shop. She regularly purchases
goods on credit. Each of her suppliers grants a trade discount of 5% if the value
of a transaction exceeds £2,000. She made the following credit purchases in May
Year 8:
Date 8 12 15 22 23 26 May May May May May May Supplier M Boyce B Jones C Smith S
Morris M Boyce C Smith Gross purchases value £ 3,000 1,800 4,200 3,700 1,800 1,200
During May, Riggan had to return some of the goods to her suppliers.The returns
were as follows:
Date 14 May 22 May 27 May * Supplier B Jones S Morris M Boyce* Gross purchases
value £ 300 500 200
relating to goods purchased on 23 May
M Boyce also offers a 2% cash discount if Riggan pays the account by the end of the
month. Riggan pays this account monthly to take advantage of the cash discount.
Required (a) Prepare the Purchases Day Book for May. (b) Prepare the Purchases
Account and the Purchases Returns Account for May, showing the transfer to the
Trading Account. (c) Prepare the personal account of M Boyce for the month of May.
Assume that there was a nil balance at the beginning of the month. (LCCIEB)
240
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 241
T/13.1*
On 1 January Year 4, the following were 3 of the account balances in E Parker’s
ledger:
Rent Insurance Advertising £ 230 Dr 65 Dr 110 Cr
During the year ended 31 December Year 4, he paid the following amounts by cheque:
31 28 31 31 31 30 Jan Feb May Aug Aug Sep Advertising Rent Rent Rent Insurance Rent
£ 110 460 690 690 180 250
Additional information: (1) The monthly rent was increased to £250 from 1 October
Year 4. (2) An advertising bill amounting to £85 had not been paid by 31 December
Year 4. (3) The insurance premium paid on 31 August Year 4 covered the year ended
31 August Year 5. Required Prepare accounts in the ledger of E Parker for the year
ended 31 December Year 4, for: (i) rent (ii) insurance (iii) advertising. Give
particular attention to dates, and show, in each account, the transfer to the
Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 4. (LCCIEB)
241
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 242
T/13.1/A
Rent Year 4 1 Jan 28 Feb 31 May 31 Aug 30 Sep 31 Dec £ Balance b/d Bank Bank Bank
Bank Balance c/d 230 460 690 690 250 500 2,820 Year 4 31 Dec Profit & loss £ 2,820
2,820 Year 5 1 Jan Insurance Balance b/d 500
Year 4 1 Jan Balance b/d 31 Aug Bank Year 5 1 Jan
£ 65 180 245 120
£ 125 120 245
Balance b/d
Advertising Year 4 31 Jan Bank 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 110 85 195 Year 4 1 Jan Balance
b/d 31 Dec Profit & loss Year 5 1 Jan £ 110 85 195 85
Balance b/d
242
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 243
T/13.2*
The following details are from the books of Melville & Co for the year ended 30
September Year 9:
Sales Purchases Stock at 1 Oct Yr 8 Stock at 30 Sep Yr 9 Wages and salaries Heating
and lighting Rent and rates Motor-vehicle expenses Office expenses £ 279,300
118,650 20,470 17,320 83,540 2,530 9,860 11,940 3,970
In addition, at 30 September Year 9:

● ● ● ● ●
wages and salaries owing amount to £620 rent payable accrued due, £250 rates
prepaid amount to £180 heating and lighting accrued due, £60 office stationery is
in stock amounting to £380.
Required Prepare for Melville & Co a Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year
ended 30 September Year 9.
T/13.2/A
Melville & Co Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 30 September
Year 9 Stock at 1 Oct Yr 8 Purchases less Stock at 30 Sep Yr 9 Cost of goods sold
Gross profit Wages and salaries (+620) Heating and lighting (+60) Rent and rates
(+250-180) Motor-vehicle expenses Office expenses (-380) Net profit £ 20,470
118,650 139,120 17,320 121,800 147,500 269,300 84,160 2,590 9,930 11,940 3,590
35,290 147,500 Sales £ 269,300
269,300 Gross profit b/d 147,500
147,500
243
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 244
T/13.3*
The following are details relating to N Tulloch’s Rent Payable Account:
Year 5 30 Jun 8 Sep 27 Nov Year 6 9 Apr Balance on the account of £300,
representing 2 months’ rent paid in advance Paid £450 by cheque, being rent for the
3 months ended 30 November Year 5 Paid £720 by cheque, being rent for the 4 months
ended 31 March Year 6
Paid £360 by cheque, being rent for the 2 months ended 31 May Year 6
Required Prepare for N Tulloch the Rent Payable Account for the year ended 30 June
Year 6. Balance the account at the year end and show the transfer to the Profit &
Loss Account.
T/13.3/A
N Tulloch Rent Payable Year 5 1 Jul Balance b/f 8 Sep Bank 27 Nov Bank Year 6 9 Apr
30 Jun £ 300 450 720 Year 6 30 Jun Profit & loss £ 2,010
Bank Balance c/d
360 180 2,010 1 Jul Balance b/d
2,010 180
The transfer to the Profit & Loss Account is calculated as:

5 months at 7 months at £ £150 = 750 £180 = 1,260 2,010
244
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 245
T/13.4*
Tan Lian, a sole trader, had the following account balances on 1 January Year 5:
Insurance Office expenses Rent payable £ 70 Dr 160 Dr 240 Cr
During Year 5, the following payments were made by cheque:

Year 5 26 Jan 9 Feb 25 Feb 12 Apr 8 Jun 25 Aug 6 Nov 11 Dec Office expenses:
purchase of stationery, £63 Rent for 4 months ended 31 March Year 5, £960 Insurance
for 6 months ended 31 August Year 5, £210 Office expenses, £92 Rent for 4 months
ended 31 July Year 5, £1,040 Insurance for 6 months ended 28 February Year 6, £240
Rent for 4 months ended 30 November Year 5, £1,040 Office expenses, £280
At 31 December Year 5, there was a stock of stationery valued at a cost of

£90.There was no further increase in the monthly charge for rent in December Year
5. Required Open the 3 accounts listed above and enter the transactions that
occurred in Year 5. Balance the accounts and make the appropriate transfers to the
Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 5.
245
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 246
T/13.4/A
Tan Lian Insurance Year 5 1 Jan Balance b/d 25 Feb Bank 25 Aug Bank Year 6 1 Jan £
70 210 240 520 80 Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 440 80 520 Check
profit & loss transfer: Jan–Feb 2 months 70 £35 per Mar–Aug 6 months 210 month Sep–
Dec 4 months 160* 440
  
Balance b/d
* £40 per month
Office Expenses Year 5 1 Jan 26 Jan 12 Apr 11 Dec Year 6 1 Jan Balance b/d Bank
Bank Bank £ 160 63 92 280 595 90 Rent Payable Year 5 9 Feb 8 Jun 6 Nov 31 Dec £
Bank Bank Bank Balance c/d 960 1,040 1,040 260 3,300 Year 5 1 Jan Balance b/d 31
Dec Profit & loss £ 240 3,060 Year 5 31 Dec Profit & loss 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 505
90
595
Balance b/d
3,300 Year 6 1 Jan
Balance b/d
260
3,060
246
  
£ Check profit & loss transfer: Jan–Mar (960 × 3/4) 720 Apr–July 1,040 Aug–Nov
1,040 Dec (1,040 × 1/4) 260
£240 per month £260 per month

pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 247
T/14.1
M Paine, a sole trader, is about to prepare his final accounts. As book-keeper, you
need to adjust the figures shown in certain accounts. M Paine’s financial year ends
on 31 December Year 5. At that date, certain accounts carry the following balances:
£ Rates Telephone Insurance Rent receivable Wages 1,960 215 760 3,840 45,630 (Dr)
(Dr) (Dr) (Cr) (Dr)
You ascertain the following information relating to the accounts above. (1) Rates –
included in the Rates Account is a payment of £900 for the half-year to 31 March
Year 6. (2) Telephone – the amount accrued due, not yet paid to 31 December Year 5,
is £47. (3) Insurance – a premium of £720 paid for the year to 31 January Year 6 is
included in the Insurance Account. (4) Rent receivable – the tenant owes £160 for
rent outstanding at 31 December Year 5. (5) Wages – the amount accrued due at 31
December Year 5 was £840. Required (a) Open these accounts, enter the balances
given, deal with the accrual or prepayment as necessary, and show the transfers to
the Profit & Loss Account. (b) Show how any remaining balances on the above
accounts would appear in the balance sheet of M Paine at 31 December Year 5.
(LCCIEB)
247
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 248
T/14.2
L Reinholdt is a theatrical agent whose accounting year ends on 31 December. He
provides the following details for the year ended 31 December Year 10: (1) On 1
January, 3 months rent had been paid in advance – £1,200. On 1 April, he paid 6
months rent in advance – £2,400. On 1 October, he paid rent for the 6 months ending
31 March Year 11 – £2,700. (2) On 1 January, commission due to Reinholdt, and not
yet received, amounted to £3,200. January–December: commission received – £64,300.
At 31 December, commission due and not yet received in respect of Year 10 amounted
to £4,700. (3) On 1 January, the estimated amount outstanding on the Telephone
Account was £320. On 31 March, he paid the telephone bill in respect of the
previous 6 months, £510. On 30 September, he paid the telephone bill in respect of
the previous 6 months, £520. On 31 December, the estimated amount outstanding on
the Telephone Account was £300. Required (a) Prepare the following accounts for
Reinholdt for the year ended 31 December Year 10: (i) Rent Account (ii) Commission
Receivable Account (iii) Telephone Account. (b) Prepare a balance sheet extract for
Reinholdt at 31 December Year 10, showing how the 3 balances would appear. (LCCIEB)
248
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 249
T/14.3*
At 1 January Year 8, L Johnston, a trader, owed £320 for rent, but her rates were
prepaid by £110. During Year 8, she made the following payments by cheque:
Rent 2 Apr 28 Sep Rates 7 Apr 5 Oct £ 600 630
160 180
At 31 December Year 8 there was accrued rent of £350 and rates were prepaid by
£120. Required Prepare L Johnston’s combined Rent & Rates Account for Year 8,
showing the transfer to the Profit & Loss Account and the account fully balanced.
T/14.3/A
In the books of L Johnston:
Rent & Rates Year 8 1 Jan 2 Apr 7 Apr 28 Sep 5 Oct 31 Dec Year 9 1 Jan £ Balance
b/d (rates) Bank (rent) Bank (rates) Bank (rent) Bank (rates) Balance c/d (rent)
110 600 160 630 180 350 2,030 Year 8 1 Jan Balance b/d (rent) 31 Dec Profit & loss
£ 320 1,590*
31 Dec Balance c/d (rates) Year 9 1 Jan
120 2,030 350
Balance b/d (rates)
Balance b/d (rent)
120
* rent £1,260 rates £330
249
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 250
T/14.4
The following information relates to some of the expense and income accounts of Jan
Goldsmith for the year ended 31 December Year 5:
£ Insurance Paid by cheque Prepaid Prepaid Stationery Paid by cheque Stock Stock
Owing to stationery suppliers Telephone Paid by cheque Paid by cheque Owing Owing
Rent payable Paid by cheque Paid by cheque Owing Prepaid Rent receivable Received
by cheque Received by cheque Owing Owing 23 Feb Yr 5 31 Dec Yr 4 31 Dec Yr 5 630 85
95
19 31 31 31
Mar Yr 5 Dec Yr 4 Dec Yr 5 Dec Yr 5
765 130 160 45
11 4 31 31
Jun Yr 5 Dec Yr 5 Dec Yr 4 Dec Yr 5
295 285 64 56
16 12 31 31
Feb Yr 5 Aug Yr 5 Dec Yr 4 Dec Yr 5
2,160 2,510 360 740
31 30 31 31
Mar Yr 5 Sep Yr 5 Dec Yr 4 Dec Yr 5
450 375 75 150
Required (a) Prepare the 5 ledger accounts, incorporating the information given
above, for the year ended 31 December Year 5. In each account, show the transfer to
the Profit & Loss Account and bring down the balance(s) at 1 January Year 6. (b)
Show how the balances on the accounts would be displayed in Jan Goldsmith’s balance
sheet at 31 December Year 5.
250
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 251
T/14.5
In the books of Frank Napier, a sole trader, the following account balances were
brought forward on 1 July Year 4:
Advertising Insurance Office cleaning Rent receivable £ 260 40 260 350 (Cr) (Dr)
(Cr) (Dr)
During the year ended 30 June Year 5, the following amounts were paid by cheque:
Year 4 25 Jul 1 Aug 5 Sep 24 Oct Year 5 26 Jan 1 Feb 8 Mar 21 Apr Office cleaning
(3 months to 31 Jul Yr 4) Insurance premium (6 months to 31 Jan Yr 5) Advertising
Office cleaning (3 months to 31 Oct Yr 4) £ 390 270 260 390
Office cleaning (3 months to 31 Jan Yr 5) Insurance premium (6 months to 31 Jul Yr

5) Advertising Office cleaning (3 months to 30 Apr Yr 5)
420 300 210 420
The following amounts were received by cheque during the year ended 30 June Year 5:
Year 4 17 Aug 3 Oct 15 Dec Year 5 12 Jan 3 Mar 19 May £ 700 350 380
Rent (1 May – 31 Aug Yr 4) Rent (1 Sep – 31 Oct Yr 4) Rent (1 Nov – 31 Dec Yr 4)
Advertising (part refund) Rent (1 Jan – 31 Mar Yr 5) Rent (1 Apr – 31 Jul Yr 5)
40 570 760
Frank Napier was aware that, at the end of his financial year, 30 June Year 5,
there was an outstanding advertising bill for £190 and 2 months’ payment
outstanding on the office cleaning account, at £140 per month. Required (a) Open
the following accounts: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Advertising Insurance Office Cleaning
Rent Receivable.
251
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 252
(b) Post the various items to the accounts. (c) Show the transfer entries to the
Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 30 June Year 5. (d) Balance the accounts
at 30 June Year 5. Note You are not required to show the Profit & Loss Account.
T/14.6
The following information is from the books of Enterprise Services in respect of
the year ended 30 June Year 9:
Rent Receivable Year 8 1 Jul 1 Oct Year 9 1 Apr £ 3 months’ rent prepaid 8 months’
rent received by cheque 6 months’ rent received by cheque at revised rate of £2,960
per annum Rates Year 8 1 Jul 1 Oct Year 9 1 Apr 3 months’ rates prepaid Paid 6
months’ rates by cheque Paid 6 months’ rates by cheque Advertising Year 8 1 Jul 28
Aug Year 9 15 May Accrued due Paid by cheque Paid by cheque Printing and Stationery
Year 8 1 Jul 14 Sep Year 9 12 Feb Stock of stationery Purchased stationery by
cheque Paid printing account by cheque 3,400 850 420 370 1,250 2,100 780 1,680
1,680 630 1,260
1,480
252
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 253
At 30 June Year 9: (1) Payments for advertising during the year included £580 for
poster advertising that was due to be carried out in August Year 9. (2) The stock
of stationery was valued at £3,100. There was also an unpaid invoice for £615 for
printing. Required (a) Prepare the following accounts for the year ended 30 June
Year 9, including transfers to the Profit & Loss Account and year-end balances. (i)
(ii) (iii) (iv) Rent Receivable Rates Advertising Printing and Stationery
(b) Show, in the form of a balance sheet extract, how the balances on these
accounts would appear at 30 June Year 9.
T/15.1
Jack Millard commenced business on 1 January Year 3 and on that date purchased a
motor vehicle for £10,400. On 31 December Year 3, he wished to determine the
depreciation expense for the year just completed. He is unsure whether to use the:
(a) straight line method – the vehicle would have a 3-year life with an estimated
resale value of £4,100; (b) reducing balance method – using a rate of 40% on cost.
Required To help Jack Millard decide between the 2 methods, draw up and complete
the following table:
Depreciation charge in Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 Dec Year 3 £
Method (a) (b)
Net book value at 31 Dec Year 3 £
253
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 254
T/15.2
Charles Day started a business on 1 January Year 4. On that date, he purchased by
cheque a motor van costing £9,600 from Greenaway Motors Ltd. He decided to
depreciate this asset, using the rate of 40% per annum on the reducing balance
method. He also purchased, on the same day, on credit, fixtures and fittings
costing £15,000 from P J Shop Fitters Ltd. He decided to depreciate these fixtures
and fittings using the straight line method. He estimated that they would have a
useful life of 15 years, and would have a scrap value of £2,100. He kept the asset
accounts at cost, and used a provision for depreciation account for each asset.
Required Prepare for Charles Day the following accounts for each of Years 4, 5, 6,
and 7: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) Motor Van Provision for Depreciation of Motor Van
(showing calculations to the nearest £) Fixtures and Fittings Provision for
Depreciation of Fixtures and Fittings. (LCCIEB)
T/15.3
Required With reference to T/15.2, prepare an extract to show how both assets would
appear in Charles Day’s balance sheet at 31 December Year 7. (LCCIEB)
254
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 255
T/15.4
On 8 February Year 5, Southern Stores bought a computer for use in the office,
paying £8,600 by cheque. It was decided to provide for depreciation by use of the
straight line method. It was estimated that, at the end of 5 years, the residual
(scrap) value would be £600. On 12 September Year 5, Southern Stores purchased a
motor vehicle for use in the business, paying £10,000 by cheque. The vehicle was to
be depreciated at the rate of 40% per annum, using the reducing balance method. The
business retained the asset accounts at cost and dealt with depreciation using a
separate Provision for Depreciation Account for each asset.The financial year ends
on 31 December. Any asset purchased in the first 6 months of a year has a whole
year’s depreciation provided, while any asset purchased in the second half of the
year has only half a year’s depreciation written off. Required (a) Prepare the
following accounts for the years ended 31 December Years 5, 6, and 7: (i) (ii)
(iii) (iv) Computer Equipment Provision for Depreciation of Computer Equipment
Motor Vehicle Provision for Depreciation of Motor Vehicle.
(b) Show a balance sheet extract at 31 December Year 7 for both the Computer
Equipment and Motor Vehicle Accounts. (LCCIEB)
255
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 256
T/15.5
D Amos purchased fixtures and fittings for £6,000 by cheque on 1 January Year 3. On
1 July of the same year, he purchased by cheque a motor vehicle for £18,000. He
decided to depreciate his fixed assets as follows: (1) Fixtures and fittings –
using the straight line method. He estimated that they would have a working life of
8 years, with a residual (scrap) value of £1,000. (2) Motor vehicle – using the
reducing balance method. He set the rate at 40% on reducing balance each full year.
He kept the asset accounts at cost and kept accumulated depreciation of each type
of asset in a separate Provision for Depreciation Account. Assets acquired during
the year were depreciated from the date of purchase. Required In the books of D
Amos, prepare the following accounts for the 3 financial years ended 31 December
Year 3, Year 4, and Year 5, balancing the accounts at the end of each year: (i)
(ii) (iii) (iv) Fixtures and Fittings Provision for Depreciation of Fixtures and
Fittings Motor Vehicle Provision for Depreciation of Motor Vehicle. (LCCIEB)
T/15.6
On 1 January Year 4, Frank Saunders purchased furniture and equipment by cheque for
£11,000. He decided to provide for depreciation on this asset using the straight
line method over 8 years. He estimated that the scrap value at the end of that time
would be £600. On 14 February Year 4, he purchased a motor van by cheque for
£8,400, for use in the business. He decided to provide for depreciation on this
asset at the rate of 40% per annum, using the reducing balance method. He allowed a
full year’s depreciation in the year of purchase and calculated the depreciation to
the nearest £. On 31 December Year 6, he sold the motor van for £3,200 and was paid
by cheque. His practice is to record and leave the asset accounts at cost and to
accumulate the depreciation in a Provision for Depreciation Account for each asset.
His financial year ends on 31 December.
256
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 257
Required In the books of Frank Saunders, open the following accounts and enter the
transactions for the years ended 31 December Years 4, 5, and 6: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(v) Furniture and Equipment Provision for Depreciation of Furniture and Equipment
Motor Van Provision for Depreciation of Motor Van Disposal of Motor Van. (LCCIEB)
T/16.1
F Openshaw submitted the following information at 31 March for Years 4, 5, and 6:
Total debtors before writing off bad debts £ 18,640 Bad debts to be written off £ F
Dale T Wylie 117 163
Date 31 Mar Yr 4
31 Mar Yr 5 31 Mar Yr 6
20,835
G Block
315
17,694
A Dolt E Fox
78 216
Openshaw provides for doubtful debts at the rate of 2 1/2% of the remaining debtors
at the end of each financial year. At 31 March Year 3, the provision for doubtful
debts was £380. Required (a) In the books of F Openshaw, prepare the following
accounts for the years ended 31 March Years 4, 5, and 6, including the transfers to
the Profit & Loss Account at the end of each financial year: (i) Bad Debts (ii)
Provision for Doubtful Debts. (b) Show extracts from the balance sheets of F
Openshaw at 31 March Years 4, 5, and 6, placing debtors under current assets.
(LCCIEB)
257
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 258
T/16.2
(a) It is the practice of Coniston & Son to write off bad debts as they occur and
to provide for doubtful debts. For the 3 years from the commencement of business to
31 December Year 3, the following information is available: At year ended 31
December:
Year 1 £ Balance of debtors before writing off bad debts Bad debts to be written
off Provision for doubtful debts, as a percentage of debtors 47,800 800 Year 2 £
76,300 1,100 Year 3 £ 91,400 1,500
3%
4%
2%
Required (i) Prepare the following accounts for Years 1, 2, and 3, showing the
transfers to the Profit & Loss Account at the end of each year:
● ●
Bad Debts Provision for Doubtful Debts.
(ii) Show the balance sheet extract in respect of debtors at 31 December each year.
(b) On 7 June Year 4, Coniston & Son received a payment of £129 from S Atkins for
an outstanding debt of £320. Coniston wrote off the balance as a bad debt. Required
Show the account of S Atkins in Coniston’s ledger.
258
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 259
T/16.3*
At 31 December Year 8, AB & Co has debtors totalling £42,560. Debts amounting to
£760 have yet to be written off as bad. A specific provision is to be created
covering in full the following debts:
D £620 E £570 F £710
A general doubtful debts provision of 4% of remaining debts is also to be created.

No provision exists as yet. Required (a) Show in a statement: (i) how the 2
provisions are calculated (ii) the amount of net debtors. (b) Show as an extract
how the item ‘debtors’ would appear in the balance sheet of AB & Co at 31 December
Year 8.
T/16.3/A
(a)
Calculation of debt provisions Gross debtors less Bad debts written off £ 42,560
760 41,800 D 620 E 570 F 710
less Specific provision:
less General provision at 4% Net debtors
1,900 39,900 1,596 38,304
(b)
AB & Co Balance sheet (extract) at 31 December Year 8 £ Current assets Debtors less
Provision for bad and doubtful debts 41,800 3,496 38,304 £
259
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 260
T/16.4
Donald Lisher, a sole trader, maintains a provision for doubtful debts that he
adjusts at the end of each financial year. At 1 January Year 8, the balance on the
account was £860. The following additional information is available:
Bad debts written off during year £ 1,235 1,640 1,320 Debtor year-end balances £
25,300 29,600 28,800 Provision for doubtful debts % 4 6 5
Year ended 31 Dec Yr 8 31 Dec Yr 9 31 Dec Yr 10
On 12 October Year 10, Donald Lisher received a cheque for £240 in respect of a
debt which had been written off in Year 9. Required (a) From the above information,
prepare for the years ended 31 December Years 8, 9, and 10: (i) the Bad Debts
Account, including the closing entries; (ii) the Provision for Doubtful Debts
Account, showing the balance carried forward each year. (b) Show, in a brief
statement, the entries which would be made in the books of Donald Lisher to record
the recovery of £240 for the debt written off in Year 9. Note Bad debts written off
should not be taken to the Provision for Doubtful Debts Account.
260
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 261
T/16.5
The accounting year of R Cleaver, a trader, ends on 31 December.At 31 December Year
3, his trade debtors amounted to £37,500 and he had a provision for doubtful debts
amounting to 2% of debtors. During Year 4, Cleaver wrote off debts as follows: (1)
The whole of the debt of £460, due from L Paul, was written off as irrecoverable on
15 August Year 4. (2) Another debtor, K Sang, who owed £220, paid a contribution of
25%; the balance was immediately written off as irrecoverable on 26 November Year
4. At 31 December Year 4, debtors amounted to £41,000 and the provision for
doubtful debts was adjusted to 2.5% of this figure. In Year 5, bad debts written
off amounted to £560. In addition, on 20 October, K Sang paid the balance of his
debt, which had been written off in Year 4. It was the practice of Cleaver to keep
a Bad Debts Recovered Account for recording debts recovered in a year following the
one in which they were written off. At 31 December Year 5, debtors amounted to
£39,000 and the Provision for Doubtful Debts was adjusted to 2% of this figure.
Required Prepare the following accounts to include the above information relating
to the years ended 31 December Year 4 and 31 December Year 5: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
(v) L Paul K Sang Bad Debts Provision for Doubtful Debts Bad Debts Recovered.
261
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 262
T/17.1
The following information is available in respect of A Wolfson, a trader:
CASH BOOK (bank only) Year 5 1 Sep 5 Sep 10 Sep 15 Sep 23 Sep 25 Sep 28 Sep Balance
b/f Sales T Swithin Sales K Smart T Hunt Sales £ 2,806 1,020 857 1,370 524 413
1,245 Year 5 4 Sep 9 Sep 16 Sep 24 Sep 26 Sep 27 Sep 29 Sep 30 Sep 30 Sep Purchases
(915) Wages (916) N Victor (917) Rent (918) Wages (919) N Hills (920) S Twitchin
(921) Purchases (922) Balance £ 234 635 526 370 680 416 285 540 ?
Bank statement Year 5 1 Sep 7 Sep 9 Sep 12 Sep 15 Sep 17 Sep 19 Sep 21 Sep 23 26 28
30 Sep Sep Sep Sep Paid out £ Balance Cash: 915 Credit Cash: 916 Credit Credit
transfer – P Mott Credit Standing order – Minster Publications Credit transfer – T
Lennox Direct debit – Insurance Cash: 919 Bank interest 234 1,020 635 857 271 1,370
96 870 230 680 8 Paid in £ Balance £ 2,806 Cr 2,572 Cr 3,592 Cr 2,957 Cr 3,814 Cr
4,085 Cr 5,455 Cr 5,359 Cr 4,489 4,259 3,579 3,587 Cr Cr Cr Cr
Required (a) Calculate the missing balance in the Cash Book and enter it in your
answer book as the balance brought down at 30 September Year 5. (b) Bring the Cash
Book up to date by entering in it the items you consider appropriate from the bank
statement. Balance the Cash Book and bring down the new balance at 1 October Year
5. (c) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement at 30 September Year 5.
262
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 263
T/17.2
The following is a copy of F Holme’s Cash Book for April Year 5:
CASH BOOK Bank £ 3,240 1,250 2,610 1,925 1,368 1,701 450 1,116 Cheque no Year 5 3
Apr 6 Apr 9 Apr 12 Apr 15 Apr 18 Apr 20 Apr 25 Apr 27 Apr 29 Apr 29 Apr 30 Apr
Purchases Rates Electricity Purchases Telephone Stationery Travelling Salary G
Stewart D Usher Fixtures Balance c/d 10648 10649 10650 10651 10652 10653 10654
10655 10656 10657 10658 Bank £ 1,060 650 196 1,400 245 98 72 1,057 746 2,360 2,200
3,576 13,660
Year 5 1 Apr 4 Apr 10 Apr 16 Apr 24 Apr 28 Apr 30 Apr 30 Apr
Balance b/d Sales Sales Sales Sales Sales F Tait Sales
13,660 1 May Balance b/d 3,576
He received the following bank statement for April Year 5:

Bank statement Date Year 5 1 Apr 3 Apr 4 Apr 5 9 11 12 13 16 17 19 22 23 25 27 29
30 30 Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Apr Details Balance
Cash: 10648 Standing order – Insurance Co Credit 10649 Credit 10651 10650 Direct
debit – Water Credit 10652 Credit transfer – John Bates 10654 Credit Dividends
10655 Credit Charges Paid out £ 1,060 260 1,250 650 2,610 1,400 196 50 1,925 245
360 72 1,368 400 1,057 1,701 60 Paid in £ Balance £ 3,240 Cr 2,180 Cr 1,920 3,170
2,520 5,130 3,730 3,534 3,484 5,409 5,164 5,524 5,452 6,820 7,220 6,163 7,864 7,804
Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
263
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 264
Required (a) Starting with the balance of £3,576, bring F Holme’s Cash Book up to
date by posting to it the items you consider appropriate from the bank statement.
Balance the Cash Book and bring down the new balance on 1 May Year 5. (b) Prepare a
bank reconciliation statement at 30 April Year 5, commencing with the bank
statement balance of £7,804. (LCCIEB)
T/17.3
The following information relates to the business of M Rhodes:
Bank statement at 30 June Year 5 Date 1 5 5 8 11 13 15 15 19 24 26 29 30 Jun Jun
Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Details Balance 10659 10658 Counter
credits Standing order – Ajax Insurance 10660 Counter credits 10661 Standing order
– L White Direct debit – Town Council 10663 10665 Charges Debits £ 230 176 813 242
459 1,121 150 462 517 324 138 74 Credits £ Balance £ 4,619 Cr 4,389 Cr 4,213 Cr
5,026 Cr 4,784 4,325 5,446 5,296 5,758 5,241 4,917 4,779 4,705 Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr Cr
Cr Cr
Cheque book counterfoils 1 1 7 11 22 23 23 25 29 Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun Jun
Jun 10658 10659 10660 10661 10662 10663 10664 10665 10666 A Parry C Harris L
Goddard A Parry D Fletcher Lines Ltd Star & Co A Parry C Thorpe £ 176 230 459 150
376 324 289 138 247
(continued)
264
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 265
T/17.3 (continued)
Paying-in book counterfoils 8 Jun 15 Jun S Moon G Race Rayne & Co C Mills T Orchard
£ 611 202 129 325 667 £ 813
1,121
Note Cheques are paid into the bank on the day they are received. Required (a)
Write up the bank account in the books of M Rhodes starting with a debit balance of
£4,619 on 1 June Year 5. Entries should be in date order. (b) Prepare a bank
reconciliation statement at 30 June Year 5, commencing with the bank statement
balance of £4,705. (LCCIEB)
T/17.4*
You are required to prepare a bank statement from the details below. Thomas Snodden
banks at Wilmster Bank, 46 High Street, Ledbury, Eastshire LE2 5SR – account number
96015. On 1 September Year 2, he had a balance at the bank of £126.00 (Dr).The
following were his transactions with the bank during Setpember Year 2:
4 Sep 6 Sep 9 Sep 12 Sep 14 Sep 17 Sep 20 22 25 27 30 Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Received
cheque from R Grafton for £57.00 Drew cheque no 100567 payable to T Lucas for
£95.50 This was debited to Snodden’s account on 11 September The bank made a
standing order payment to Moody Publishers for £162.00 Drew cheque no 100568
payable to N Swift for £73.00 This was debited to Snodden’s account on 16 September
Received by credit transfer from K Hanson £214.00 Drew cheque no 100569 payable to
T Cavendish for £106.50 This was debited to Snodden’s account on 21 September
Received cheque from N Speedy for £165.00 The bank made direct debit payment to
Eastwise Electricity for £89.00 The bank made credit transfer payment to Spacewell
Ltd for £105.00 Received cheque from L Morsewell for £235.00 The bank charged
interest of £17.00
Note Any cheques received by Thomas Snodden are paid into the bank on the day of
receipt. In each instance above, the bank credited Snodden’s account on the same
day.
265
pages 201-266
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 266
T/17.4/A
Wilmster Bank 46 High Street Ledbury Eastshire LE2 55R Mr Thomas Snodden Account No
96015 Date Year 2 1 Sep 4 Sep 9 Sep 11 14 16 20 21 22 Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep Sep
Particulars Paid out £ Paid in £ 57.00 Balance £ 126.00 Cr 183.00 Cr 21.00 74.50
139.50 66.50 231.00 125.00 Cr O/D Cr O/D Cr Cr
25 Sep 27 Sep 30 Sep
Balance b/f R Grafton Standing order – Moody Publishers 162.00 T Lucas: 100567
95.50 Credit transfer – K Hanson N Swift: 100568 73.00 N Speedy T Cavendish: 100569
106.50 Direct debit – Eastwise Electricity 89.00 Credit transfer – Spacewell Ltd
105.00 L Morsewell Interest 17.00
214.00 165.00
36.00 Cr 69.00 O/D 166.00 Cr 149.00 Cr
235.00
266
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 267
T/18.1
Lynn Parton owns a small business. She keeps a Petty Cash Book and uses the imprest
system. The imprest is set at £100. On 1 June Year 7 the petty cash balance was
£70.30 and on that date the imprest was restored with cash drawn from the business
bank account. During June Year 7, the following amounts were paid from petty cash:
Details Year 7 2 Jun 4 Jun 5 Jun 6 Jun 10 Jun 14 Jun 18 Jun 22 Jun 25 Jun 29 Jun
Travelling expenses Stationery Postage Cash purchases Postage Cleaning expenses
Stationery Cash purchases Postage Travelling expenses Voucher no 76 77 78 79 80 81
82 82 83 84 Amount £ 12.30 4.23 1.75 32.30 1.82 7.37 9.34 21.17 2.38 4.54
The imprest amount was restored on 1 July Year 7. Required Write up the Petty Cash
Book from 1 June to 1 July Year 7. You should use the following analysis columns:
Travelling expenses Stationery Postage Purchases Cleaning expenses
267
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 268
T/18.2
Peter Sharsby uses the petty cash imprest system.The amount of the float is £300.
At 1 March Year 6, the balance of petty cash in hand was £83.20. The petty cashier
dealt with the following transactions during March Year 6:
Voucher no Year 6 1 Mar 3 Mar 6 Mar 9 Mar 11 Mar 14 Mar 16 Mar 19 Mar 21 Mar 24 Mar
27 Mar 29 Mar Drew cash from bank to restore the float Stationery Petrol J Lane –
travel expenses Motor-vehicle repairs Refund to debtor, A Lucan Postage Stationery
Petrol F Coster – train fare Postage Paid to L Vine, creditor Amount £ 15.30 23.40
27.50 51.80 32.60 4.30 15.70 22.40 19.10 13.90 27.80
83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93
Required (a) Enter the above transactions in the Petty Cash Book of Peter Sharsby
for March Year 6, and show the balance at the end of the month. Bring down the
balance and show the entry to make up the float (from the bank) on 1 April Year 6.
Peter Sharsby uses the following analysis columns:
Motor-vehicle expenses Postage Stationery Travelling expenses Ledger
(b) In relation to the posting of the total of the motor-vehicle expenses analysis
column: (i) show the entry that will be made in the relevant expense account; (ii)
in which ledger is that account kept?
268
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 269
T/18.3*
Ellen Franks keeps her Petty Cash Book on the imprest system. The imprest amount
was set at £250. On 1 July Year 3, the balance of petty cash brought forward was
£83.00. The following transactions took place during July Year 3:
Voucher no Year 3 1 Jul 5 Jul 7 Jul 10 Jul 12 Jul 14 17 19 22 24 Jul Jul Jul Jul
Jul Drew cash from bank to restore the imprest Stationery Train fare reimbursed
Postage Received by petty cashier from L Ward, in payment for a private telephone
call Motor-vehicle expenses Postage T Tarrant – travel expenses Petrol Payment of
amount owing to K Tutt in the purchases ledger Stationery Postage Amount £ 17.50
23.70 12.30 1.90 35.60 7.20 28.40 11.00 31.00 14.30 7.00
69 70 71
72 73 74 75 76 77 78
27 Jul 30 Jul
On 1 August Year 3 the float was increased to £300. Required (a) Draw up Ellen
Franks’ Petty Cash Book using the following analysis columns:
Travel expenses Postage Motor-vehicle expenses Stationery Ledger
(b) Balance the account at 31 July Year 3, bring down the balance of cash at that
date, and show the amount of cash drawn from the bank for the revised imprest on 1
August Year 3. (c) Show the Telephone Account in the General Ledger for July Year
3, assuming that the Telephone Account had been paid by direct debit £97.60 on 6
July Year 3.
269
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 270
T/18.3/A
(a) and (b)
Receipts £ 83.00 167.00 Date Year 3 1 Jul 1 Jul 5 Jul 7 Jul 10 Jul 12 Jul 14 Jul 17
Jul 19 Jul 22 Jul 24 Jul 27 Jul 30 Jul 31 Jul 251.90 63.90 236.10 1 Aug Balance b/d
1 Aug Bank Details Balance b/f Bank Stationery Train fare Postage Telephone – L
Ward Motor-vehicle expenses Postage T Tarrant – travel Petrol K Tutt, creditor
Stationery Postage Balance c/d
PETTY CASH BOOK

Voucher no Total £ Travel expenses Postage £ £ Motor-v expenses Stationery Ledger £
£ £
69 70 71
17.50 23.70 23.70 12.30
17.50 12.30
1.90
72 73 74 75 76 77 78
35.60 7.20 28.40 28.40 11.00 31.00 14.30 7.00 188.00 52.10 63.90 251.90
35.60 7.20
11.00 31.00 14.30 7.00 26.50 46.60 31.80 31.00
(c)
Year 3 6 Jul
GENERAL LEDGER Telephone Bank £ 97.60 Year 3 12 Jul Petty cash £ 1.90
Note The question does not require the Telephone Account to be balanced.
270
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 271
T/18.4
Carol Garner maintains an analysed Petty Cash Book on the imprest system. She
restores the imprest amount to £85 on the first day of each week. The analysis
columns in the Petty Cash Book are headed:
Wages Postage Travelling Sundries Ledger
At the close of business on Friday, 31 July Year 6, Carol balanced the Petty Cash
Book and carried down the balance of £23.15.The cash held in the petty cash box
agreed with this balance. The following transactions took place during the 2 weeks
that followed:
£ Monday, 3 Aug Tuesday, 4 Aug Wednesday, 5 Aug Imprest restored Postage Window
cleaning Creditor – R Jackson Postage Tea and coffee Travelling expenses Wages
Postage Travelling expenses Imprest restored Travelling expenses Advertising
Postage Travelling expenses Wages Postage Stationery Postage 3.80 4.70 9.75 4.26
1.88 2.93 45.00 1.94 3.22
Thursday, 6 Aug Friday, 7 Aug Monday, 10 Aug Tuesday, 11 Aug
Thursday, 13 Aug Friday, 14 Aug
1.41 12.00 3.22 1.94 48.00 4.21 2.48 1.30
Required (a) Write up Carol Garner’s analysed Petty Cash Book for the 2-week
period. Balance the Petty Cash Book and total the analysis columns at the end of
each week. (b) Give 2 reasons why the cash in the petty cash box on Friday, 7
August might not have agreed with the Petty Cash Book balance. (LCCIEB)
271
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 272
T/19.1
State whether each of the following is capital expenditure or revenue expenditure.
You only have to write one word, either ‘capital’ or ‘revenue’ in each case. (1)
Purchase of a motor van for use within the business. (2) Purchase of goods intended
for resale in the normal course of business. (3) Purchase of petrol for the motor
van. (4) Purchase of materials to be used in building an extension to the firm’s
business premises. (5) Payment of insurance on the business premises.
T/19.2
Matthew Dawalla owns a restaurant and the following were some of his transactions
during the year ended 31 October Year 7: (1) Purchase of flour for immediate use in
the kitchen. (2) Purchase, in September Year 7, of a motor van for delivery of
prepared foods to customers. (3) Payment for advertising. (4) Payment for carriage
inwards in respect of foodstuffs for the kitchen. (5) Payment of £6,400 for work
done on the restaurant premises. £5,100 was for an extension to the restaurant
seating area, while the remainder was for painting and decorating the restaurant.
(6) Payment for heating and lighting. (7) Purchase, in July Year 7, of new ovens
for the kitchen. (8) Payment for expenses of running the motor van. Required State
whether each of the 8 transactions is revenue expenditure, capital expenditure, or
both. If an item is both capital and revenue expenditure, you should state the
respective amounts.
272
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 273
T/19.3
JK Distributors Ltd purchases motor vehicles from manufacturers and sells them to
other companies and to the general public. Jameson Partners is a firm of
accountants. Required Classify the following transactions into either capital
expenditure or revenue expenditure. Transactions by JK Distributors Ltd: (1)
Purchase of motor vehicles for resale. (2) Purchase of a transporter lorry for
moving vehicles. (3) Payments for the building of a showroom extension. (4)
Salaries and commission paid to showroom sales staff. (5) Purchase of a computer
for stock control purposes. Transactions by Jameson Partners: (1) Purchase of motor
vehicles for use in the business. (2) Purchase of an office safe. (3) Rent paid for
use of office premises. (4) Payment of course fees for staff training. (5) Payment
of staff salaries and travelling expenses.
273
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 274
T/19.4
P Arkan is a builder. He designs and builds superior houses to meet individual
customer specification. The following invoices were received from suppliers in
October Year 4:
£ Invoice 1 From Mellow Brick Company: 40,000 high quality bricks Delivery charge
24,800 375 25,175
Invoice 2
From Premier Equipment Company: One earth moving machine 4 replacement tyres for
existing machine
42,700 890 43,590
Invoice 3
From Excel Office Supplies: One photocopier for use within the firm 10 reams of
copier paper
1,460 62 1,522
Invoice 4
From Arbor Construction Company: Building an extension to the cement storage area
Repairs to fencing as instructed: Fencing panels and other materials Labour charges
12,400 1,475 1,060 14,935
Required Analyse the amount of each invoice and apportion it to capital expenditure
and revenue expenditure. Present your answer in a table as follows:
Capital expenditure £ Invoice 1 Invoice 2 Invoice 3 Invoice 4 Revenue expenditure £
Total expenditure £
(LCCIEB)
274
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 275
T/19.5*
Show the effect of the way each of the following transactions was recorded in the
accounts of a retailer of electrical equipment. If there was no effect, state ‘no
effect’.
Gross profit Effect on Net profit Balance sheet
Transaction (1) Purchase of motor vehicle for deliveries to customers – entered in

Purchases Account (2) Invoice for electricity wrongly entered in Water Supply
Account (3) Payment for repairs to premises entered in Premises Account (4) Bill
for petrol for delivery vehicle entered in Motor Vehicle Account (5) Invoice for
legal services in respect of the purchase of premises entered in Office Expenses
Account (6) The cost of installing new shop fittings was charged to Wages Account
T/19.5/A
Transaction (1) Effect on Gross profit Net profit Understated Understated Balance
sheet Fixed assets understated Capital understated No effect Fixed assets
overstated Capital overstated Fixed assets overstated Capital overstated Fixed
assets understated Capital understated Fixed assets understated Capital understated
(2) (3)
No effect No effect
No effect Overstated
(4)
No effect
Overstated
(5)
No effect
Understated
(6)
No effect
Understated
275
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 276
T/19.6*
This question has reference to the information given in T/19.2 (Matthew Dawalla).
Matthew Dawalla makes no provision for depreciation in respect of fixed assets
purchased in the last 6 months of any financial year. Using the format shown below,
indicate by means of a tick ( ) which of the Trading Account, Profit & Loss
Account, or balance sheet prepared at 31 October Year 7 would be affected by each
of the transactions. In the case of item (5), also state the amount.
Items (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Trading Account Profit & Loss Account Balance
sheet
T/19.6/A
Items (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) £1,300 £5,100 Trading Account Profit & Loss
Account Balance sheet
276
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 277
T/19.7*
Andrew Smithers has recently prepared the following Trading and Profit & Loss
Account:
Andrew Smithers Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 30 September
Year 3 £ Sales less Cost of goods sold: Opening stock Purchases less Closing stock
Gross profit less Expenses: Rent Wages General expenses Net loss £ 73,200
3,860 49,750 53,610 4,200
49,410 23,790
4,400 18,900 860
24,160 (370)
On reviewing his books of account you find that: (1) The item ‘Purchases’ includes:
● ● ●
a desktop computer bought for use in the office for £2,200; a new delivery van
bought for use in the business for £7,600; the purchase of materials for extending
the shop premises £2,350.
(2) The sales figure includes the sale of the old delivery van for £1,600. This
figure had been shown in the books at £3,400. (3) The closing stock includes £300
of materials in hand for work on extending the shop premises. (4) Rent accrued
£400. (5) The figure for wages includes £2,100 for building work on extending the
shop premises. Andrew Smithers tells you that he wishes to allow £1,500 first-year
depreciation on the new delivery van. Required Prepare a revised Trading and Profit
& Loss Account for Andrew Smithers for the year ended 30 September Year 3.
277
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 278
T/19.7/A
Andrew Smithers (Revised) Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 30
September Year 3 £ Sales (-1,600) less Cost of goods sold: Opening stock Purchases
(-2,200 -7,600 -2,350) less Closing stock (-300) Gross profit less Expenses: Rent
(+400) Wages (-2,100) General expenses Depreciation: £ Old van 1,800 New van 1,500
Net profit £ 71,600 3,860
37,600 41,460 3,900
37,560 34,040
4,800 16,800 860
3,300
25,760 8,280
278
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 279
T/19.8*
John Bradford ended his first year of trading on 31 December Year 4. He has no
knowledge of book-keeping and accounts but has prepared what he calls his profit
statement for the year:
John Bradford Profit statement at 31 December Year 4 £ Cash takings from customers
Purchases Goods for resale Motor vehicle, bought 1 Jan Yr 4 Advertising Vehicle
running costs Wages paid Insurances Heat and light Cash taken for own use Profit £
22,664
14,173 2,200 16,373 838 1,092 2,640 310 429 394
22,076 588
Other information at 31 December Year 4: (1) (2) (3) (4) Customers invoiced for
£1,082 had not yet paid their accounts. Wages accrued due £286. Purchases that had
cost £1,730 were still unsold (stock). John Bradford expects the motor vehicle to
last 3 years and to have a trade-in value then of £700.
Required (a) State what important distinction John Bradford has failed to make in
his treatment of the motor-vehicle purchase. (b) Prepare a revised Trading and
Profit & Loss Account for John Bradford for the year ended 31 December Year 4.
279
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 280
T/19.8/A
(a) John Bradford has not made the distinction between capital and revenue
expenditure. (b)
John Bradford Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year
4 £ Sales less Cost of goods sold: Purchases less Closing stock Gross profit
Advertising Vehicle running costs Wages Insurance Heat and light Depreciation – van
Net profit
** Cash takings add accrued due
£ 23,746**
14,173 1,730 12,443 11,303 838 1,092 2,926 310 429 500
6,095 5,208
23,746
22,664 1,082
T/20.1
After trading for some years, Lorna Freele decides to keep a double-entry set of
books. At 1 May Year 7, records show her financial position to be as follows:
Assets Premises £47,000 Office equipment £11,200 Fixtures and fittings £3,800 Motor
vehicle £9,700 Stock £8,650 D Crawle £570 F Munster £312 J Tester £423 Office cash
£107 Creditors: A Farmer £318 T North £165 Bank overdraft £1,730
Debtors Liabilities
Required (a) In the journal, show the opening entries to record the assets and
liabilities of Lorna Freele at 1 May Year 7. (b) Post the figures for assets and
liabilities as balances in appropriate ledger accounts. Name the division of the
ledger in which each account appears.
280
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 281
T/20.2*
The following details are available concerning the business of Walter Masson for
the year ended 30 June Year 4:
Stock at 1 Jul Yr 3 Purchases Returns outwards Sales Returns inwards Stock, 30 Jun
Yr 4 Office expenses Wages Rent, rates, and insurance £ 4,600 15,120 140 29,360 410
5,300 1,740 7,300 3,200
Required Prepare closing entries for Walter Masson at 30 June Year 4, showing
transfers to the Trading Account, Profit & Loss Account, and Capital Account
relating to the year ended 30 June Year 4.
T/20.2/A
Walter Masson Journal Year 4 30 Jun Dr £ 4,600 Cr £ 4,600
Trading Stock Book value of stock at 1 Jul Yr 3 Trading Purchases Purchases for
year ended 30 Jun Yr 4 Trading Returns inwards Returns inwards for year ended 30
Jun Yr 4 Sales Trading Sales for year ended 30 Jun Yr 4
30 Jun
15,120 15,120
30 Jun
410 410
30 Jun
29,360 29,360
(continued)
281
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 282
T/20.2/A (continued)
30 Jun Returns outwards Trading Returns outwards for year ended 30 Jun Yr 4 Stock
Trading Value of stock at 30 Jun Yr 4 Trading Profit & loss Gross profit for the
year Profit & loss Office expenses Office expenses for year ended 30 Jun Yr 4
Profit & loss Wages Wages for year ended 30 Jun Yr 4 Profit & loss Rent, rates, and
insurance Rent, rates, and insurance for year ended 30 Jun Yr 4 Profit & loss
Capital Net profit for year transferred 140 140
30 Jun
5,300 5,300
30 Jun
14,670 14,670
30 Jun
1,740 1,740
30 Jun
7,300 7,300
30 Jun
3,200 3,200
30 Jun
2,430 2,430
Comment The ‘sides’ the individual items (eg purchases) appear on in these journal
entries correspond to the transfer entries appearing in the individual accounts
concerned.
282
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 283
T/20.3
At 31 August Year 5, the end of his financial year, B C Holt’s books included the
following balances:
£ Stock at 1 Sep Yr 4 Purchases Sales Purchases returns Sales returns Carriage
inwards 9,580 58,960 90,440 1,030 2,105 1,760
B C Holt valued his stock at cost, £10,380, at 31 August Year 5. Required In the
books of B C Holt: (a) Prepare journal entries, without narrations, to transfer the
above balances to the Trading Account for the year ended 31 August Year 5. The
closing stock valuation should also be journalized. (b) Prepare the Trading Account
for the year ended 31 August Year 5. (LCCIEB)
283
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 284
T/20.4*
C Stanton’s financial year ends on 30 June; the following transactions took place
during June Year 7: (1) On 1 June, Stanton purchased a new car, for use in the
business, for £9,600 from the Smart Vehicle Company. He was allowed £2,200 for his
old car and paid the balance by cheque. (2) On 1 June, Stanton paid £360 by cheque
for car insurance to 31 May Year 8. (3) On 11 June, he purchased a new computer for
£2,685 on credit from E Byte & Son. (4) On 19 June,T Wilson paid £65 by cheque as
the only payment on his debt of £260. Stanton decided to write off the balance as a
bad debt. (5) During the month of June, Stanton had taken goods costing £419 for
his own use. On 30 June Year 7, Stanton decided to make adjustments for the
following matters, before preparing the final accounts: (a) Car insurance premium
is prepaid. (b) Bank charges amounting to £71 had not been entered in the books.
(c) Telephone charges of £124 for the month of June had not been paid. Required
Prepare the journal entries to record the above transactions and adjustments,
including bank, in the books of C Stanton. Note Narrations are not required.
(LCCIEB)
284
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 285
T/20.4/A
C Stanton Journal Year 7 1 Jun Dr £ 9,600 Cr £ 2,200 7,400 360 360 2,685 2,685 65
195 260 419 419 330 330 71 71 124 124
Motor car Motor-car disposal Bank Insurance Bank Office machinery E Byte & Son Bank
Bad debts T Wilson Drawings Purchases Car insurance (Year 7/8) Car insurance (Year
6/7) Bank charges Bank Telephone (Year 6/7) Telephone (Year 7/8)
1 Jun 11 Jun 19 Jun
30 Jun 30 Jun 30 Jun 30 Jun
285
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 286
T/20.5*
The following information relates to James Grant, a trader, in respect of the
financial year ended 31 December Year 5: (1) On 8 January, Grant purchased motor
van number 5, for £10,800 from Roundstar Garages, according to invoice number
K/6807. He paid a deposit of £2,000 by cheque, the balance of the purchase being on
credit. (2) On 12 March, T Hardwicke, a debtor, paid £350 as a first and final
instalment on a debt of £1,400.The balance of the debt was written off as
irrecoverable. (3) On 20 June, Grant took from stock, for his own private use,
goods which had been purchased within the current trading year for £135. (4) On 15
October, Grant sold motor van number 3 for £4,000, which was paid by cheque. It had
been purchased in Year 2 for £8,800. The Provision for Depreciation on the motor
van Number 3 Account showed a balance of £5,200. (5) On 31 December, Grant’s
debtors totalled £18,600. He decided to adjust the provision for doubtful debts of
£650 to 4% of total debtors. Required Prepare journal entries to record the above
items, including narrations. (LCCIEB)
286
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 287
T/20.5/A
James Grant Journal Year 5 8 Jan Motor vehicles Bank Roundstar Garages Purchase of
motor van no 5, ref invoice no K/7807. Payment by cheque £2,000 with balance on
credit Dr £ 10,800 Cr £ 2,000 8,800
(1)
(2)
12 Mar Bank Bad debts T Hardwicke Payment of 25% of amount due; balance of debt
written off
350 1,050 1,400
(3)
20 Jun Drawings Purchases Goods taken for private use
135 135
(4)
15 Oct Disposal **Motor van Provision for depreciation on motor van Disposal Bank
Disposal Disposal Profit & loss Sale of motor van no 3, previously purchased in
Year 2 for £8,800. Cheque received £4,000
8,800 8,800 5,200 5,200 4,000 4,000 400 400
(5)
31 Dec Pofit & loss Provision for doubtful debts Increase in provision to 4% of
total debtors of £18,600
94 94
**This journal entry has been set out in this way to show the different elements in
the disposal. Other forms of layout may be acceptable.
287
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 288
T/21.1
In the year ended 31 December Year 9, the following errors occurred in the books of
Ching Wong: (1) Both the Office Expenses Account and Sales Account were overcast by
£100. (2) The purchase of equipment, for use in the business, was debited to the
Purchases Account. (3) A sale of goods to B Winlock for £346 was entered in the
Sales Day Book as £316. (4) A purchase of goods from T Lister was posted to T
Mister’s Account. (5) A bill for cleaning had not been entered in the books. (6) A
bill for travelling expenses had been entered in the Telephone Account. Required
Prepare a statement as follows and, against each item, state the type of error, eg
‘error of omission’:
Type of error (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
288
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 289
T/21.2
The following accounts appeared in the books of a trader:
Purchases Account Year 5 31 Dec Balance b/d 31 Dec Bank (new fixed assets) Year 6 1
Jan £ 16,220 2,140 18,360 18,360 Fixed Assets (at cost) Year 5 31 Dec Balance b/d
31 Dec Bank (goods for resale) Year 6 1 Jan £ 19,450 1,050 20,500 20,500 Year 5 31
Dec Balance c/d £ 20,500 Year 5 31 Dec Balance c/d £ 18,360
18,360
Balance b/d
20,500
Balance b/d
Required (a) What type or types of error have been made in these accounts? (b)
Would the correction of these errors increase or decrease the gross profit and, if
so, by how much?
T/21.3
Required Name each of the following errors: (1) The proceeds from the sale of some
office furniture had been posted from the Cash Book to the credit of the Sales
Account. (2) The proprietor of a business had taken for his own use goods purchased
for resale.This had not been recorded in the books. (3) An invoice for £271 for
goods sold on credit to N Pinter had been entered in the books as £217. (4) A
payment for electricity had been posted from the Cash Book to the debit of the Rent
Payable Account.
289
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 290
T/21.4
The following trial balance was prepared incorrectly for K Masters at 31 December
Year 8, with some balances entered in the wrong column:
Dr £ 28,500 19,084 22,315 4,600 137,918 183,217 11,584 14,600 560 687 6,150 765 930
580 4,800 18,886 754 1,566 130,000 369,054 176,391 395,150 Cr £
Motor vehicles Debtors Carriage inwards Cash at bank and in the office Rent
receivable Purchases Sales Creditors Drawings Bad debts written off Carriage
outwards Motor-vehicle running expenses Discount allowed Provision for doubtful
debts Discount received Provision for depreciation on motor vehicles Salaries and
wages Sundry expenses Lighting and heating Premises Capital
317
Required Prepare a correct trial balance for K Masters at 31 December Year 8.

(LCCIEB)
290
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 291
T/21.5
Laurence Grant failed to agree his trial balance at 30 June Year 5.The following
errors were later discovered: (1) The Purchases Day Book total of £5,960 had been
posted to the Purchases Account in the General Ledger as £5,690. (2) The withdrawal
by Laurence Grant of £95 in cash for private use had been posted to the debit of
the Office Expenses Account. (3) The purchase on credit of computer stationery for
£135 had been debited to the Office Equipment Account. (4) Discount allowed of £157
had been credited to the Discount Received Account. (5) A cheque for £430 had been
correctly debited in the Cash Book but the double entry had not been completed.
Required Prepare a statement showing the effect of these errors upon the trial
balance of Laurence Grant.You should set out your answer as follows:
Cause debit total to exceed credit total by £ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Cause credit
total to exceed debit total by £
Note If there is no effect on the trial balance, you should state ‘no effect’.
(LCCIEB)
291
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 292
T/22.1
Lynn Webster is a sole trader whose financial year ends on 30 September. At 30
September Year 5, she failed to agree her trial balance and found the following
errors and omission: (1) The payment by cheque of an invoice for £515 for repairs
to the office computer had been recorded in the Cash Book and posted to the Office
Equipment Account. (2) A payment of £390 for advertising had been posted to the
Travelling Expenses Account. (3) Lynn Webster had taken goods, bought during the
year ended 30 September Year 5 for £186, for her personal use, but no entry had yet
been made in the books. (4) The sale of goods for cash £730 had been entered as a
credit to the Cash Account and a debit to the Sales Account. (5) The payment of
wages, £1,560 in cash, to Webster’s employees for building an extension to the
firm’s offices, had been entered in the Cash Book and posted to the Wages Account.
Required Prepare journal entries, including narrations, necessary to deal with the
errors in (1), (2), (4), (5) and the omission in (3).
T/22.2
The following errors occurred in the books of Eric Sawyer, a sole trader, in one
accounting period: (1) The cost for petrol of £26 was wrongly debited to the Motor
Vehicles Account. (2) The purchase of goods on credit for £86 from T Lawton was
recorded in both the Purchases Day Book and the personal account as £68. (3) The
payment of a subscription to a trade association, £60, was wrongly debited to the
Purchases Account. (4) The total of one month’s discount-received column in the
Cash Book, which was £54, was posted to the credit side of the Discount Allowed
Account. (5) The total of the stationery analysis column of the Petty Cash Book for
February Year 8, £13.50, was posted to the Postages Account. (6) A purchase of a
new motor van for £10,500 had been debited to Fixtures and Fittings. Required Show
the correction of each of the above errors by means of a journal entry. Your
entries should include narrations.
292
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 293
T/22.3*
Henry James, a sole trader, extracted a trial balance at 30 September Year 6. It
did not agree. On checking the entries in his books, he discovered the following:
(1) A payment of £380 from a debtor, C Bates, had been posted to another debtor’s
account in the name of C Yates. (2) The total of credit sales for March appeared in
the Sales Day Book as £5,680 but this had been posted in the Sales Account as
£6,680. (3) A credit purchase of £100 had been correctly entered in the Purchases
Day Book for the month of September; it had also, however, been wrongly posted as a
cash purchase. (4) Rent of £500 for the month of May had been paid by cheque but no
double entry had been completed in the Rent Account. (5) A telephone bill paid by
cheque, amounting to £230, had been posted in error to the Electricity Account. (6)
A cash sale of £300 had been completely omitted from the books. (7) The purchase of
a motor van costing £7,000 had been posted in error to the Purchases Account.
Required Prepare the necessary journal entries on 30 September Year 6 to correct
the above errors and omission. Narrations are not required.
T/22.3/A
Henry James Journal Year 6 (1) 30 Sep (2) 30 Sep (3) 30 Sep (4) 30 Sep (5) 30 Sep
(6) 30 Sep (7) 30 Sep Dr £ 380 1,000 – 100 100 500 – 230 230 300 300 7,000 7,000 Cr
£ 380
C Yates C Bates Sales No entry Cash/bank Purchases Rent No entry Telephone

Electricity Cash/bank Sales Motor van Purchases
293
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 294
T/22.4*
The following relates to the business of W Lennon:
Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 31 December Year 5 £ Stock at
1 Jan Yr 5 Purchase add Carriage inwards less Returns outwards 76,300 1,150 77,450
980 76,470 89,070 13,200 75,870 61,860 137,730 640 8,200 24,300 1,850 2,370 Gross
profit b/d Discount received £ 12,600 Sales less Returns inwards £ 138,400 670
137,730
less Stock at 31 Dec Yr 5 Gross profit c/d Discount allowed Motor-vehicle expenses
Wages Insurance Office expenses Provision for depreciation: Office equipment 1,120
Motor vehicles 8,500 Net profit
137,730 61,860 720
9,620 15,600 62,580
62,580
294
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 295
Balance sheet at 31 December Year 5 Cost £ 45,000 5,600 34,800 85,400 Accumulated
depreciation £ – 1,680 12,850 14,530 13,200 6,300 1,050 20,550 4,100 16,450 87,320
Net book value £ 45,000 3,920 21,950 70,870
Fixed Assets Premises Office equipment Motor vehicles
Current Assets Stock Debtors Cash and bank
less Amounts due within 1 year Creditors
Financed by: Capital – balance at 1 Jan Yr 5 add Net profit less Drawings 83,920
15,600 12,200 3,400 87,320
It was later found that the following errors/omissions had been made during the
year ended 31 December Year 5: (1) Stock at 31 December Year 5 had been wrongly
valued. It should have been valued at £12,900. (2) A bill, not yet paid, for
carriage inwards, £100, for Year 6, had wrongly been charged to Year 5. (3) No
adjustment had been made for prepayment of insurance, £350, at 31 December Year 5.
(4) £300 paid in wages had been posted wrongly to the Office Expenses Account. (5)
The provision for depreciation of motor vehicles had been wrongly calculated. It
should have been £8,700. Required (a) In a statement, show for each of the 5
errors/omissions the effect upon gross profit, net profit and the balance sheet of:
(i) the error/omission (ii) correcting the error/omission. (b) Show, for W Lennon,
the revised Trading and Profit & Loss Account and balance sheet after the necessary
adjustments have been made.
295
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 296
T/22.4/A: part (a) only

Effect of error/omission Gross profit overstated by £300 Net profit overstated by
£300 Balance sheet: Stock overstated by Capital overstated £300 Gross profit and
net profit understated by £100 Balance sheet: Sundry creditors by overstated £100
Capital understated Net profit understated by £350 Balance sheet: Current assets by
understated £350 Capital understated
  
Effect of correcting for the error/omission Gross profit reduced by £300 Net profit
reduced by £300 Balance sheet: Stock reduced by Capital reduced £300 Gross profit
and net profit both increased by £100 Balance sheet: Sundry creditors by reduced
£100 Capital increased Net profit increased by £350 Balance sheet: Current assets
by increased £350 Capital increased
     
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
by £200
Note It will be clear that the effect of correcting for the error/omission is the
reverse of the effect of the error/omission. Both effects would not be included in
any examination question. They are both included in this instance to emphasize the
difference in the wording of the two parts of the answer to (a). Incorrect or
unsuitable wording of answers in this topic can result in a significant loss of
marks.
296
  
  
Net profit overstated by £200 Balance sheet: Fixed assets overstated Capital
overstated
  
(4)
Office expenses overstated Wages understated No further effects
by £350
Reduced office expenses Increased wages No further effects
Net profit reduced by £200 Balance sheet: Fixed assets reduced Capital reduced
  
  
  
  
by £300
by £200
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 297
T/22.5
Helen Sagan, a sole trader, prepared a trial balance at 30 September Year 5, which
did not agree.You have found the following errors: (1) A cash payment for material
purchases for £726 had been entered in the Cash Book as £762.The correct entry had
been made in the Purchases Account. (2) A receipt of £2,320 from a debtor, J
Wilson, had been posted to the account of S Williamson. (3) A purchase, on credit,
of a new machine for £5,300 had been debited to the Machine Repair Account.
Depreciation is not charged on assets in the year they are purchased. (4) A cheque
payment of £856 to a creditor had been entered in the creditor’s account but had
been omitted from the Cash Book. (5) A cheque payment of £2,000 for rent had been
entered in the Cash Book as £200. This incorrect amount had also been entered into
the expense account. (6) An invoice from P Rees for purchases of £240 had been
omitted from the ledger. Required (a) Prepare journal entries to correct the
errors. Narrations are not required. (b) Prepare a statement, as shown below, and
enter the effect on profit of each of the errors, including the amount. If there is
no effect enter a tick ( ) in the right hand column.
Effect on profit Error number (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Overstated £ Understated £ No
effect
297
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 298
T/22.6
This exercise refers to the errors set out in T/22.2. Required State the effect of
the correction of each of these errors on the draft net profit of Sawyer. You
should set out your answer as follows:
Increase of net profit £ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Reduction of net profit £
Note Enter each amount in the appropriate column. If there is no effect on the net
profit, you should state ‘no effect’. (LCCIEB)
T/22.7
This exercise refers to T/22.1. Despite having failed to agree her trial balance,
Lynn Webster calculated a provisional profit of £5,670. Required Prepare a
statement as shown below and against each of the items (1) – (5) enter the effect,
with the amounts, on the provisional profit of correcting for the error/omission.
If there is no effect, you should enter a tick ( ) in the column headed ‘no
effect’.
Effect of corrections on net profit Increase £ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Reduce £ No
effect
Underneath your statement, you should state the amount of the revised net profit,
after the necessary adjustments have been made.
298
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 299
T/23.1*
J Salmon, a sole trader, prepared the following trial balance from her books at 30
June Year 6:
Dr £ 80,000 82,000 263,500 3,400 15,700 2,300 650 35,000 28,200 23,000 19,000
12,000 3,360 3,420 12,300 10,720 420 3,930 556,900 Cr £
Motor vehicles at cost Fixtures and fittings at cost Purchases and purchases
returns Sales and sales returns Stock (1 Jul Yr 5) Discounts Provision for doubtful
debts Bad debts Debtors and creditors Capital Drawings Provision for depreciation:
Motor vehicles Fixtures and fittings Rent Motor-vehicle running expenses Rates and
insurances Salaries Cash at bank Cash in hand Lighting and heating
7,300 370,000 1,600 600 27,400 108,000
556,900
At 30 June Year 6: (1) Depreciation is to be provided as follows: Motor vehicles

Fixtures and fittings 25% on cost 10% on cost
(2) Stock was valued at cost £17,400. (3) The provision for doubtful debts is to be
set at 2% of the debtors. (4) Motor-vehicle running expenses at £510 and lighting
and heating at £420 were accrued. (5) The rates and insurances were prepaid by
£120. Required Prepare for J Salmon: (a) a Trading and Profit & Loss Account for
the year ended 30 June Year 6 (b) a balance sheet at 30 June Year 6. (LCCIEB)
299
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 300
T/23.1/A
J Salmon Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year ended 30 June Year 6 £
Stock at 1 Jul Yr 6 Purchases less Purchases returns less Stock at 30 June Yr 6
Cost of goods sold Gross profit c/d Depreciation: Motor vehicles 20,000 Fixtures
and fittings 8,200 Discounts allowed Bad debts Provision for doubtful debts Rent
Motor-vehicle running expenses (3,360 + 510) Rates and insurances (3,420 - 120)
Salaries Lighting and heating (3,930 + 420) Net profit 263,500 7,300 256,200
271,900 17,400 254,500 112,100 366,600 Gross profit b/d 28,200 2,300 650 100 12,000
3,870 3,300 12,300 4,350 46,630 113,700 Discounts received £ 15,700 Sales less
Sales returns £ 370,000 3,400 366,600
366,600 112,100 1,600
113,700
300
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 301
Balance sheet at 30 June Year 6 Accumulated depreciation £ 43,000 27,200 70,200

17,400 35,000 700 34,300 120 10,720 420 62,960 Net book value £ 37,000 54,800
91,800
Fixed Assets Motor vehicles Fixtures and fittings Current Assets Stocks Debtors
less Provision for doubtful debts Prepayments Cash at bank Cash in hand less
Amounts due within 1 year Creditors Accrued (510 + 420) Net current assets Financed
by: Capital add Net profit less Drawings
Cost £ 80,000 82,000 162,000
27,400 930
28,330 34,630 126,430 108,000 46,630 28,200 18,430 126,430
301
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 302
T/23.2
Hilda Braquette prepared the following trial balance at 31 October Year 5:
Dr £ Stock at 1 Nov Yr 4 Fixtures and fittings at cost Provision for depreciation
of fixtures and fittings at 1 Nov Yr 4 Bank Cash in hand Debtors and creditors
Motor vehicles at cost Provision for depreciation of motor vehicles at 1 Nov Yr 4
Purchases and sales Discounts allowed and received Drawings Motor-vehicle running
expenses Wages Bad debts Provision for doubtful debts Returns inwards and outwards
Rent Light and heat Insurance Office expenses Capital 6,820 14,000 2,800 3,200 148
10,300 24,000 75,820 2,140 13,200 5,860 43,972 390 1,180 10,400 650 1,080 2,100
215,260 6,920 7,200 161,360 1,580 Cr £
210 850
34,340 215,260
Additional information at 31 October Year 5:

£ (1) (2) (3) Stock at cost Insurance prepaid Accrued due: Light and heat Office
expenses (4) 80 140 220 £ 8,460 240
Depreciation is provided as follows: Fixtures and fittings – 10% per annum on cost
Motor vehicles – 20% per annum on cost Provision for doubtful debts is to be
adjusted to 4% of debtors
(5)
Required For Hilda Braquette, prepare: (a) the Trading and Profit & Loss Account
for the year ended 31 October Year 5 (b) a balance sheet at 31 October Year 5.
(LCCIEB)
302
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 303
T/23.3
The following trial balance was extracted from the ledger of P Lippis, a sole
trader, on 31 March Year 12:
Business premises at cost Purchases and sales Capital Stock at 1 Apr Yr 11
Purchases returns Fixtures and fittings at cost Provision for depreciation of
fixtures and fittings Trade debtors: R Prince K Evitts J Carr Archway Supplies
Trade creditors: K Porter Archway Supplies Cash in hand Cash at bank Wages
Advertising Heat and light Insurances Other expenses Drawings Dr £ 85,000 39,800
8,310 285 12,700 2,540 480 1,010 180 370 2,210 4,096 47 1,093 8,942 110 1,092 368
459 7,240 167,201 Cr £ 64,650 93,420
167,201
The following additional information is to be taken into account: Stock valued at

cost on 31 March Year 12, £7,935. Accruals at 31 March Year 12: wages £230; heat
and light £98. Prepayment at 31 March Year 12, Insurances £46. Lippis received a
bank statement, showing that there was a balance in his favour on 31 March Year 12,
amounting to £1,140.A creditor had not yet presented a cheque drawn by Lippis for
£79, and the bank applied bank charges amounting to £32. (5) Depreciation was to be
provided on fixtures and fittings at 10% per annum on cost. (6) Archway Supplies
was Lippis’ main supplier. Unusually, Archway purchased goods from Lippis, and it
was agreed that the debtor balance should be a contra against the creditor balance.
Required Prepare for P Lippis: (a) a Trading and Profit & Loss Account for the year
ended 31 March Year 12 (b) a balance sheet at 31 March Year 12. (LCCIEB)
303
(1) (2) (3) (4)

pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 304
T/23.4
At 31 December Year 3, the end of her first year of trading, Hilda Braquette
produced the following list of stock items and asked for your help:
Item (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) Quantity 200 500 1,200 50 75 350 450
Original cost £ 2.00 5.00 1.00 3.00 4.00 3.00 2.00 Selling price £ 3.00 7.50 1.50
2.50 6.00 4.50 3.00 20 damaged – saleable at half price Comments Stock value £
20 broken – to be thrown away 40 damaged – saleable at half price old stock
Required Calculate the stock valuation of each item and total to show the value of
Hilda Braquette’s closing stock at 31 December Year 3.
304
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 305
T/23.5
The following balances were included in the trial balance of James Hanson at 31
March Year 4:
Debit £ 18,620 238 1,146 Credit £ 29,410 194
Purchases and sales Returns Stock at 1 Apr Yr 3
At 31 March Year 4, James Hanson counted and valued his stock in hand at cost,
£1,382. This included the following 3 items of stock:
Cost price £ 120 72 80 Net realizable value £ 140 60 45
Item 1 Item 2 Item 3
Required (a) Prepare a statement, starting with the stock value of £1,382, showing
any necessary adjustments in respect of the 3 items of stock above, to show a new
stock valuation at 31 March Year 4. (b) Prepare a Trading Account for James Hanson
for the year ended 31 March Year 4.
305
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 306
T/23.6
The financial year of F Lang, a trader, ends on 31 March. F Lang sells goods at a
mark-up of 33 1/3 % on cost price. On 31 March Year 4, the value of his stock at
cost was £12,360. On 17 March Year 5, he provisionally valued his stock at £14,220.
Between 18 March Year 5 and the end of that financial year, the following took
place: (1) Lang bought goods to a purchase invoice value of £740. (2) He returned
goods to suppliers that had been invoiced to him at £273. (3) He sold goods to a
selling value of £1,320. (4) Lang took goods that had cost £195 for his own private
use. Required (a) Prepare a statement adjusting the value of stock at 31 March Year
5 for entry into the Stock Account at cost price. (b) Calculate the effect of the
adjustment of the value of stock on the amount of the gross profit £94,800 for the
year ended 31 March Year 5. (c) Prepare the Stock Account for the years ended 31
March Years 5 and 6 respectively, assuming that the value of stock at 31 March Year
6 was £15,300. (LCCIEB)
306
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 307
T/24.1
The Treasurer of the Southern Jazz Club drew up the following Receipts & Payments
Account for the year ended 31 December Year 19:
£ Balance at bank, 1 Jan Yr 19 Members’ subscriptions Sale of Festival tickets Sale
of food and drink 3,860 3,520 1,840 2,730 Hire of rooms Annual subscription to
National Jazz Association Festival expenses Printing and postage Purchase of
equipment Purchase of food and drink Balance at bank £ 2,100 150 1,970 868 1,200
2,480 3,182 11,950
11,950
The following additional information was available: (1) Members’ subscriptions in

arrears at 31 December Year 19 amounted to £50. (2) On 1 January Year 19, the Club
owned equipment worth £2,600. It was decided that the equipment owned at 31
December Year 19 should be depreciated by £700. Required Prepare the Income &
Expenditure Account in respect of the Southern Jazz Club for the year ended 31
December Year 19. Note A balance sheet is not required.
307
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 308
T/24.2*
Walton Cricket Club had the following Receipts & Payments Account for the year
ended 31 December Year 8:
Receipts Balance at bank Subscriptions Refreshment takings Hire of ground Sale of
raffle tickets £ 2,920 8,120 5,200 650 1,010 Payments Purchases – refreshments
Purchases – equipment Wages of groundsman Wages of refreshment staff Telephone
Secretary’s expenses Light and heat Insurance Repairs/renewals Purchase – raffle
prizes Balance at bank £ 3,000 2,460 4,180 1,600 215 468 366 450 1,272 500 3,389
17,900
17,900
The following information was also available:

At 31 December Year 7 £ 340 590 – – 8,000 5,600 50 At 31 December Year 8 £ 560 630
180 50 7,000 7,254 80
Stock of refreshments Creditors for refreshments Subscriptions in arrears

Subscriptions in advance Pavilion Sports equipment Insurance prepaid
Required Prepare, for the Walton Cricket Club, for the year ended 31 December Year
8: (a) the Refreshments Account (b) the Income & Expenditure Account. (LCCIEB)
308
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 309
T/24.2/A
Walton Cricket Club Refreshments Account for the year ended 31 December Year 8 £
Stock at 1 Jan Yr 8 Purchases (3,000 - 590 + 630) less Stock at 31 Dec Yr 8 Cost of
sales Wages Profit on trading 340 3,040 3,380 560 2,820 1,600 780 5,200 Sales £
5,200
5,200
Income & Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 December Year 8 Expenditure £
Wages – groundsman Telephone Secretary’s expenses Light and heat Repairs and
renewals Insurance (450 + 50 - 80) Depreciation: Pavilion 1,000 Equipment 806
Surplus, excess of income over expenditure £ 4,180 215 468 366 1,272 420 Income £ £
Profit from refreshments 780 Subscriptions 8,120 add Arrears 180 8,300 less In
advance 50 8,250 Profit on raffles: Sale of tickets less Cost of prizes Hire of
ground
1,010 500
1,806 1,463 10,190
510 650
10,190
309
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 310
T/24.3*
The Treasurer of the Belvedere Sports Club prepared the following Receipts &
Payments Account for the year ended 30 September Year 11:
Receipts Balance at bank Sale of raffle tickets Sale of refreshments Subscriptions
£ 3,160 810 4,020 4,160 Payments Purchase of refreshments Insurance Printing and
stationery Light and heat Repairs to equipment Purchase of raffle prizes Wages –
refreshments staff Purchase of equipment Wages – ground staff Postage Balance at
bank £ 2,460 250 165 235 430 390 1,710 2,400 1,220 80 2,810 12,150
12,150
Additional information:
30 September Year 10 £ 90 100 1,020 35 30 6,500 30 September Year 11 £ 60 170 1,310
50 54 8,000
Subscriptions in advance Subscriptions in arrears Stock of refreshments Insurance

paid in advance Light and heat accrued due Equipment
Required Prepare, for the Belvedere Sports Club, for the year ended 30 September
Year 11: (a) a Refreshments Trading Account (b) an Income & Expenditure Account.
Note A balance sheet is not required.
310
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 311
T/24.3/A
Belvedere Sports Club Refreshments Trading Account for the year ended 30 September
Year 11 Stock at 1 Oct Yr 10 Purchases less Stock at 30 Sep Yr 11 Cost of sales
Wages Profit on trading £ 1,020 2,460 3,480 1,310 2,170 1,710 140 4,020 Sales £
4,020
4,020
Income & Expenditure Account for the year ended 30 September Year 11 Expenditure
Insurance (250 + 35 - 50) Printing and stationery Light and heat (235 - 30 + 54)
Repairs to equipment Wages – ground staff Postage Depreciation of equipment Surplus
of income over expenditure £ 235 165 259 430 1,220 80 900 1,531 4,820
£ ** Subscriptions: add In advance 30 Sep Yr 10 In arrears 30 Sep Yr 11 90 170 £
4,160 260 4,420 less In arrears 30 Sep Yr 10 In advance 30 Sep Yr 11 100 60
Income Profit on refreshments Subscriptions Profit from raffle: Sale of tickets

less Cost of prizes
£ 140 4,260**
810 390
420
4,820
160 4,260
311
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 312
Appendix 2: Summarized answers to selected exercises

1.1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Goods +350 Bank -350 Cash +290 Goods -290 Office
furniture +318 D Jackson, Creditor +318 Loan,T Walls -1,500 Bank -1,500 Bank +965 F
Wiles -965 Postage +11 Cash -11 Bank -617 T Gates -617
1.2
(i) Computer -3,600 Bank +3,600 (ii) Computer -3,600 Debtor +3,600 (iii) Computer
-3,600 Bank +2,000 Debtor +1,600 Assets £23,660 Capital £16,190 Other liabilities
£7,470 (i) 31 Oct Yr 3: Assets £22,905 Capital £16,045 Other liabilities £6,860
(ii) 30 Nov Yr 3: Assets £22,145 Capital £16,045 Other liabilities £6,100 Debited
Purchases Cash Equipment T Ball D Trill Office furniture Debited A Darby Returns
inwards Bank T Zuck Creditor, F Lane Returns inwards Debited Purchases Creditor
Office equipment Rent Cash Bank Credited T Ball Sales Bank Returns outwards Sales
Creditor,T Doyle Credited Sales A Brittle A Darby Returns outwards Bank A Darby
Credited Cash Bank Office Services Ltd Cash Sales F Tracey
1.3 1.5
2.1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 2.2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 3.1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
312
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 313
Appendix 2: Summarized answers
3.2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Debited Bank J King Telephone Cash Insurance Purchases Returns inwards
Credited T Ward (loan) Sales Bank Office furniture Bank R Veal B Trent
4.1 (a) Cr balance £1,215 4.1 (b) Debit balance – on debtor’s account; representing
an asset 4.6 5.3 5.4 7.1 7.3 7.4 7.6 Trial balance totals £31,780 Gross profit
£17,210 Gross profit £27,180 Gross profit £18,030 Gross profit £85,260 Gross profit
£18,170 Gross profit £82,350 Balance sheet: Net profit £5,090 Net profit £6,900 Net
profit £7,270 Net profit £23,250 Net profit £6,850 Net profit £14,800
£ Fixed assets 162,500 Current assets 40, 894 Amounts due in more than 1 year
26,000 Creditors 16,394 Capital 161,000
9.2
Multiple choice: (1) (b) and (d) (2) (a) and (c) (3) (b) and (d)
10.1 Balances at 31 Mar Yr 5: Cash £117 Bank £978 (Dr) Discount Allowed Account
Discount Received Account Dr £18 Cr £16
10.2 Balances at 31 May Yr 6: Cash £423 Bank £8,259 Discount totals: Discount
allowed Discount received Dr £80 Cr £71
313
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 314
10.3 Balances of Cash Book before adjustment: Cash £99 Bank £383 (Dr) Balances
after adjustment: Cash £99 Bank £200 (Dr) 10.4 (a) Bank balance at 31 May Yr 11:
£1,198 (Dr)
(b) Discount Allowed Account Dr £25 Discount Received Account Cr £47 Both recorded
in the General (Nominal) Ledger 11.1 (a) Sales Day Book total for August Year 6
£2,133 11.2 (a) Sales Day Book total for September Year 6 £1,672 11.3 (a) Purchases
Day Book total for October Year 8 £1,930 11.4 Balances at 31 Jul Yr 2: Cash £263
Bank £2,129 Discount totals: Dr Cr Discount allowed Discount received £60 £30
£1,305 £152
12.1 (a) (i) Sales Day Book total (ii) Returns inwards Day Book total
12.2 (a) (i) Purchases Day Book total £1,141 (ii) Returns Outwards Day Book total
£109 12.3 (a) Purchases Day Book total Sales Day Book total Returns Outwards Day
Book total Returns Inwards Day Book total 12.4 (a) Purchases Day Book total
Purchases Returns Day Book total Sales Day Book total (b) To encourage prompt
payment. 12.5 (a) Purchases Day Book total £15,155 14.1 (a) Rates Telephone
Insurance Rent receivable Wages To P/L 31 Dec Yr 5 1,510 Cr 262 Cr 700 Cr 4,000 Dr
46,470 Cr Balance b/d 1 Jan Yr 6 450 Dr 47 Cr 60 Dr 160 Dr 840 Cr £988 £1,349 £127
£174 £1,436 £64 £1,336
314
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 315
14.1 (b)
M Paine Balance sheet (extract) at 31 December Year 5 £ £ Amounts due within 1 year
(current liabilities) Accruals: Telephone Wages
Current Assets Prepayments: Rates Insurance Rent receivable
450 60 160 670
47 840 887
14.2 (a) (i) Rent (ii) Commission receivable (iii) Telephone 14.2 (b)
To P/L 31 Dec Yr 10 4,950 Cr 65,800 Dr 1,010 Cr
Balance b/d 1 Jan Yr 11 1,350 Dr 4,700 Dr 300 Cr
L Reinholdt Balance sheet (extract) at 31 December Year 10 £ £ Amounts due within 1

year (current liabilities) Telephone – accrual
Current Assets Rent in advance Commission due
1,350 4,700 6,050
300
14.4 (a) Insurance Stationery Telephone Rent payable Rent receivable 14.5 (a) (i)
(ii) (iii) (iv) 14.6 (a) Rent receivable Rates Advertising Printing/stationery 15.1
Advertising Insurance Office cleaning Rent receivable
To P/L 31 Dec Yr 5 620 Cr 780 Cr 572 Cr 3,570 Cr 900 Dr To P/L 30 Jun Yr 5 360 Cr
560 Cr 1,640 Cr 2,220 Dr To P/L 30 Jun Yr 9 2,630 Dr 3,300 Cr 2,400 Cr 2,185 Cr
Balance b/d 1 Jan Yr 6 95 Dr 160 Dr 45 Cr 56 Cr 740 Dr 150 Dr Balance b/d 1 Jul Yr

5 190 Cr 50 Dr 280 Cr 190 Cr Balance b/d 1 Jul Yr 9 740 Cr 840 Dr 580 Dr 3,100 Dr
615 Cr
Depreciation charge Net book value (a) £2,100 (b) £4,160 £8,300 £6,240
315
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 316
15.2 Balances at 1 Jan Yr 8: (ii) Provision for depreciation of motor van (iv)
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings
£8,356 Cr £3,440 Cr
15.4 Balances at 1 Jan Yr 8: (ii) Provision for depreciation of computer equipment

£4,800 Cr (iv) Provision for depreciation of motor vehicle £7,120 Cr 15.5 Balances
at 1 Jan Yr 6: (1) Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings £1,875 Cr
(2) Provision for depreciation of motor vehicle £12,816 Cr 15.6 Balance at 1 Jan Yr
7: (ii) Provision for depreciation of furniture and equipment (v) Disposal of Motor
Van Account: debit entry – P/L profit on sale To P/L Account 31 Mar Yr 4 £79 Cr 31
Mar Yr 5 54 Cr 31 Mar Yr 6 78 Dr Balance 1 Apr Yr 6 £435 Cr £3,900 Cr £1,386
16.1 (a) (ii) Provision for doubtful debts:
16.2 (a) (i) (2) Provision for doubtful debts: To P/L Account 31 Dec Yr 1 £1,410 Cr
31 Dec Yr 2 1,598 Cr 31 Dec Yr 3 1,210 Dr Balance 1.1.4 £1,798 Cr 16.4 (a)
Provision for doubtful debts: To P/L Account 31 Dec Yr 8 £152 Cr 31 Dec Yr 9 764 Cr
31 Dec Yr 10 336 Dr £ 240 240 240 To P/L Account 31 Dec Yr 4 £275 Cr 31 Dec Yr 5
245 Dr Balance 1 Jan Yr 6 £780 Cr
(b)
Journal Debtor Bad debts recovered Cash/bank Debtor £ 240
16.5 (iv) Provision for doubtful debts:
316
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 317
17.1 Cash Book (bank) balance: before adjustment £4,549 Dr after adjustment £3,632
Dr 17.2 (a) Cash Book (bank) balance after adjustment £3,966 Dr 17.3 Cash Book
(bank) balance after adjustment £3,793 Dr 18.1 Total outlay £97.20 Travelling
expenses £16.84 Stationery £13.57 Postage £5.95 Purchases £53.47 Cleaning expenses
£7.37 Balance b/d 1 Jul Yr 7 £2.80 Reimbursement £97.20 18.2 (a) Total outlay
£253.80 Motor-vehicle expenses £97.60 Postage £18.20 Stationery £31.00 Travelling
expenses £46.60 Ledger £60.40 Balance b/d 1 Apr Yr 6 £46.20 Reimbursement £253.80
(b) (i) To debit of Motor Vehicle Expenses Account (ii) General (Nominal) Ledger
18.4 (a) Week 1: Total outlay £77.48 Wages £45.00 Postage £10.00 Travel £6.15
Sundries £6.58 Ledger £9.75 Reimbursement £77.48 Week 2: Total outlay £74.56 Wages
£48.00 Postage £8.73 Travel £3.35 Sundries £14.48 (b) Any 2 from:
● ● ● ●
theft from box; cash in box incorrectly counted; incorrect amount paid out; amount
paid out without being recorded, ie without a voucher.
19.1 (1) Capital (2) Revenue (3) Revenue (4) Capital (5) Revenue 19.2 (1) Revenue
(2) Capital (3) Revenue (4) Revenue (5) £5,100 Capital £1,300 Revenue (6) Revenue
(7) Capital (8) Revenue 19.3 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) JK Distributors Revenue Capital
Capital Revenue Capital Jameson Partners Capital Capital Revenue Revenue Revenue
317
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 318
19.4
Capital expenditure £ Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice 1 2 3 4 42,700 1,460 12,400
Revenue expenditure £ 25,175 890 62 2,535
Total expenditure £ 25,175 43,590 1,522 14,935
20.3 (b) Gross profit £29,445 21.1 (1) Compensating error (2) Error of principle
(3) Error of original entry (4) Error of commission (5) Error of omission (6) Error
of commission 21.2 (a) Errors of principle (b) Increase the gross profit by £1,090
21.3 (1) Principle (2) Omission (3) Original entry (4) Commission 21.4 Totals
£382,102 21.5 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 22.5 (b) Profit overstated (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6) 22.6 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Profit understated No effect Cause debit total to
exceed credit total No effect No effect £314 £430 Cause credit total to exceed
debit total £270
£5,300 £1,800 £240 Reduction of net profit £26 £18 effect effect effect effect
Increase of net profit
No No No No
318
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 319
22.7
Increased net profit (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Reduced net profit £ 515
No effect
186 1,460 1,560 3,206
515 £ 5,670 2,691 8,361
Provisional net profit add Net adjustment Adjusted net profit
23.2 (a) Gross profit £86,850 Net profit £15,456 (b) Balance sheet: Net assets
£36,596 Closing capital £36,596 23.3 (a) Gross profit £24,760 Net profit £12,205
(b) Balance sheet: Net assets £98,385 Closing capital £98,385
23.4 (i) £400 (ii) £2,400 (iii) £1,190 (iv) £125 (v) £300 (vi) £1,050 (vii) £890
Total £6,355 23.5 (a) Pre-adjusted stock value Item 1 – no change Item 2 (12) Item
3 (35) Revised stock value (b) Gross profit £10,935 £ 23.6 (a) Provisional value
add Purchases less Returns 740 273 £ 14,220 467 14,687 990 13,697 195 13,502 £
1,382 (47) 1,335
less Sales (£1,320 less 25%) less Drawings
319
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 320
(b) Pre-adjusted gross profit deduct reduction in value of closing stock (14,220
-13,502) Revised gross profit
£ 94,800 718 94,082
24.1 Deficit (on income/expenditure) £128 Closing accumulated fund £6,332
320
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 321
Appendix 3: Glossary
Account A record of transactions by category (such as purchases) or by person or
organization. Accumulated fund The capital account of a club or society. Allowance
An amount set against a previous purchase or sale. Assets Resources or items owned
by the business. Bad debt A debt which is expected never to be paid; that is, an
irrecoverable debt. Balance The amount on one side of an account that exceeds the
amount on the other side ‘to balance’.The book-keeper finds and enters the
difference and brings it down. Balance sheet A form of financial statement. Bank
current account This account is used for the regular banking and withdrawal of
money. Bank deposit account A relatively stable account; withdrawals are usually
infrequent. Bank reconciliation statement A statement that accounts for the
difference between the bank statement balance and the adjusted Cash Book balance.
Bank statement A statement issued by a bank showing the customer’s account as
recorded by the bank. Capital The amount of the owner’s financial stake in the
business. Capital expenditure Expenditure that is expected to be of benefit to the
firm over the long term. It is generally incurred on the purchase, alteration, or
improvement of fixed assets. Carriage An expense incurred in, or charge made for,
the delivery of goods. Carriage inwards A payment made for having purchases
delivered. It should be added to purchases in the Trading Account. Carriage
outwards A payment to a carrier for delivering goods to customers. It should be
shown in the Profit & Loss Account. Cash discount An allowance for the early
settlement of an account. Cash purchases Goods bought and paid for immediately (in
cash or by cheque). Cash sales Goods sold with immediate payment (in cash or by
cheque). Cheque A written instruction to a bank to make payment. Cheque clearance
the passing of a cheque through the bank system, with payment completed.
321
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 322
Commission Payment or money received (paid) for carrying out (benefiting from) a
service, for example on sales, or providing (receiving) advice. Commission is
commonly calculated as a percentage. Compensating error When errors cancel each
other out. Contra Used for entries in the Cash Book where a debit bank entry is
matched by a credit cash entry and vice versa. Cost of goods sold Opening stock
plus purchases less closing stock for a given period. Counter credits Payments into
a bank account (a number of cheques, for example) amounting to a stated sum, which
are acknowledged by the bank as a credit into the account. Credit note Issued by
the seller, granting credit for the return of goods or for deficiency in supply.
Credit purchases Goods bought, with payment to be made at a later date. Credit
sales Goods sold, with payment to be received by an agreed future date. Credit
transfer A direct means of transferring money through the bank system, initiated by
the paying party. Creditor A person (or business) to whom money is owed by a
business. Current assets Short-term assets, which are directly involved in the
trading activities of the firm. Current liabilities Amounts payable within one
year. Debtor A person (or business) who owes money for goods or services supplied
by a business. Deficit An excess of expenditure over income (for a given period).
Depreciation The estimate of the fall in value of fixed assets over a period of
time. Direct debit Credit transfer in reverse: it is the direct transfer of money
through the banking system, initiated by the payee. Discount allowed A discount
granted to a debtor for early payment. Discount received A discount granted by a
creditor for early received payment. Dishonoured cheque A cheque that the drawer
has failed to honour. Donation A gift of money. Doubtful debts As in ‘provision for
doubtful debts’: debts that may never be recovered and for which an allowance is
made. Drawer The party who first signs a cheque, that is, on whose bank account the
cheque is drawn.
322
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 323
Drawings Money, goods, or services withdrawn from the business for the owner’s
personal benefit. Effective purchase price (or selling price) The list price less
trade discount. Error of commission When a transaction is entered in a wrong
account of the same class. Error of principle When a transaction is entered in the
wrong class of account. Expense Outlay or cost. Expense accrual An amount due in
respect of an accounting period that remains unpaid at the end of that period.
Final accounts Used as a broad term to include the Trading and Profit & Loss
Account and the balance sheet. Fixed assets Longer-term assets bought for use
within the business. Gross profit An excess of sales income over cost of goods
sold. Horizontal balance sheet Two-sided presentation, with assets on the balance
sheet on the left and capital/liabilities on the right. Impersonal accounts
Accounts concerning things rather than people, such as assets or expenses. Imprest
system A system in which a fixed float is reimbursed periodically. Income accrual
Income other than sales revenue, outstanding at the end of the period for which it
was due. Income prepayment Income received in advance of the due period. Invoice A
document issued on a credit sale, prepared by the seller and sent to the buyer. It
gives details of the goods supplied, the amount to be paid and the terms of sale.
Ledger The set of accounts belonging to a business. In a traditional manual system,
these would be kept in a book or series of books. Liabilities Amounts owing to
persons outside the business. List price The price of goods before the deduction of
a trade discount. Longer-term liabilities Amounts payable in more than one year.
Net profit Gross profit less other expenses. Net realizable value Selling price
less any costs of getting the goods into a saleable condition. Nil balance No
balance remaining on a given account.
323
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 324
Nominal accounts Income and expense accounts. On account Payment towards an amount
owing; a part payment. Opening entries Journal entries recording the opening
balances of a new set of accounts. Overdrawn account Occurs when more funds have
been withdrawn than put into the account; that is, a deficit. Payee The party to
whom a payment is due to be made. Personal accounts Accounts of people or
organizations with whom the business deals. Posting Entering transactions or period
totals in accounts from day books (including the Cash Book). Prepayment A payment
made in advance of an accounting period or due date. Prime entry As in ‘books of
prime entry’: the point at which a transaction is recorded for the first time,
prior to entry in the ledger. Private Ledger Normally used for keeping accounts of
a highly confidential nature, such as the Capital Account. Profit The surplus of
income over costs, usually calculated for a given time period. Provision An
accounting allowance for an estimated known or possible fall in the value of an
asset. Purchases Goods bought on credit or for cash, which are intended to be sold
later. Purchases Ledger Comprised of suppliers’ accounts, that is, ledger
creditors. Real accounts Comprised of assets. Receipts & Payments Account A
summarized version of the Cash Book of a club or society. Reducing balance
depreciation A fixed percentage is written off the reduced balance of the asset
each year. Reimbursement Makes good the total of outlays in a given period. Returns
inwards The return of previously sold goods by the customer, for which an allowance
is given. Returns outwards The return of previously bought goods, to the supplier,
who makes an allowance. Revenue Income. Revenue expenditure Expenses incurred in
running the business and in maintaining fixed assets.
324
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 325
Running balance The balance on the account is shown, updated, after each
transaction entry. A running balance is presented in columnar format. Sales Ledger
Comprised of customers’ accounts, that is, debtors. Set off One amount set against
another, to reduce the amount owed or receivable. Source document The basis of an
entry in the accounting system, such as a sales invoice. Standing order A direct
transfer between bank accounts, involving fixed amounts at regular intervals.
Straight line depreciation A fixed proportion is written off the original cost of
the asset each year. Terms of sale The conditions for settlement of an account,
such as a period of credit allowed or the rate of any cash discount. Trade discount
The amount allowed as a reduction of the list price when goods are sold by one
business to another business. Transaction on credit Taking ownership of an asset
now but paying for it at a later date. Trial balance A periodic check that the
total of the debit balances equals the total of the credit balances. Unpresented
cheque A cheque not yet presented to the bank for payment. Vertical balance sheet A
balance sheet presented to read downwards, like a story.
325
pages 267-326
15/3/03
11:18 am
Page 326
Notes
Lesson 11
1 In practice, an invoice may be raised for all sales, both cash and credit. From
the audit viewpoint, it is better to have all sales evidenced by an invoice. A
retailer is unlikely to enter directly each small sale transaction by debiting the
Cash Book and crediting the Sales Account. A summarizing method is likely to be
used, eg a till roll acting as a day book.
Lesson 12
1 If the account were to be settled before a return is made, payment would then be
made on the gross figure.
Lesson 19
1 Note that the relevant Financial Reporting Standard allows development
expenditure to be capitalized, provided there is substantial belief that future
product income will arise as a result of the development expenditure.
Lesson 20
1 In a computerized system, entering purchases of fixed assets into a journal may
not be necessary. All purchases can be dealt with through the Sales Journal (or
Sales Day Book), with coding to ensure that revenue and capital purchases are
properly separated.
326

LCCI Level 1 How To Pass Book Keeping Recommeded Book

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

LCCI Level 1 How To Pass Book Keeping Recommeded Book

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

prelims

FIRST LEVEL Teacher’s Guide

First published 1999 © LCCI CET 1999 British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication

Appendix 1: Exercises, some worked solutions, and support material Appendix 2:

201 312 321 326

About the author

Cross-references to How to Pass Book-keeping, First Level (student’s book)

210 231 237 246 272–84

Lesson 1: The accounting equation Transactions through ‘double entry’

Extended Syllabus references

2.1 2.2 2.3

The accounting equation

The accounting equation

Alternatively, the equation may be expressed as:

The accounting equation

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

The accounting equation

Here, there has been a switch between two assets.

The accounting equation

6 Use the following to show the effect after transaction (d):

From this balance sheet, a reduction in assets matched by a reduction in

The accounting equation

11 Emphasize the equation:

The accounting equation

Alternatively, you may show the following layout:

The accounting equation

The accounting equation

Lesson 2: Purchases, sales, and returns

Extended Syllabus references

5.4 5.5 5.6

Purchases, sales, and returns

2 Goods are now to be divided into:

purchases; and sales

Purchases, sales, and returns

addition to purchases = debit deduction from bank = credit

Purchases, sales, and returns

T Watling Year 7 30 Mar Bank £ 736 Year 7 12 Mar Purchases £ 736

4 Sales Any sale of goods is entered in a separate Sales Account.The account

Purchases, sales, and returns

7 To reinforce the students’ understanding, show the following summary of the

Purchases, sales, and returns

Purchases, sales, and returns

Purchases, sales, and returns

are difficult to repack or transport; or are costly to send back.

returns outwards or purchases returns; returns inwards or sales returns.

Lesson 3: Expenses: profit or loss

The nature and types of ‘expense’ Combination-type transactions: account entries

Extended Syllabus references

employee wages; rent of the premises; and advertising.

Expenses: profit or loss

This can be explained as: Cr = reduction of an asset (bank) Dr = acquisition of a

Expenses: profit or loss

The accounts will appear as follows:

Expenses: profit or loss

Alternatively, give the students the following formula:

profit* (or loss)

Lesson 4: Balancing accounts: the trial balance

Extended Syllabus references

Balancing accounts: the trial balance

X expense account Dr Year 3 Entries totalling £ 680 Year 3 Entries totalling Cr £

3 Explain a ‘nil’ balance:

Or a variation on the nil balance:

Balancing accounts: the trial balance